According to a new study, sacrifices, purported to be of divine sanction, were used to control lower classes by elites. The fear of God and the supernatural was used to beat the lower classes into submission and prevent their resurgence.
The study by researchers from the University of Auckland’s School of Psychology, the Max Planck Institute for the Science of human History in Germany and Victoria University, wanted to know how social stratification was linked to human sacrifice. They focussed on 93 ‘Austronesian’ cultures for their study.
The practice of human sacrifice was widespread throughout Austronesian cultures and was prevalent in 40 out of 93 cultures included in the study. Early Austronesian people are thought to have originated in Taiwan. They eventually moved south and settled almost across half the globe. They spread west to Madagascar, east to Rapa Nui (Easter Island) and south to the Pacific Islands and New Zealand.
Professor Russell Gray, a co-author of the study, notes that:
"Human sacrifice provided a particularly effective means of social control because it provided a supernatural justification for punishment. Rulers, such as priests and chiefs, were often believed to be descended from gods and ritual human sacrifice was the ultimate demonstration of their power.”
Ritualistic killings were carried out to punish those who dared to step out of conventions. Such killings were however encouraged so that the elite class could dictate rules suited to them and ensure that none violated those norms.
“By using human sacrifice to punish taboo violations, demoralize the underclass and instil fear of social elites, power elites were able to maintain and build social control,” lead study author Joseph Watts stated in a press release.
Ritualistic sacrifices were never humane and included barbaric methods to take life. Drowning, burning, strangulation, weapons induced death etc were used to inflict pain and fear. The idea of such public sacrifices were to ensure that the display of the killings also instilled fear in people and served as a warning to them to obey what ‘God’ had asked people to do through their proxies, the elites.
The system became self perpetuating because the elite wanted to maintain their clout and prevent social equality and justice.
The researchers said that the findings also explain how modern societies were formed. The fear of religious edicts drove the first principles of morality and cooperation that later developed in modern societies. Religious rituals also played a significant role in the evolution of modern societies, the study said.
Scientific American Writer Exposes The Tribal Cultist Arrogance And Dogmatic Lunacy Of Science 'Skeptics' May 29 2016 | From: NaturalNews
In his article, Horgan rightly points out that today's so-called "science skeptics" are little more than dogmatic tribal cultists (my words, not Horgan's) who celebrate "skeptical" thinking concerning their selected philosophical targets while vehemently denying anyone's right to question their own beliefs on things like breast cancer screening, vaccine safety, global warming and genetically engineered foods.
As Horgan eloquently explains in his piece, real skeptics are skeptical of everything, not just selected topics that are targeted by the madness of status quo science crowds (i.e. the "cult of scientism").
Real Skepticism Means Questioning Everything... Especially the Status Quo
A real skeptic, in other words, would bring critical thinking to all of our science narratives and cultural beliefs, including those that cover the origin of the universe (cosmology), the origin of the human species, the nature of consciousness, the long history of indigenous botanical medicine, the cancer industry and mammography, homeopathy, antidepressant drugs, water filters, the existence of God and everything else imaginable.
But far too many of today's infamous "skeptics" (such as Richard Dawkins) are really just cultists who labor under the false banner of "science."
And they're offensive to real critical thinkers, it turns out.
"I don’t hang out with people who self-identify as capital-S Skeptics. Or Atheists. Or Rationalists," explains Horgan. "When people like this get together, they become tribal.
They pat each other on the back and tell each other how smart they are compared to those outside the tribe. But belonging to a tribe often makes you dumber."
I've seen this myself, on both ends of the medicine spectrum. I've seen insanely stupid pharmacology experts swear that statin drugs are such miraculous chemicals that they should be dripped into the public water supply. But I've also seen "raw foodies" at festivals swearing that their "water vortexer machines" could levitate water in defiance of the laws of gravity.
In both cases, my critical thinking alarms go haywire, and I shake my head in disbelief that so many people are so gullible, regardless of their level of academic education or technical mastery of certain subjects.
A highly trained doctor with an IQ of 200 can be just as functionally stupid as a high school dropout, I've observed. In fact, when it comes to medicine and health, many so-called "experts" are so ignorant of reality that they almost seem cognitively retarded.
My Experience as a Food Research Scientist Has Taught Me to Distrust Everything by Default
As a food scientist and lab science director of CWC Labs where I conduct food analysis via ICP-MS, LC/MS-TOF and other instruments, I've become even more skeptical of the mainstream natural products industry over the last few years.
Take note of the massive scam of commercial almond milk sold in grocery stores. Such products contain almost no almonds at all. Instead, they're thickened with carageenan and made to look milky white by the addition of an inorganic mineral compound called calcium carbonate - ground up rocks!
This calcium carbonate, when consumed in large quantities, can cause extreme bone pain, kidney calcification and may even contribute to the calcification of arteries. Yet it's added to a so-called "natural" health product that people are drinking in huge quantities while thinking they're being smart about their health. Truth be told, you'd be far better off drinking raw, unpasteurized cow's milk than commercial almond milk.
I've also seen so much pollution in "natural" products - including toxic heavy metals and alarming quantities of pesticides and herbicides in supposedly "clean" products - that I've reached the point where my own food manufacturing operation now rejects 80% of the raw material lots we test. (See my upcoming book Food Forensics for detailed ICP-MS analysis revealing the heavy metals concentrations in over 800 foods, supplements and spices.)
Similarly, I find myself rejecting 80% of the total B.S. science nonsense reported by the scientifically illiterate mainstream media... (and sometimes even the "science" media).
I've literally seen seemingly credible reports in the mainstream media that claim the most ludicrous science nonsense, including claims that cars can be "powered" by air and that cell phones can be "powered" by water. The air powered cars stories always neglect to mention that the air must be pressurized by some other energy source; usually coal-generated electricity that's used to power the compressors in the first place.
I've also seen the Associated Press falsely report that all mercury has been removed from all vaccines in America (blatantly false), and I've seen the obedient Monsanto-puppet media (i.e. Forbes.com, a propaganda rag steeped in utterly false journalism) report ridiculous claims such as asserting that glyphosate disintegrates quickly in the food supply.
In truth, this cancer-causing weed killer survives food processing and human digestion, showing up in both urine and breast milk, fully intact in its original molecular form.
So why is there no skepticism among "skeptics" about the food chain persistence of pesticides? The false diagnosis hoax of mammography? The lunatic quack medicine diagnosis of "psychiatric disorders" that are treated with mind-bending psychiatric drugs? Or even the scientifically proven fact that some children are seriously harmed by certain vaccines, most notably HPV vaccines?
As Horgan writes in Scientific American:
"The Science Delusion” is common among Capital-S Skeptics. You don’t apply your skepticism equally. You are extremely critical of belief in God, ghosts, heaven, ESP, astrology, homeopathy and Bigfoot. You also attack disbelief in global warming, vaccines and genetically modified food...
Meanwhile, you neglect what I call hard targets. These are dubious and even harmful claims promoted by major scientists and institutions. In the rest of this talk, I’ll give you examples of hard targets from physics, medicine and biology. I’ll wrap up with a rant about war, the hardest target of all."
What Horgan is doing is, dare we say, exercising REAL scientific skepticism. He's refusing to sign up for the "cult of scientism" that all the other closed-minded skeptics obediently follow as their dogmatic mental prison.
Horgan understands that legitimate science is a process, not a belief system. "Science" isn't belief in vaccines, GMOs, chemotherapy and global warming. Those are conclusions, not processes.
Real science is a process of discovery; and that process must be subjected to questioning and criticism, or it isn't science at all.
Let me repeat that for emphasis: Real science is a PROCESS, not a set of conclusions. Any "scientific" belief system which rejects critical questioning isn't based in real science at all. It's just dogma.
This explains why the entire vaccine industry - as it is fraudulently promoted today - isn't scientific at all.
Vaccine propaganda is founded in a dogmatic belief system that demands absolute obedience to political vaccine narratives while rejecting even the slightest questions or criticisms about vaccine ingredients, vaccine safety, vaccine adverse events or vaccine efficacy.
For example, merely asking the question of why flu shots still contain over 50,000 ppb mercury -- that's over 25,000 times the EPA limit of mercury in drinking water -- earns you widespread ridicule and condemnation. And yet the mercury is still being injected into children. Yet the entire vaccine propaganda establishment rejects even the hint of discussion of mercury in vaccines, pretending it doesn't exist.
The vaccine establishment, as Natural News readers well know, is practicing delusional thinking masquerading as science. It's just as delusional as so-called "psychic surgeons" who claim to pull diseased liver parts out of a patient's body (which later turn out to be chicken livers, go figure...).
Any real skeptic, upon observing the quackery, propaganda and blatant deception of the vaccine industry, would have to conclude that the way vaccines are formulated, approved and promoted today makes a mockery of science.
More "Science" B.S. is Readily Found in the Fields of Physics and Medicine, Too
Speaking on the subject of computing and AI systems, Horgan explains;
"The Singularity is an apocalyptic cult, with science substituted for God. When high-status scientists promote flaky ideas like the Singularity and multiverse, they hurt science. They undermine its credibility on issues like global warming."
Of course, Horgan may not yet understand that belief in man-made global warming as the primary cause for rising CO2 levels is also based on a politicized science cult. But that's not even the point. I don't expect other scientists to arrive at the same conclusions I've reached.
What I do expect, however, is that scientists should honor the process of critical scientific thinking. If they honor the process, they will eventually reach the correct conclusions on subjects such as man-made global warming, vaccine safety problems, the total con job of statin drugs and so on.
On medicine, Horgan nails it. He gets the fact that today's medical screening system is largely a fraud:
"Over the past half-century, physicians and hospitals have introduced increasingly sophisticated, expensive tests. They assure us that early detection of disease will lead to better health.
But tests often do more harm than good. For every woman whose life is extended because a mammogram detected a tumor, up to 33 receive unnecessary treatment, including biopsies, surgery, radiation and chemotherapy. For men diagnosed with prostate cancer after a PSA test, the ratio is 47 to one. Similar data are emerging on colonoscopies and other tests."
He's also right on the mark when it comes to psychiatric drugs and their fraudulent marketing:
"Over the last few decades, American psychiatry has morphed into a marketing branch of Big Pharma. I started critiquing medications for mental illness more than 20 years ago, pointing out that antidepressants like Prozac are scarcely more effective than placebos.
In retrospect, my criticism was too mild. Psychiatric drugs help some people in the short term, but over time, in the aggregate, they make people sicker.
He also exposes the total fraud of so-called "gene discoveries" that ridiculously claim genes have been discovered for things like gay-ness or intelligence:
Another hard target that needs your attention is behavioral genetics, which seeks the genes that make us tick. I call it gene-whiz science, because the media and the public love it.
Over the past several decades, geneticists have announced the discovery of "genes for" virtually every trait or disorder. We’ve had the God gene, gay gene, alcoholism gene, warrior gene, liberal gene, intelligence gene, schizophrenia gene, and on and on.
None of these linkages of single genes to complex traits or disorders has been confirmed. None!"
Much of What You'reTold Today Under the Banner of "Science" is Complete Bullshit
Horgan has come to the same conclusion that I've reached through a different path: Much of what we are taught today under the banner of "science" is complete bunk. Some of it is sheer hucksterism, and a lot of it qualifies as criminal fraud.
Check out my recent video compilation:
The 12 Biggest SCIENCE LIES You've Been Told by Corporations, Government and the Corrupt Media
At the top of that list of science frauds is, of course, vaccines. As I've exhaustively documented here on Natural News, many popular vaccines (flu shots, measles, mumps) simply don't work at all. Shockingly, outright admissions of a complete lack of scientific testing of the efficacy of such vaccines is admitted on their insert sheets.
Yet despite these extraordinary admissions of lack of efficacy, vaccine research fraud and the known toxicity of vaccine ingredients (which still include formaldehyde, mercury, aluminum and MSG), the systematic rejection of such evidence by vaccine promoting "science skeptics" borders on the fringe of mental illness.
As a real scientist, I've dared to ask 21 questions we're never allowed to ask about vaccines. Such questions are based on reason and rationality. They include commonsense questions such as, "If measles vaccines confer measles immunity, then why do already-vaccinated children have anything to fear from a measles outbreak?"
The government tells us that lead in water is bad, but mercury in vaccines is good...
It is notable that the entire vaccine establishment not only refuses to answer such questions; they consider the mere act of questioning vaccine dogma to be blasphemy. The demand for absolute obedience to the false narratives surrounding vaccines has reached such a fever pitch that anyone can now see it's no longer based in science at all.
It is a kind of religious fervor put on by deranged zealots who claim an intellectual monopoly over all things related to vaccines. This phenomenon is, in a very real way, a "scientific dictatorship" - an apt oxymoron to describe today's juxtaposition of conformist demands and so-called "scientific evidence."
Hint: If you aren't allowed to ask questions about the evidence, it isn't evidence at all. It's dogma, plain and simple. Vaccine proponents, as they operate today, are faith-based dogmatists who don't need any legitimate evidence because they BELIEVE in vaccines. Their belief is so strong that it outweighs all evidence contrary to their current beliefs. And in case you didn't notice, what I've just described here is a cult, not a science.
Vaccine "Science" is a Massive Con Job
The other huge con job found in vaccines is described thusly: Vaccines only "work" on those who don't need them. In other words, when vaccines do work, they do so by initiating an immune response to a weakened virus that's introduced into the body.
This response requires an active and complex immune system that's functioning well... the same kind of immune system, in other words, that could ward off an infection of a live virus encountered in the wild.
Meanwhile, people who have suppressed immune systems and are therefore extremely vulnerable to infections in the wild also happen to have extremely poor (and sometimes completely nullified) responses to vaccines. They don't build antibodies, in other words, so the vaccines don't work for them (they are non-efficacious).
In order to make vaccines "work" better on those with weakened immune systems, vaccine manufacturers add adjuvant chemicals that are irritants which cause excessive inflammation in the hope of eliciting a stronger immune response. While this may help some people, it also carries a very real risk of causing inflammatory damage to the neurology of some children who receive these vaccines.
The results, as borne out by the vaccine adverse events databases and Vaccine Injury Compensation Program, is a growing number of children who are maimed, neurological damaged, put into comas or even killed by vaccines.
The entire "skeptics" cult of modern medicine denies any of this is happening, and that's one reason why the skeptics are increasingly seen as high-functioning idiots who are possibly vaccine damaged themselves.
Zealotous hate-bloggers like Doctor David Gorski - a psychopathic, mentally ill vaccine promoter who also carries out cancer surgery on African-American victims in Detroit - now characterize the skeptics cult, a cabal of mentally deranged lunatics and gay sex fetish seekers like James Randi who was caught on tape soliciting sex from a young man.
Richard Dawkins, for his part, is also an anti-consciousness cultist who believes in the irrational dualism that no other humans on this planet are conscious beings other than himself. Everybody else, he claims, is an unconscious biological robot suffering under the illusion of self awareness.
Meet Three Real Scientists We Need to Empower to Ask More Questions of the Scientific Establishment
What kind of people do we really need to see more of in the realm of scientific skepticism? People like Rupert Sheldrake, author of Science Set Free. Sheldrake's work is transformative, as it challenges the underlying non-scientific assumptions of modern science.
We also need more people like Gilbert Welch, author of Less Medicine, More Health. This book challenges the seven false assumptions of modern medicine.
Dr. Lewis was maliciously attacked, discredited and ultimately thrown out of the government-funded scientific establishment for the simple reason that he questioned the safety of toxic biosludge -- recycled human and industrial waste that's sold as "organic fertilizer" to be spread on home gardens, childrens' playgrounds and city parks.
(I am currently investigating biosludge in my laboratory and will have some truly shocking, mind-blowing results to share with everyone this summer... you won't believe what's in this crap...) Check out Dr. Lewis's recent post entitled Inspector General dismantled scientific integrity at EPA.
The other thing we need, quite frankly, is independent scientists like myself who are conducting cutting edge, truly independent science, without any financial ties to governments, corporations or academia.
My science lab, which has now passed our ISO 17025 accreditation audit, is free to pursue precisely the kind of scientific analysis of food and medicine that is blackballed or censored in the government-funded scientific community.
Other scientists would lose their jobs if they pursued the kind of science I'm pursuing on a daily basis with absolute freedom.
Notably, this makes me a rare practitioner of real, independent science and a protector of the very kind of independent skepticism and scientific analysis that should be embraced by any system of knowledge that's based on legitimate science.
Yet the science I'm conducting is widely considered a threat to the scientific establishment, precisely because I'm willing to analyze vaccines for heavy metals and organic chemicals, for example.
Such research is simply not allowed by the cult of scientism (the vaccine zealots) because they depend on widespread ignorance of vaccine composition to continue parlaying their fraudulent lies about vaccine safety.
I Honor Scientists Who Pursue a Rigorous Process of Critical Thinking... and I Despise Obedient Status Quo Cultists
John Horgan might not yet be aware of the full story on vaccines, so he might disagree with me on such conclusions. But that's not the point. I honor Horgan's commitment to asking big questions. In fact, I honor those who vehemently disagree with me as long as they are following a process of authentic inquiry and open-minded skepticism.
What I despise is science cultists, dogmatic science propagandists and the worship of the "high priests" of science such as Neil DeGrasse Tyson, who can only be described as a "sciency" sleight-of-mind huckster who has more in common with stage illusionist David Copperfield than, say, Richard Feynman.
Tyson, like Dawkins, is a cultist. He has zero intellectual integrity and has sold out to the tribal dogmatists who spin tall tales of irrational mysticism that currently pass for "accepted science."
For my part, I don't claim to have all the answers - no human mind can possibly dare to claim a full understanding of the mysteries of nature (or the mind of God, for that matter). But as a real scientist, I'm willing to skeptically explore the evidence on just about anything.
I don't reject entire fields of scientific inquiry merely because they are taboo. It doesn't mean I'm a sucker for silly claims, just that I'm intelligent and humble enough to realize that nature is far more mysterious than any human mind can possibly grasp. And we have much more to learn... many more scientific discoveries to make in the years ahead.
For example, psychic phenomena are often called "paranormal." But what if they are so commonplace that they're actually normal? Why can't we study things like pets somehow anticipating the random arrivals of their owners many minutes in advance? Or mothers having a seemingly intuitive emotional connection to their children even when separated by distance? Why can't we study dream premonition?
Consciousness after biological death? Or even the possibility that the brain is a "quantum antenna" that can receive information transmitted from other conscious sources, transmitted by a quantum entanglement mechanism that Einstein described as "spooky action at a distance?"
If we are true scientists, we must at least BE CURIOUS about the nature of the universe and the apparent consciousness we seem to experience inside that universe. The minute we lose curiosity and decide we have all the answers, we cease being scientists at all.
At that point, we just become mentally incapacitated dogmatic fools... like Dawkins and Randi, two people whom history will judge as being not just unwise hucksters, but even for slowing the progress of human knowledge into realms of understanding that are viciously attacked by "skeptics" today.
I often wonder just how many people have died needlessly due to the malicious "skepticism" of info-terrorist David Gorski or the Quackwatch propagandist Stephen Barrett.
How many cases of cancer could have been prevented or reversed by natural and complementary medicine? How many studies might have been conducted in the pursuit of natural cures if not for the vicious, aggressive assaults on scientific curiosity being waged by "cult of scientism" intellectual bigots?
We'll never know the answer to that question, but at least a few people like John Horgan are willing to start asking some legitimate questions about the false assumptions of "skeptics." Have no doubt that Horgan himself will be maliciously slandered, attacked, defamed, censored and lied about for daring to ask such questions.
The one thing today's bullshit scientific establishment cannot tolerate is actual skepticism. It threatens the cultist beliefs of the faithful "scientism" worshippers, you see...
UK Trains Or Arms Half The Countries On Its List Of Human Rights Abusers May 29 2016 | From: Anitmedia
New research has shown the U.K. is providing military training and support to over half the countries named on its own watchlist of human rights abusers. An investigation by Campaign Against Arms Trade (CAAT) and The Independent has revealed U.K. armed forces have trained security and armed forces personnel from 16 of 30 regimes who are on a Foreign Office (FCO) watch list for use of torture and violence.
The FCO publishes an annual report on Human Rights and Democracy that lists countries of “wide-ranging concern.” While it is no secret the interests of the military-industrial complex come before human rights, information obtained from the Ministry of Defence could arguably be satire if it weren’t so appalling.
The discovery that British soldiers have trained armed forces in over half the countries on its own human rights watchlist warrants an even slower hand clap than Tony Blair’s admission, weeks ahead of the Chilcot Inquiry, that his understanding of the Middle East “is a lot deeper today” than when he was Prime Minister.
Despite horrific human rights records, the “countries of concern” benefiting from support from the British war machine are listed as Afghanistan, Bahrain, Bangladesh, Burma, Burundi, China, Colombia, Egypt, Iraq, Libya, Pakistan, Saudi Arabia, Somalia, Sudan, Yemen, and Zimbabwe. Andrew Smith from CAAT said Britain should not be colluding with countries it knows are led by authoritarian regimes, adding that the U.K. army has provided training to some of the most authoritarian states in the world.
Further, evidence of the U.K government’s support for violations of international humanitarian law by Saudi forces in Yemen came to light through a British-made cluster bomb found in a Yemeni village. Despite the use of cluster bombs being banned under the Convention on Cluster Munitions (to which the U.K. is a State Party) the unexploded munition was discovered by Amnesty International during the inspection of a village in northern Yemen.
Originally manufactured in the 1970s, the weapon contains 147 “bomblets” that scatter across a wide area and often do not detonate until disturbed at a later date.
The U.K. is thought to have sold large numbers of cluster munitions to Saudi Arabia and the United Arab Emirates (UAE) since the 1980s. Even if the weapons were sold before Britain became a signatory to the Convention, Britain should take responsibility for weapons previously supplied. Better still, the country should honour its claim to have one of the most robust arms export controls in the world - and at least attempt to rein in the industry profiting from death and destruction all over the world.
Low-Carbohydrate, High Fat Diet Advice Questioned May 28 2016 | From: Scoop
Experts are questioning the findings of a new report from UK health charities that has called for an overhaul of dietary guidelines.
The report, titled Eat Fat, Cut The Carbs and Avoid Snacking To Reverse Obesity and Type 2 Diabetes, was published by the Public Health Collaboration and the National Obesity Foundation, two UK-based charities.
Citing a number of studies, the authors conclude that a low-carbohydrate, high-fat diet of real foods is an "acceptable, effective and safe approach" to weight loss and health.
The Science Media Centre gathered the following expert commentary on the report.
Prof Jim Mann, Professor of Nutrition, University of Otago, comments:
"Eat fat and cut the carbs to reverse obesity and type 2 diabetes' - Such a statement which questions conventional wisdom and relates to a critically important health issue is bound to attract attention. This is the title on a Report which comes up with 10 key points, the first two being particularly controversial:
Eating fat doesn’t make you fat
Saturated fat doesn’t cause heart disease
These suggestions are not new. Does this report, which comes from a group called The National Obesity Forum, provide confirmation? One should always be open to new information but I would suggest that this report contributes little.
The Forum comprises a group of self-selected individuals most of whom have repeatedly expressed similar views in the lay and health-related media for many years. They do not represent any recognized professional group and most have not themselves undertaken relevant research. The report itself is not peer reviewed.
The report is largely based on selective quotations from the relevant literature. There are many mistakes but the reference (or failure to refer) to the relevant papers commissioned by the Nutrition Guidance Advisory Group of the WHO serves as a good example.
The report quotes one of the papers by De Souza et al ‘saturated fat intake was not associated with all-cause mortality, CVD mortality, total CHD, ischaemic stroke, or type 2 diabetes’.
However it does not mention the limitations which the authors discuss, nor does it quote the two other studies which may help to inform WHO opinion and which demonstrated:
(a) that those who choose to restrict their total fat intake tend to have a lower body weight and;
(b) that replacement of saturated fat with unsaturated fat in randomised controlled clinical trials is associated with a reduced risk of coronary heart disease events.
All these studies were based on meta-analyses which aggregate the results of all available appropriate studies and were published in world leading peer reviewed journals. The report also does not discuss the limitations of the studies used to support the arguments.
Also missing is a full consideration of the long term trials comparing different nutritional approaches to weight loss. These clearly show that although high fat diets may produce a greater weight loss in the short term, in the longer term the extent of weight loss is dependent on the degree of compliance with the dietary advice regardless of the diet composition, i.e. there is nothing special about high fat diets.
People lose weight if they reduce their calorie intake assuming their energy expenditure remains unchanged.
There are some points in the report which are perfectly reasonable e.g. ‘you can’t outrun a bad diet’ and ‘ industrial vegetable oils should be avoided’ and some which are rather more complex than the Report suggests:
For example, it is absolutely true that people at risk of type 2 diabetes need to limit starchy and refined carbohydrates but this may not apply across the board and needs further explanation, e.g. in China people are consuming less of their traditional food, i.e. rice and more fat AND they are getting fatter and diabetes rates are increasing dramatically.
If only life was as simple as the self-styled experts suggest!"
Our colleagues at the UK SMC collected the following commentary:
Dr Gunter Kuhnle, nutritional scientist at the University of Reading, comments:
"As with any public health measure, it is important that any recommendations are based on solid evidence, and take the wider implications of implementation into account. That doesn’t seem to be the case in this instance.
There is only very limited evidence on the long-term impact of using dietary fat as the main source of calories. There are only very few long-term studies, and they do not suggest that cutting back on carbohydrate is as beneficial to health as it is claimed.
Virtually no research has been carried out to show the impact of recommending a very low carbohydrate diet to the general public. It could even be very damaging to public health.
The document presents as fact what has not even achieved consensus in the scientific community, such as the role of fat and carbohydrates, and for which there is only very little evidence.
By doing so, it could confuse consumers, and also make discussions within the scientific community and the general public more difficult. In the long term, this is likely to have an adverse effect on public health, as it leads to ‘advice fatigue’.
Obesity and type 2 diabetes are among the most important health challenges we face. Both conditions put a huge burden on society and the NHS and result in a lot of personal hardship. It is therefore vital that we find ways to prevent and treat these conditions. The call for more evidence-based nutritional advice is very welcome.”
Prof Susan Jebb, Professor of Diet and Population Health at the University of Oxford, comments:
"As the importance of diet as a contributor to ill-health is increasingly recognised, so the evidence has come under greater scrutiny.
Nutrition is a complex science, and it’s hard to do classic randomised controlled trials over long enough periods to observe the effects on heart disease or cancer so we need to combine these studies with observational analyses, using new statistical techniques such as Mendelian randomisation to help understand if the associations observed are causal.
Given this diverse evidence base, dietary guidelines need to be based on comprehensive reviews of the totality of the evidence, assembled and reviewed according to agreed protocols to reduce the chances they may be affected by personal opinion or other biases.
The new report from the National Obesity Forum fails this standard. It is not a systematic review of all the relevant evidence, and it does not include any assessment of the methodological quality of the studies. The authors are not named and it does not seem to have been peer-reviewed.
It should not be confused with other comprehensive reviews of the evidence produced with clear and transparent processes by organisations such as the World Health Organisation or national bodies such as the Scientific Advisory Committee on Nutrition or NICE.
Instead it ‘cherry-picks’ studies, for example, highlighting one trial suggesting high dairy intake reduced the risk of obesity, while ignoring a systematic review and meta-analysis of 29 trials which concluded that increasing dairy did not reduce the risk of weight gain.”
Prof Tom Sanders, Emeritus Professor of Nutrition and Dietetics at King’s College London,comments:
"This report confuses dietary guidelines for the population with the clinical management of obesity and type 2 diabetes. There is certainly much room for improvement in the clinical management of obesity in the NHS and there clearly is a need for a debate on how best to manage the diet of patients with type 2 diabetes.
The medical professional certainly needs to get its act together but it is not helpful to slag off the sensible dietary advice given by Public Health England and the US Dietary Guidelines for Americans.
Dietary guidelines are designed to ensure an adequate intake of nutrients as well as to prevent dietary related disease. The report wrongly attributes the current obesity/diabetes epidemic to current dietary guidelines. The report fails to recognize that the main driver is our obesogenic environment and insinuates a sinister plot involving collusion between government and the food industry.
The truth is, most people now live in metropolitan areas, spend much time travelling to and from work and eat much more food outside the home. Food is also more widely available, 24 hours a day, portions sizes are bigger and people are less active because of sedentary occupations (especially sitting in front of a computer) and the increased use of the car.
The harsh criticism of current dietary guidelines meted out in this report is not justified as few people (~5%) adhere to these guidelines anyway. There is also good evidence that those that do follow the guidelines have less weight gain and better health outcomes."
Dr Mike Knapton, Associate Medical Director at the BHF, comments:
"This report is full of ideas and opinion, however it does not offer the robust and comprehensive review of evidence that would be required for the BHF, as the UK’s largest heart research charity, to take it seriously.
This country’s obesity epidemic is not caused by poor dietary guidelines; it is that we are not meeting them. Diets that are high in saturated fat have been shown to increase cholesterol. High cholesterol is linked to an increased risk of cardiovascular disease hence why current recommendations emphasise the importance of reducing this.
Heart disease is a multifactorial condition with a range of risk factors and any dietary and lifestyle advice worth noting should consider the overall impact that our diet and lifestyle has on our health. Focusing on single foods, nutrients or risk factors is short sighted and will perpetuate confusion and fear amongst the public about what they should and shouldn’t eat to protect their heart health."
Prof Iain Broom, Director of the Centre for Obesity Research and Epidemiology at Robert Gordon University, comments:
"At long last there is some sense coming into dietary advice that may eventually lead to improved health, in particular tacking the double whammy of obesity and Type 2 Diabetes Mellitus.
I totally agree with the document produced jointly by the NOF and the Public Health Collaboration, except for the statement re “zero sugar” as all fruits and berries contain sugar – “no added sugar” would be more appropriate.
At the time of the change in food policy in the USA in the late seventies and in the UK in 1983, there was no evidence to back a reduction in saturated fat in the fight against coronary heart disease, but there was evidence to link CHD to sugar intake.
A British nutritionist, John Yudkin, at the time tried to prevent such a policy and to shift the blame to sugar and refined carbohydrate, but was pilloried by Ancel Keyes and the establishment. Decades of nutrition students have had to undergo training where this unsubstantiated, and now proven false, link between fat intake and CHD, obesity and diabetes is hammered home.
"We will thus have to undo all of this in the future and to reintroduce the notion that fat in the diet causes neither obesity, T2DM nor CHD."
Prof Naveed Sattar, Professor of Metabolic Medicine at the University of Glasgow, comments:
"The report has good, bad and ugly elements in it. Yes, it’s clear that snacking is generally to be avoided; few would argue against this. It’s also clear that some sources of fat will be better than other sources. But to make the headline message that we should all eat more fat as the cure to reverse obesity trends and thus type 2 diabetes is NOT warranted based on the totality of evidence.
In dietary areas, we have few large scale long term trials and so rely a lot on observational data, the results of which can be interpreted or extrapolated in different ways. Even when we have trials, they are often short term on weight loss alone or some risk factors and cannot give the longer term reality on long term risks or sustainability of diets.
The authors of this report have been selective in their choice of evidence to support their arguments and there is an abundant literature which goes against their conclusions. Indeed, plentiful evidence supports excessive calories from a variety of sources leading to a rise in obesity with excess fatty foods being a major component of in many individuals.
Hence, whilst it is good to debate, the report’s main headline – simply to eat more fat - is highly contentious and could have adverse public health consequences.”
Prof Suzanne Dickson, Professor of Neuroendocrinology at the University of Gothenburg in Sweden, comments:
"There are a lot of misleading messages in these guidelines which ultimately do not promote health.
While it may be good to reduce intake of carbohydrates and sugars, there remains a great body of evidence that it is equally important to limit intake of fats. These guidelines make no suggestion on what the upper limit of fat intake should be and without this effectively promote their over-consumption.
I am not aware of any evidence that common obesity is due to under- or over-production of any hormone.
I am not aware of any hard evidence that snacking causes obesity. There does exist evidence that snacking causes a compensatory adjustment in caloric intake during the rest of the day. This is not very surprising because energy balance is under tight physiological control.
It is misleading to suggest that the amount of calories on a plate is ‘irrelevant’.
“Diets fail because food restriction of any kind leads to reduced metabolism coupled with food cravings that eventually overpower restraint.”
Comment: Clearly the medical establishment are not happy to be challenged. Bearing in mind that for the most part they would not know which way is up, and that they have all been indoctinated into fallacies since medical school to prescribe pharmaceuticals and push allopathic medicine which is nothing but profit-driven.
For a segment of society who believe they are so smart they sure do a good job of makling themselves look stupid.
A personal visit to the home of this man in Samoa revealed some interesting details, some of which I have been able to research into further, and others not so much. It is clear, however, that there is more going on with RLS than meets the eye at first glance.
I have been waiting more than two years to round this piece out into an article that could answer more questions that it had generated.
I have to conceed that at this point it seems we have all that we are going to be able to gain in terms of further insight on this matter. Perhaps submitting this information to a wider audience will in some way assist in flushing out further information that will help to complete the fascinating story or Robert Louis Stevenson; his charachter, his inspirations and his insights.
There is much to be read about Robert Louis Stevenson and there is a very good website that is dedicated to that very purpose. Inspired by some very interesting details noted on a visit to the home and last resting place of the man, I felt compelled to put this piece together.
There is something to be said for spending time in the home of a person of historical note, observing their possessions, examples of their work and indeed in this case, standing in the very spot from where they transitioned from this world to the next.
To be clear, this article is in no way intended to be a sleight on the man. There are some very interesting details regarding Robert Louios Stevenson, both known and occult (secretive). All this piece intends to do is share some insights from a personal visit and perspective.
"Brother Robert Louis Stevenson in his novel “Doctor Jekyll and Mr. Hyde” portrays the paradoxical nature of humankind through his main character, who manifests both good and evil personalities.
Indeed the existence of good and evil in the world is the one of the most common themes in literature and art in general. In the Masonic Opera “The Magic Flute”, Papageno, accompanies Tamino into the chamber of reflection and is there put to test. Papageno fails these tests miserably, but surprisingly is rewarded nonetheless [xii], an obvious paradox."
Western Samoa is a beautiful tropical sovereign nation in the Northern Pacific Ocean, in the vicinity of the New Zealand dependency / protectorate states; the Cook Islands, Niue, Tokelau and Nauru.
The Robert Louis Stevenson Museum, as it is now known is actually the estate of RLS, located effectively at number 1, Robert Louis Stevenson Road, Apia, Samoa.
On January 10 1890 RLS, signed the deed of purchase for the Vailima estate. The formal driveway and exotic tropical gardens of the estate are both beautiful and timeless.
Although the driveway would have probably been gravel back in the day, today it is immaculately kept and presented with respect and pride. Surely it appears today much as it would have in the early 1900's.
Overview of RLS, Samoa and Vailima
His observations on the culture and on his experiences on his South Seas travels are to be found in the South Sea letters, published in Magazines in 1891 (and then in book form as In the South Seas in 1896). A historical account of colonial interference and conflict in Samoa was published as A Footnote to History (1892).
He also returns to Scottish history and settings with Catriona (or David Balfour) (1893) and the unfinished Weir of Hermiston (1896). Another unfinished work on which he expended much effort was St Ives (1897), a picaresque adventure with many Scottish scenes.
RLS chose Samoa because he liked the people, it was not too “civilized” and had a regular mail service (essential for his connections with agents, editors and publishers). Because of the great cost of the Vailima house and the extended family that lived there, RLS often felt under pressure to keep writing.
Despite this, his work of the 1890s continued to be of great interest and variety. “The Beach of Falesá” (1892) and The Ebb-Tide (1894) confront the results of colonisation and mark a new Realistic turn in his writing. The same setting and approach can also be seen in the form of the adventure novel, The Wrecker (1892). “The Bottle Imp” (1891) presents a Pacific-wide community as the setting for a fascinating moral fable.
While visiting the estate a number of esoteric symbols were noticeable in photographs, artwork, furniture and indeed at the burial site itself. In an attempt to decipher some of the more obscure references I contacted Jordan Maxwell and James Robert Wright, who are both well versed in Freemasonic symbolism.
James Robert Wright relayed to me that while there is definitely some esoteric symbology in play, especially on the 'circle hand painting', that he was unable to discern exactly what that particular symbology means.
Part of the reason for the delay in the publising this article is that I had been attempting to make contact with people who could identify the symbology that appears in the images I captured. I have managed to make some inroads in this regard but if any readers are able to offer further insights then that would be welcomed.
Some people have made references to potential links between RLS and the Order of the Golden Dawn but these seem difficult to verify. It is however possible that some of the very clear esoteric symbology present may be indeed related to such secret orders as Aleister Crowley's Golden Dawn and or other such secretive orders.
An early edition copy of Dr. Jekyll and Mr. Hyde
Life and Publications Summary
Robert Lewis (later: “Louis”) Balfour Stevenson was born in Edinburgh , Scotlandon 13 November 1850. His father Thomas belonged to a family of engineers who had built many of the deep-sea lighthouses around the rocky coast of Scotland. His mother, Margaret Isabella Balfour, came from a family of lawyers and church ministers. In 1857 the family moved to 17 Heriot Row, a solid, respectable house in Edinburgh’s New Town.
At the age of seventeen he enrolled at Edinburgh University to study engineering, with the aim – his father hoped – of following him in the family firm. However, he abandoned this course of studies and made the compromise of studying law.
He “passed advocate” in 1875 but did not practice since by now he knew he wanted to be a writer. In the university’s summer vacations he went to France to be in the company of other young artists, both writers and painters. His first published work was an essay called "Roads' and his first published volumes were works of travel writing.
Early Published Works
His first published volume, An Inland Voyage (1878), is an account of the journey he made by canoe from Antwerp to northern France, in which prominence is given to the author and his thoughts. A companion work, Travels with a Donkey in the Cevennes(1879), gives us more of his thoughts on life and human society and continues in consolidating the image of the debonair narrator that we also find in his essays and letters (which can be classed among his best works).
An early edition copy of Jane Austen's Pride and Prejudice
An early edition copy of Kidnapped
Meeting with Fanny, Journey to California, Marriage
The meeting with his future wife, Fanny, was to change the rest of his life. They met immediately after his “inland voyage”, in September 1876 at Grez, a riverside village south-east of Paris; he was twenty-five, and she was thirty-six, an independent American “New Woman”, separated from her husband and with two children. Two years later she returned to California and a year after that, in August 1879, RLS set out on the long journey to join her.
This experience was to be the subject of his next large-scale work The Amateur Emigrant (written 1879-80, published in part in 1892 and in full in 1895), an account of this journey to California, which Noble (1985: 14) considers his finest work.
In this work of perceptive reportage and open-minded and humane observation the voice is less buoyant and does not avoid observation of hardship and suffering. (The light-hearted paradoxes and confidential address to the reader of the essays written a few years before (1876-77) and then published as Virginibus Puerisque (1881) continue in the creation of that original debonair authorial persona.)
Robert Louis Stevenson and his wife: “Dam queer as a whole”. ‘Robert Louis Stevenson and His Wife’ by John Singer Sargent, 1885. John Singer Sargent painted Robert Louis Stevenson three times, but never so oddly as he did in this picture that also (half) includes Stevenson’s wife, Fanny Van de Grift Osbourne, while decisively excluding and marginalising her. Read more here
After Fanny obtained a divorce, she and RLS were married in San Francisco in May 1880. Concluding this first period of writing based closely on his own direct experiences is The Silverado Squatters (1883), an account of their three week honeymoon at an abandoned silver mine in California.
Stevenson has an important place in the history of the short story in the British Isles: the form had been elaborated and developed in America, France and Russia from the mid-19th century, but it was Stevenson who initiated the British tradition.
His first published fictional narrative was “A Lodging for the Night” (1877), a short story originally published in a magazine, like other early narrative works, such as “The Sire De Malétroit’s Door” (1877), “Providence and the Guitar” (1878), and “The Pavilion on the Links” (1880, considered by Conan Doyle in 1890 as “the high-water mark of [Stevenson’s] genius” and “the first short story in the world” (Menikoff 1990, p. 342).
These four tales were collected in a volume entitled New Arabian Nights in 1882, preceded by the seven linked stories originally called “Latter-Day Arabian Nights” when published in a magazine in 1878. This collection is seen as the starting point for the history of the English short story by Barry Menikoff (1987, p. 126).
The Arabian stories were described by critics of the time as “fantastic stories of adventure”, “grotesque romances” “in which the analytic mind loses itself” (Maixner, pp. 117, 120), and are seen by Chesterton as “unequalled” and “the most unique of his works”(p. 169). They have an affinity with the Strange Case of Dr Jekyll and Mr Hyde in their setting in the labyrinthine modern city, and the subject matter of crimes and guilty secrets involving respectable members of society.
Stevenson continued to write short stories all his life, and notable titles include: “Thrawn Janet” (1881), “The Merry Men” (1882), “The Treasure of Franchard” (1883), “Markheim” (1885), which, being a narrative of the Double, has certain affinities with Dr Jekyll and Mr Hyde. “Olalla” (1885), which like Dr Jekyll and Mr Hyde originated in a dream also deals with the possibility of degeneration. The above short narratives were all collected in The Merry Men and Other Tales and Fables in 1887.
“Olalla” was written in the period of just over two years (1885-87) when Stevenson and Fanny were living in Bournemouth. Despite problems of health and finances, this was a period of meetings with Henry James, W.E. Henley and other literary figures, and when he wrote the long short-story (published as a single volume), his “breakthrough book” Strange Case of Dr Jekyll and Mr Hyde (1886).
Another collection Island Nights’ Entertainments, tales with a South Sea setting, was published in 1893, including “The Bottle Imp” (1891), “The Beach of Falesà” (1892, a long short story of the same length as Dr Jekyll and Mr Hyde), and “The Isle of Voices”(1893).
In this carved cabinet some people would see references to the Rosicrucians as they used the XX flower
Below is the most puzzling piece of RLS symbology of all, and it is quite blatant:
This photograph depicts by far and away the most intriguing point of interest. RLS is undoubtedly making an occult symbolic reference, and this is one that has, to date, been the most difficult to identify in terms of it's origin and meaning.
In the South Seas
Weir of Hermiston, Stevenson’s very Scottish romance, was written when Stevenson was far away on the other side of the world. His decision to sail around the Pacific in 1888, living on various islands for short periods, then setting off again (all the time collecting material for an anthropological and historical work on the South Seas which was never fully completed), was another turning point in his life.
Note the Triad sign formed by the left arm and body. Sign of the trident or weapon of satan. RLS passed on in a bed that was located in almost the same spot as this statue (see below) in December of 1894. It was a very strange sensation to actually stand in that place.
In 1889 he and his extended family arrived at the port of Apia in the Samoan islands and they decided to build a house and settle. This choice brought him health, distance from the distractions of literary circles, and went towards the creation of his mature literary persona: the traveller, the exile, very aware of the harsh sides of life but also celebrating the joy in his own skill as a weaver of words and teller of tales.
It also acted as a new stimulus to his imagination. He wrote about the Pacific islands in several of his later works: Island Nights’ Entertainments already referred to; In the South Seas (published 1896), essays that would have gone towards the large work on the area that he planned; and two other narratives with a South Sea setting: The Wrecker (1892), and The Ebb-Tide (1894).
The room ins the picture below is also on the ground floor, beautifully wallpapered with Tapas, in a unique decor mix that might be termed 'Colonial Samoan'
The former is a mystery adventure set in various places over the globe but centred in the South Seas (indeed at Midway Island, Latitude 0°) with some dark tones, especially in the fruitless search for treasure and the massacre of a ship’s crew (for quite understandable reasons!).
The Ebb-Tide (like “The Beach of Falesà”) gives a realistic picture of the degenerate European traders and riffraff who inhabited the ports of the Pacific islands. These South Sea narratives mark a definite move towards a more harsh and grim realism (Stevenson himself acknowledges affinities of The Ebb-Tide with the work of Zola (Maixner, p. 452)).
The authorial persona had changed from the debonair flâneur of the early works, but retained a joy in his craft and a consciousness in the shaping of his own life.
The Grave Site
RLS died in December 1894 and even shaped the manner of his burial: as he had wished, he was buried at the top of Mount Vaea above his home on Samoa.
Appropriately it was a part of his own short poem, “Requiem” (from an 1887 collection), that was written on his tomb: “Under the wide and starry sky, / Dig the grave and let me lie…";
Enlargements of the yet-to-be-identified mysterious symbolism featured are shown below in other photographs of the burial site below;
The view into the tropical reinforest from the grave site:
While we may never know the finer esotertic details of the mysterion Mr .Robert Louis Stevenson and his life, it is well worth taking the time to visit his home and final resting place.
The Rockefeller Foundations' 100 Resilient Cities Announces Hundredth Member, But 'Work Is Only Just Beginning' May 27 2016 | From: TheGuardian
Washington and Seattle, Nairobi and Lagos, Manchester and Belfast are all included in the final list of member cities as 100RC programme reveals it has had more than 1,000 applications since 2013
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Less than three years after its launch, the Rockefeller Foundation’s 100 Resilient Cities programme has reached a notable landmark, with the announcement of its third and final tranche of members – taking this global initiative up to its full quota of 100 cities.
With fast-growing megacities such as Lagos, Jakarta, Seoul and Nairobi among the 37 revealed today in a joint launch in the Kenyan capital and Washington DC, the multimillion dollar programme looks to be tackling the most ambitious and difficult aspects of “building resilience” (a phrase describing the process of discovering how multiple shocks and stresses are interlinked and related).
"Incorporating resilience planning and principles not only prepares cities for disasters and long-term threats,” says Judith Rodin, president of the Rockefeller Foundation, which also supports Guardian Cities. “It also improves everyday living standards for all members of an urban community.”
A further eight American cities have joined the list today, including Washington DC, Seattle, Atlanta and Honolulu, meaning that, in all, one quarter of the 100 Resilient Cities are from the US. Three more Canadian cities – Vancouver, Toronto and Calgary – join Montreal in what has been a deliberate attempt to create mutually beneficial “hubs of experience” in certain countries around the world.
Belfast, Northern Ireland
“In this third cohort, we largely went deeper in existing places rather than to new places,” explains Michael Berkowitz, the president of the 100RC programme. In the United Kingdom, we have Manchester and Belfast joining Glasgow, Bristol, London – now that’s a real cohort. And now we’re talking to the prime minister’s office about how we might use the momentum that’s created to spread the programme further [within the UK].
Similarly, two more cities in Mexico – Colima and Guadalajara (Metro) – take its total quota to four (after Mexico City and Juárez), while Africa now boasts 10 cities in all, with Addis Ababa, Cape Town, Luxor and Paynesville in Liberia also being named today.
Speaking at a launch event in Nairobi, Cyvette Gibson, the mayor of Paynesville, described his city’s “significant challenges”. “Like many cities in Liberia that experienced rapid urbanisation after the civil conflict in the country, we grapple with issues such as high unemployment and scarcity of opportunity,” he said. “We also struggle to provide key services such as healthcare and education. This partnership will help us build resiliency and learn from other cities in the network to offer better services to our people.”
A Different Way
What comes over strongly from talking to Berkowitz is just how seriously the process is taken on all sides. He describes what he calls “whites-of-the-eyes” meetings, when the 100RC team have one final, cards-on-the-table discussion with a city’s governor or mayor before the decision to include, or not, is made.
"The moment just before cities are selected is probably the time you have most attention from a governor or mayor,” Berkowitz says, “so using that moment to have a frank, honest discussion of what this process really entails is crucial. Being able to poke your finger in the chest of a mayor or chief executive and say, ‘You’re thinking about this in the wrong way, why not look at it a different way?’ has proved very useful …”
For every city that has made it on to the final list, many more have been rejected during the assessment process. Since 2013, 100RC says it has received more than 1,000 applications to join the network, including 325 during this third round of appraisals.
Panama city, Panama
For those cities now on board, the first key target is to identify and appoint a “chief resilience officer” (CRO) from within the city, whose salary will typically then be funded by the programme for two years. Thus far, more than 50 CROs have been appointed – but what’s their role in a nutshell?
"Cities, particularly the larger megacities, spend their whole day fighting fire,” Berkowitz says. “The idea of the CRO is to be the one person or office who has the luxury to think a little bit more strategically. We see the CRO as an integrator, that’s their explicit role.”
The next step is to create a “resilience strategy”; a blueprint for how the city plans to move to a more integrated, coherent way of tackling both sudden shocks and long-term urban pressures. To date, a dozen of the first two tranches of member cities have published theirs, from New York and New Orleans to the small Danish port city of Vejle.
Cape Town, South Africa
"What the CRO and the resilience strategy both try to do is say: ‘Here’s the things that are priorities to us, and here’s how we can integrate this stuff,’” Berkowitz explains. “And in the process, we’re also seeing our CROs becoming magnets for other work that’s going on in their city.”
Berkowitz, who has previously worked in New York City’s Office of Emergency Management, is disarmingly realistic about what the 100RC programme has achieved to date, saying that today’s announcement “feels like the work is only just beginning”. (He’s certainly kept busy by it: after our meeting in London, he was straight off to Rotterdam for the launch of its resilience strategy, then on to Lagos, and then to Nairobi for one half of today’s launch.)
"The ultimate change we’re trying to see in cities – more cohesive communities, better infrastructure, more integrated planning, better mobility – these are things that happen over a generation, not just a couple of years.
So one of the questions we’re asking now is how do you keep partnering with cities over an entire generation? Not just to 2020 but 2030, because that’s when we’ll see the kinds of change we’re really looking for.”
But three years and countless airmiles on from 100RC’s inception, Berkowitz says he is more convinced than ever that the programme can have a profound effect on its own – and other – cities, over the longer term at least.
"This agenda is blowing up all the time. Cities are the most important thing of our generation – they’re both our biggest risk and our greatest hope for solving all the big challenges of the world: sectarian conflict, climate threats, migration, cyber-security and so on.
We are trying to ignite a revolution in the way cities view their risks and opportunities – but not only in the 100 member cities. By some accounts there are 10,000 cities in the world, and if cities are going to save the world, we can’t have 10,000 bespoke solutions. We’re using our 100 member cities as a first step – but ultimately we need to get all cities to understand that their differences are not that different. They need to come together.”
The theme of owning one’s power keeps coming up in healings, readings and conversations.
As a response to encouraging people to stand in their power, I am frequently met with unbridled fear.
Never have I had so many people in such crisis over the same issue. This is obviously a collective consciousness blockage which needs to be purged.
What is a Spiritual Leap of Faith?
Imagine that you are leisurely driving along the Road of Life, a meandering country lane. You are on your way to Enlightenment Town, a Shangri-La of spiritual awareness, Oneness and Divine Love. Accompanying you on this trip are some great friends. These angelic guides are lovingly assisting you all along your journey.
Suddenly, without warning, the road comes to an abrupt end. You stomp on the brake pedal with both feet, and your car skids to the very edge of the precipice. There, before you, lies nothing but open air… no road, no land, just sky and clouds. Gingerly you exit your vehicle and creep towards the edge of the cliff.
Your breath quickens as you peer ever-so carefully over the sheer cliff face. The land below is so far away that the trees look like matchsticks. Your gaze shifts upward and you squint hard trying to see what lies on the other side. Alas, it’s too far away.
But seriously don't jump off an actual cliff please. Not without a wingsuit
You turn to your friends and bemoan the fact that there’s no bridge. Your friends tell you that there is in fact a bridge there, but that you can’t see it. They explain that you must cross this chasm unaided, using faith as your only support. You can’t imagine anything more insane, and so you argue with them, but to no avail. They are adamant that you can do it.
Your friends’ lack of assistance, coupled with the daunting and seemingly impossible task ahead, causes you to react with fear, and that fear turns into anger. Instead of taking the leap of faith, you plunk yourself on the ground and cross your arms in defiance. You refuse to move forward without their help. You even consider turning back. You are at an impasse.
Owning Your Power
At some point in everyone’s spiritual reawakening process, you must make a leap of faith. This point in your journey back to Oneness almost always appears with little or no warning. Although unspeakably frightening, the leap is unavoidable and very necessary.
Not only is it mandatory, but it must also be achieved by you alone. No one can assist you, for to do so would defeat its purpose. It serves to help you own, and stand in, your spiritual power.
Ego is the Problem, Not Spirit
Your ego is scared and so it’s throwing up road blocks everywhere it can. It doesn’t want you to take that leap of faith. It’s telling you to go back where it’s ‘safe’. Since the ego is connected to your left brain, it uses your intellect to rationalize away the need for this leap.
Ego is very good at arguing its case, and it (temporarily) wins almost every argument with spirit. That’s because your soul doesn’t argue. It just states the truth quietly, and then stands in that truth. The ego clamors to be heard; the soul whispers. The ego is clever; the soul, authentic.
The Leap From the Head to the Heart
The chasm you must cross is the one from the brain to the heart. You must to leap from one side (earthly / ego / brain / male) to the other (spiritual / soul / heart / female). Once you fully cross into the heart, your ego will never have the same control over you. That fear you’re feeling is the stemming from the ego’s false belief in its impending demise. Ego believes it is fighting for its life.
What the ego doesn’t know is that the soul will lovingly incorporate the ego into your whole Being, and will nurture and protect you in a way that ego never could. In other words, this leap of faith will make your ego a very happy camper; that is, once you get across to the other side. So, you must make this crossing despite your ego’s protests.
Dealing with Ego’s Arguments
“I can’t do it.”
Actually, you can do it; otherwise, the challenge would not have appeared. Don’t believe your ego. It is making you feel powerless.
It wants someone to help you; yet, if your guides give in, they would only be compounding your feelings of powerlessness. The only cure is for you to take the leap of faith. It’s the only way to discover of what you are really capable.
“I’m not ready!”
This leap of faith opportunity would not have appeared unless you were ready. Your higher self and angelic guides do not make mistakes. You don’t have to believe or feel you’re ready in order to be ready. In fact, the majority of spiritual seekers do not feel ready when presented with their leap of faith challenge. Your human incarnation has never encountered anything like this before, so how could it feel ready? Thankfully, this has nothing to do with your mind/ego/human side. The leap is a spiritual feat.
“This is crazy! I’ll fail / get hurt.”
The leap may look impossible, but it’s actually designed to strengthen your spiritual confidence. Without this extreme challenge, would you ever be willing to fly solo?
Or, would you ever come to appreciate how incredibly gifted and intuitive you are? Most people feel “less than” until they are forced to discover of what they are truly capable.
“I don’t know what to do, or how to do it.”
If your spiritual guides have presented you with a leap of faith challenge, then that’s your assurance that you do know what to do; you just don’t know with your human brain. You need to tap into your intuition. Whether or not you feel intuitively capable, remember that your intuition is like a muscle. The more you use it, the better it gets. No one can work it out for you. That would be like taking you to a gym and demonstrating how to lift weights. Unless you’re doing the work, you’re not developing your intuitive muscle.
“I won’t do it, and you can’t make me!”
You’re right; you have free will. You are not required to do anything your spirit and angels suggest. But, if you are serious about owning your power, their guidance is golden. (Have they ever led you astray?) The next step is really up to you.
Spread Your Wings and Fly, Baby Bird!
Like mama and papa birds, your angels and soul are telling you it’s time to leave the nest. Their urging doesn’t mean they don’t love you anymore. Quite the contrary! They love you so much that they want you to know the exhilaration of flight.
The ego’s supreme belief in its inability to survive the leap of faith is the only thing standing in your way. If you could silence your ego long enough to enter your heart, then you could establish the connection with spirit that will empower you. Then you could sprout wings and fly cross the chasm. But if you continue to listen to ego and its fears, you will never know how amazing you are, or how high you could soar.
How to Shift From Ego / Mind to Heart / Soul
Your head is not your friend right now. The heart is the key. That’s your place of peace and fearlessness. In order to stay heart-centered, here are some suggestions:
Draw a labyrinth in the sand and then slowly walk it
Go earthing (walk barefoot in the dirt or on sand)
Breathe slowly, deeply and rhythmically
Spend time with people you love
Sit beneath, and/or hug, a tree
Practice Yoga, Tai Chi or Qigong
Paint, draw, write or compose
Swim in the ocean or a lake
Play with childlike abandon
Volunteer at a soup kitchen
Go on a spiritual retreat
Pet a dog, cat or horse
Hum or Sing
Hold a baby
Do whatever you can to still your mind. Once ego is silenced, it’s much easier to shift your awareness to your heart. From there you can enter the sacred space of your heart along with the tiny space. Within that space dwells your soul, your connection to All That Is. Every answer you could ever want is in your heart. Fly free, baby bird!
Star Of Hobbit Films Elijah Wood Says Hollywood Is Masking A Child Sex Epidemic May 26 2016 | From: DailyMail
Hollywood's Savile scandal: Elijah Wood says Tinseltown is masking a child sex epidemic in its 'seedy' underbelly full of predatory 'vipers'
Shocking allegations that top Hollywood figures have been protecting child abusers have circulated widely in recent years.Elijah Wood, 35, claims young actors are being abused in Hollywood and he compares it to the infamous Jimmy Savile scandal in Britain.
Several industry figures have been convicted following claims of sex abuse and former child actors - including The Goonies actor Corey Feldman, 44 - claimed he was 'surrounded' by molesters when he was a teenager.
Anne Henry, co-founder of Bizparentz - a group to help young actors - said that Tinseltown is currently sheltering around '100 active abusers'. Wood, who stars in his new film The Trust, sympathised with Savile's victims and said it much have been 'devastating'.
He told The Sunday Times that his mother had protected him from abuse when he first arrived in Hollywood aged eight. But he said:
"Ive been led down dark paths to realise that these things are probably still happening."
The actor, who played Frodo Baggins in Lord of the Rings, believes that other actors remain in danger. He added:
"If you're innocent, you have very little knowledge of the world and you want to succeed. People with parasitic interests will see you as their prey. What upsets me about these situations is that the victims can't speak as loudly as the people in power."
Henry believes that around three quarters of child actors that 'went off the rails' later in their life had been abused in Hollywood. She said:
"This problem has been endemic in Hollywood for a long time and it's finally coming to light. Very bad people are still working here, protected by their friends."
In the last 10 years, several wealthy and significant people involved in the industry have been convicted. Some have left prison and returned to Hollywood and continued to work with children.
Wood, who now knows he was lucky to avoid being abused, compared the allegations in Hollywood to the claims linked to Savile following his death in October 2011. Wood said:
"You all grew up with Savile - Jesus, it must have been devastating. Clearly something major was going on in Hollywood. It was all organised.
There are a lot of vipers in this industry. There is a darkness in the underbelly - if you can imagine it, it's probably happened."
Feldman, who was one of the biggest child stars in the 1980s, was abused when he was a young actor. He said:
"The No 1 problem in Hollywood was and is - and always will be - paedophilia."
Other child actors were reportedly told by adults that it was perfectly normal for older men and younger boys in the industry to have sexual relations.
Corey Haim and Corey Feldman
Feldman told a British tabloid four years ago:
"When I was 14 and 15, things were happening to me. These older men were leching around me like vultures."
He went on to suffer with alcoholism, mental health problems and became addicted to drugs.
His friend, Corey Haim, another child actor, died of pnemonia aged 38 in 2010. Feldman claims a 'Hollywood mogul' is to blame for his friend's death. He said abusers are still working and are some of the richest and most powerful people in the business.
It was also claimed that a number of pool parties were held in Los Angeles during the late 1990s - primarily hosted by millionaire businessman Marc Collins-Rector. At these parties, Collins-Rector and other men are said to have sexually assaulted teenage boys, according to lawsuits filed in 2000 and 2014.
The Surprisingly Dramatic Role Of Nutrition In Mental Health May 26 2016 | From: Tedx
In New Zealand, one in seven young people will experience a significant depressive episode before the age of 24. Mental illness doesn’t discriminate against age, gender, ethnicity or social or economic markers such as income or region.
Mental illnesses can range from depression and anxiety through to eating disorders, schizophrenia, bipolar disorder and postpartum illness. For those affected by mental illness and their loved ones, there isn’t a lot you wouldn’t do to provide symptomatic relief from this dark and dangerous place.
This talk was given at a local TEDx event, produced independently of the TED Conferences. In this critically important talk, clinical psychologist Julia Rucklidge explores a range of scientific research, including her own, showing the significant role played by nutrition in mental health or illness.
Rates of all kinds of mental health problems are on the increase. Could something as simple as micronutrients be a useful tool in the prevention and treatment of mental illness in a society fuelled by nutrient-poor processed food, and stressful lifestyles? Could micronutrients help bring balance back into our lives?
The New Zealand Wellness Association asks you to watch this 18 minute TEDx Talk above by Professor Julia Rucklidge from the University of Canterbury. The information contained in this clip has the power to impact the mental health of you and your family.
The research shows significant and lasting results can be achieved using natural health products to treat nutrient deficiencies in those people suffering from mental illness. The research has also documented a superb safety record of the micronutrients. The products being researched are currently under threat.
There is currently a Bill, called the Natural Health and Supplementary Products Bill, in its final reading in Parliament which could halt access to the nutrients used in these trials and seriously compromise the ability to continue with this line of research. Why would MPs who are genuinely interested in the well being of their constituents vote for a Bill like this?
Why would MPs who are genuinely interested in the well being of their constituents vote for a Bill likethis?
ANSWER - They do not understand the Bill or its implications. They do not have the time to understand all the legislation they are asked to vote on. We do not believe they would say yes if they understood.
This Bill is not proportional with the risks therapeutic supplements present, and it prevents integrative and natural medical practitioners from providing adequate care for their patients.
The Bill will place a regulatory ban on many natural products or the maximum dosage of any ingredient currently being used to treat mental illness.
This is because these ingredients aren’t listed on the Permitted Ingredients List. To design a product and apply to have it added to the permitted ingredients list, or be registered as a medicine, would cost significant time and money, neither of which independent researchers and product developers have.
Coupled with the fact there is no patent protection for a new product, this Bill acts to stifle innovation in the field of natural medicine when helping this critical group of people.
The New Zealand Wellness Association is pro responsible, and sensible regulation. We ask you to consider the impact that this Bill will have on the rights of New Zealanders and those around you with mental illness, to have access to nutrients to prevent and treat illness.
Protect your access to safe and therapeutic natural health products in New Zealand: Please sign our Petition
Julia J Rucklidge, PhD is a Professor of Clinical Psychology in the Department of Psychology at the University of Canterbury, Christchurch, New Zealand. Originally from Toronto, she did her training in neurobiology (McGill) and Clinical Psychology (University of Calgary).
Her interests in nutrition and mental illness grew out of her own research showing poor outcomes for children with significant psychiatric illness despite receiving conventional treatments for their conditions. For the last 6 years, she has been investigating the role of micronutrients in the expression of mental illness, specifically ADHD, Bipolar Disorder, anxiety and more recently, stress and PTSD associated with the Canterbury earthquakes.
Saudi Press: The United States Blew Up World Trade Center To Create ‘War On Terror’ May 25 2016 | From: Breitbart
This is happening in real time. Last week the US Senate voted to allow the Saudi's to be sued for 9/11. Now we have Saudia Arabia coming out and saying the US alone created 9/11. Cabal infighting escalating?
The Saudi press is still furious over the U.S. Senate’s unanimous vote approving a bill that allows the families of 9/11 victims to sue Saudi Arabia. This time, the London-based Al-Hayat daily has claimed that the U.S. planned the attacks on the World Trade Center in order to create a global war on terror.
The article, written by Saudi legal expert Katib al-Shammari and translated by MEMRI, claims that American threats to expose documents that prove Saudi involvement in the attacks are part of a long-standing U.S. policy that he calls “victory by means of archives.”
Al-Shammari claims that the U.S. chooses to keep some cards close to its chest in order to use them at a later date. One example is choosing not to invade Iraq in the 1990s and keeping its leader, Saddam Hussein, alive to use as “a bargaining chip” against other Gulf States. Only once Shi’ism threatened to sweep the region did America act to get rid of Hussein “since they no longer saw him as an ace up their sleeve.”
[Comment: This is not to say that 9/11 was solely a machination of the United States Government. The Saudi's were involved - but it was not them alone of course. Israel and it's Mossad were also involved. Ultimately, it was not so much an effort of particular countries, rather it was driven by the 'Illuminati' NWO 'Cabal' agenda which operates beyond national boundaries.]
He claims that the 9/11 attacks were another such card, enabling the U.S. to blame whoever suited its needs at a particular time; first it blamed Al-Qaeda and the Taliban, then Saddam Hussein’s regime in Iraq, and now Saudi Arabia.
“September 11 is one of winning cards in the American archives, because all the wise people in the world who are experts on American policy and who analyze the images and the videos [of 9/11] agree unanimously that what happened in the [Twin] Towers was a purely American action, planned and carried out within the U.S.
Proof of this is the sequence of continuous explosions that dramatically ripped through both buildings … Expert structural engineers demolished them with explosives, while the planes crashing [into them] only gave the green light for the detonation – they were not the reason for the collapse.
But the U.S. still spreads blame in all directions."
The intention of the attacks, writes al-Shammari in his conspiracy article, was to create “an obscure enemy – terrorism – which became what American presidents blamed for all their mistakes” and that would provide justification for any “dirty operation” in other countries.
The terror label was applied to Muslims even though it was Muslims who helped America defeat the Soviets and bring an end to the Cold War, he writes.
The problem, asserts al-Shammari, is that the U.S. must always find a new impetus to have an adversary, for “the nature of the U.S. is that it cannot exist without an enemy.”
Al-Shammari’s article comes amid a torrent of vociferous articles in the Saudi press that range from accusing the U.S. of being “schizophrenic” and in cahoots with Iran to publishing warnings that if passed, the “Satanic” bill would “open the gates of hell.”
The Opiate Of The Masses: When Religion Becomes An Addiction May 25 2016 | From: Sott
To a medical researcher, the word addiction has a specific biological meaning. But in common vernacular, it means approximately this: The state of being enslaved to a habit or practice or to something that is psychologically or physically habit-forming, such as narcotics, to such an extent that its cessation causes severe trauma.
Based on this definition some religious experiences seem a lot like addictions - at least that's what former believers say.
Blogger Sandra Kee, a self-described "Christian Heretic," looks back at her family history and sees religion and addiction as a messy tangle: "My family for several generations was in a dysfunctional and addictive religious life, using God (or what we believed about God) as a drug.
Many of the family who left religion simply traded for another addiction. The generations that entered into religion did so to escape alcoholism and other addictions (though it wasn't called addiction back then). Many who remained in religion developed additional addictions as well."
Former Mormon Brandon Olson is even more emphatic:
"Karl Marx said it right, 'Religion is the opiate of the masses.' I'm still recovering from it. Part of my recovery is helping others get free," says Olson. "I quit believing in a god when I was a teenager, but I was afraid of hell / damnation until I was about 35.
It took me until I was 40 to speak up and revoke my LDS cult membership. I am now 50, and I consider religion to be an imposed addiction - no different than holding a baby and shooting it up with small doses of heroin, increasing the doses as the baby grows."
In recent decades, the idea of recovery from religion has taken root. Recovery websites provide platforms for sharing stories, like exChristian.net, or offer support and help, like RecoveringfromReligion.org. Many draw on the language and strategies of other recovery programs.
Important Note: Addiction to religion is non-denominational. It happens in all religions, and it manifests ranging from obsession to extremism. It has been widely noted that religion has long been used as a way to control the masses - to divide and conquer, causing squabbling and wars.
Religion dictates that a persons connection with God / the Universe / Source / the Creator (the label doesn't matter) must be administered by a 3rd party and utilising a place of worship for point of focus. A spiritual outlook reveals that we all have that connection innately within us and that we do not require any intermediary nor any constrictive (often misinterpreted) belief system.
Even within Christianity, some people use 12-Step language to talk about religious addiction or what a newly-released book calls Sober Spirituality. Author Elizabeth Estherdescribes how church experiences produce a "high":
"There's the ubiquitous mood lighting so that you can only see what's meant to be seen... Loud music ensures you hear only what is meant to be heard...
Several high-energy warm-up acts make you feel only what you're supposed to feel... By the time the featured attraction steps on stage... you're so amped up you'll hand over your body, soul, and wallet. It doesn't even occur to you that this might be destructive, because feeling elated is the desired outcome."
The result, says Esther, can be a destructive quest for righteous euphoria. Father Leo Booth similarly uses the language of Alcoholics Anonymous in his book, When God Becomes a Drug, which promises readers "practical ways to overcome excessive devotion and attain healthy spirituality."
When does spirituality start looking like addiction? On the internet, checklists abound (for example, here,here, and here) and include symptoms that would sound familiar to any addict or Al Anon member.
Here are some Highlights:
Do you use religion to avoid social and emotional problems?
Are you preoccupied with religion to the point of neglecting work?
Would people who know you describe your religiosity as extreme or obsessive?
Does your commitment to a religious leader or institution take precedence over your children or other family relationships?
Does religion isolate you from outside friends and activities?
Do you use religion as an excuse when you are abusive to friends or family members?
Are your religious contributions financially imprudent?
Do you feel irritated and act defensive when someone questions your religion?
Broader Mental Health Questions
But religious addiction checklists and other self-help materials often also include symptoms that, while psychologically unhealthy, may have little to do with diagnosing addiction.
Do you use guilt to beat up yourself or others?
Do you think of sex as shameful or dirty?
Do you use religion to manipulate or exploit others?
Does your religion threaten violence against people who believe differently?
Are you uncompromising and judgmental, quick to find fault in others or evil in the world?
Do you find yourself arguing against scientific evidence to defend your religion?
Do you wait for God to fix things in your life or blame your problems on supernatural forces?
Do you tell other people "what God wants" or the "right" way to interpret the Bible?
Are you preoccupied with sin and the afterlife?
Do you threaten others with divine punishment or otherwise try to control them? Without a doubt, a yes to any of these questions suggests that something is out of whack. Patterns like these can interfere with healthy self-esteem, personal empowerment, work, community service, and loving relationships. They are toxic. That said, a worldview can be toxic without being addictive, which may leave the question of religious addiction murky at best.
Looking back on his years as a Christian, non-theist Tony Debono says,"While I have no desire to return to religion, I definitely miss the highs of religious worship, as well as the friendship and support of the community. Is that more like missing a substance of addiction, or like missing the delirium and strange dreams of a high fever? I'm not sure."
To make matters even more complex, a set of beliefs can be false without being either toxic or addictive, and in some situation false beliefs may even be adaptive. Also, research suggests that participation in some forms of religious community or spiritual practices like meditation may have benefits independent of any truth-value in the community's distinctive claims.
Recognizing this, humanist and atheist groups have begun experimenting with how to create secular churches and humanist assemblies - communities that lack supernatural beliefs but that nonetheless meet regularly to channel wonder, provide mutual support, talk about deep values, and inspire service.
These experimental communities are exploring how to keep some of the best of religion without supernaturalism and without the other parts that can lead religion to feel harmful. In the future, secular spiritual communities of this type may ease the transition for people leaving a religion that feels unhealthy or addictive, or that no longer fits for other reasons.
Your Results May Vary
The risk of any activity or substance becoming a compulsion depends in part on characteristics of the substance and in part on characteristics of the situation and user. We know, for example, that nicotine is more addictive than marijuana. But for even the most intense pleasures - those that create the highest rates of compulsion - some users retain their capacity for autonomy and balance.
Some people can ingest a pleasurable neurotoxin like alcohol or even cocaine in moderation, while others find themselves drawn inexorably toward self-destruction.
The same can be said about pleasurable activities like running or gambling. And the same is likely to be true of powerful religious pleasures - intense feelings of euphoria, transcendence, hope, joy, absolution, security, immortality, certitude, purity, purpose, belonging, or superiority.
In the end, the question of whether religion is addictive for you or someone you care about comes back to the definition of addiction itself, which includes words like enslaved, habit, and trauma: Has your religion consumed your life? Is it freely chosen? (Try on the thought of what might happen if you let it go.) What price are you or others around you paying for the good stuff you get?
Addiction aside, the bigger question may be whether a specific set of religious beliefs or practices contributes to wellbeing or harm. Human development consultant Marlene Winell describes a pattern she calls religious trauma syndrome, which can be triggered either by experiences within religious communities - especially those that are authoritarian, isolationist and fear based - or as a consequence of leaving.
Winell's diagnosis is unofficial, but when she writes on the topic, former believers by the hundreds respond, saying that they see themselves in her words and stories.
A Growing Array of Options
Fortunately, for those who find their former religion to be harmful, addictive or otherwise a bad fit, options in most of the world are growing. It has been said that there are as many gods as there are believers, and some people who shake free from one form of religion find themselves at home in another.
But a growing number of former believers, say they are one or another kind of post-religious, and that's ok. There's plenty of downside to all of these differences. As Jon Stewart put it sardonically, "Religion. It's given people hope in a world torn apart by . . . religion."
But the upside is this: Anyone able to open their door finds a whole world of possibilities just outside.
Israeli Deal To Open New Powerplant In Kawerau May 24 2016 | From: NewZealandHerald
Kawerau will be home to a new geothermal powerplant following a deal made between the Te Ahi O Maui partnership and an Israeli company, Ormat.
Mighty River Power is holding a media open day at its new Nga Awa Purua Geothermal Power Station. 05 May 2010 The Daily Post Picture by Andrew Warner. NAD 06May10 - GREEN MACHINE: Nga Awa Purua
The Te Ahi O Maui geothermal project is a partnership between Eastland Generation and the Kawerau A8D Ahu Whenua Trust, who are owners of the land on which the plant will be constructed.
Ormat is a world-leader in the development and construction of state of the art geothermal power solutions.
Project Manager Ben Gibson said he expected construction to start towards the end of this year with completion likely in 2018. He believed the new plant would deliver in excess of 22 megawatts of electricity.
Te Ahi O Maui chairman and Eastland Ground chief executive Matt Todd said he was pleased the project had partnered with Ormat for construction of the powerplant.
“[Ormat] has the necessary skills and knowledge that we can rely on for the successful delivery of the Te Ahi O Maui project."
Trustee for the Kawerau A8D Ahu Whenua Trust and cultural advisor to the project, Tomairangi Fox, said the milestone was significant for his people.
“We've seen the other Ormat plants here in Kawerau and further afield. We liked what we saw and this company's operations and plants fit with our kaupapa," he said.
Colleen Skerrett-White, owner and past-trustee of the A8D Trust, said they had measures in place so Te Ahi O Maui would have minimal impact on the surrounding environment and its people.
“Our standards for environmental care go over and above Regional Council consent conditions. Our project team has worked really hard to ensure the project is executed in an environmentally friendly, sustainable and culturally appropriate way."
Te Ahi O Maui holds resource consent for the take and discharge of 15,000 tonnes per day of geothermal fluid from the Kawerau geothermal reservoir.
The 20 Biggest Cancer Lies You've Been Brainwashed To Believe By The For-Profit Cancer Industry + Cancer Cures Exposed: Natural Medicine Revealed As The Answer May 24 2016 | From: NaturalNews / GreenMedInfo
You've been taught all sorts of lies about cancer by the "cancer profiteers" - the institutions, cancer doctors, oncology centers and chemotherapy drug makers who profit from cancer.
In order to keep their profits flowing, they have to keep you in the dark about cancer truths: How it originates, how it can be prevented and how it can even be reversed!
If you or a loved one have been diagnosed with cancer (or even suspect you might have cancer), it's crucial to learn how the for-profit cancer industry has been lying to you. Remember, cancer doctors like the criminal oncologist Dr. Farid Fatafalsely diagnosed people with cancer to make money off "treating" them with deadly chemicals known as "chemotherapy." Dr. Fata, who worked out of a state-of-the-art cancer center in Detroit, is now a convicted felon.
But there are more criminals working inside the cancer industry: Oncologists, cancer surgeons, breast cancer specialists and mammography con artists. Their goal is to scare you with a false positive diagnosis, then convince you to undergo surgery, chemotherapy or radiation therapy that you don't even need!
To avoid all that and maybe even save your own life, learn and remember these top 20 biggest cancer lies you've been brainwashed to believe.
And when you're ready for an even greater dose of the truth about cancer, register for this amazing upcoming summit called The Truth About Cancer, which begins in just a few days. After hearing these astonishing interviews with pioneering holistic cancer doctors and researchers, you'll never be victimized by the cancer industry again!
The Top 20 Cancer Lies Told by the Cancer Establishment
LIE #1. Cancer is caused by spontaneous bad luck, not cause and effect
TRUTH: Cancer always has a cause. There is no such thing as "spontaneous" cancer without cause, and the cancer doctors who claim such phenomena exist are practicing nothing but "cancer voodoo" or pushing anti-science "disease magic" rooted in mysticism rather than reality.
LIE #2. There is no cure for cancer
TRUTH: There are thousands of cures for cancer that already exist in the natural world and are being used every day all across the planet, outside the controlled monopolies of pharmaceutical medicine and toxic chemotherapy.
Your body already knows how to cure cancer! It just needs the resources (and avoidance of toxic chemicals) to accomplish it.
TRUTH: Chemotherapy is a kind of "chemical carpet-bombing" approach to barbaric medicine that poisons the entire body. The measurable shrinkage of cancer tumors isn't a "treatment" for cancer at all. Unless the cancer tumor stem cells are removed or destroyed, the tumor just grows back.
And once the body is poisoned by chemotherapy, its immune response to cancer is permanently compromised, which is why cancer tends to return in multiple organs within 12-24 months after a person undergoes chemotherapy.
Learn the real story on cancer cures, cancer prevention and cancer industry fraud in The Truth About Cancer docu-series, beginning in just a few days.
LIE #4. There's no such thing as an anti-cancer food or herb
TRUTH: Anti-cancer medicines have been created by Mother Nature since the beginning of life on our planet. There are literally thousands of anti-cancer plant nutrients found in the foods at every grocery store (in just the fresh produce section!).
The anti-cancer properties of these powerful foods (like turmeric, garlic, onions, ginger and broccoli) rarely receive any media attention because they can't be patented and turned into high-profit drugs.
LIE #5) None of the chemicals used in personal care products cause cancer
TRUTH: Popular personal care products are absolutely loaded with cancer-causing chemicals, including hormone disruptors, known carcinogens and fragrance chemicals that promote mutagenesis.
Nearly all popular laundry detergents and fabric softeners are little more than cancer-causing cocktails of dangerous chemicals marketed in happy-looking boxes.
LIE #6. Pesticides and herbicides don't cause cancer, either
TRUTH: Pesticides only work because they interfere with metabolic processes and kill organisms. By definition, they are deadly, or they wouldn't be used as pesticides.
The world's most popular herbicide, glyphosate, is molecularly very similar to VX Nerve Gas, the most toxic substance ever created by humankind... and developed as a weapon of mass destruction.
LIE #7. You're destined to get cancer and there's nothing you can do to stop it
TRUTH: There's nothing in your genes that programs you to have cancer. Your genetic code is actually a blueprint for perfect health.
But when your body's cells are bathed in toxic, cancer-causing chemicals found in food and personal care products, it causes good genes to turn bad (through mutations), leading to cancer. You have remarkable control over your exposure to (or avoidance of) cancer-causing chemicals.
LIE #8) Cancer doctors want to help you eliminate cancer
TRUTH: Cancer doctors earn huge profits on chemotherapy, surgery and radiation treatments. It is in their financial interests that you have recurring cancer, creating repeat business for them.
If they helped you eliminate cancer, they would lose your business and lose out on all the money they can make off your disease!
LIE #9. Mammograms catch cancer early and thereby "save lives"
TRUTH: Mammograms emit ionizing radiation that causes cancer. The more mammograms you get, the more like you are to eventually be diagnosed with cancer... caused by the mammography!
Additionally, there are so many false positives in mammography that statistics show mammograms ultimately harm 10 women for every 1 woman they might help.
LIE #10. A cancer diagnosis is always true and accurate
TRUTH: Cancer diagnoses are frequently exaggerated or fabricated out of thin air by cancer doctors looking to make money off medically unjustified cancer treatments. Dr. Farid Fata, for example, was found guilty of criminal fraud for falsely diagnosing healthy people with cancer at his popular oncology clinic in Detroit.
He deliberately lied to every patient who walked into his clinic, telling them they had cancer and that they would die without his chemotherapy. He poisoned thousands of people and is now serving time in federal prison for his crimes. (He's just one of many criminal cancer doctors in the industry...)
LIE #11. The drug companies want to find a cure for cance
TRUTH: The drug companies want to keep milking cancer for profits, and they have no interest whatsoever in eliminating their revenue stream by curing cancer.
LIE #12. Komen for the Cure raises money to try to eliminate cancer
TRUTH: The corrupt, dishonest Komen group is a front for the cancer industry. It rakes in money from donations and uses most of it to run mammography clinics in poor, inner city neighborhoods where people can be diagnosed with cancer and turned over to chemotherapy treatments for sick profits.
Komen for the Cure is running a medical racket and has zero interest in curing cancer. It's the same racket we've been promised since the 1960s: If we just had a few more billion dollars in funding, we'd find a cure!
LIE #13. Cancer is an "enemy" that has "invaded" your body, and it should be eliminated by attacking the body with chemical weapons
TRUTH: Cancer is actually just your body's own cells multiplying out of control. It's not something you "catch" or something that "infects" your body.
Modern medicine's makes a huge mistake in treating cancer like an infectious disease, bombarding the body with chemicals to try to eradicate the cancer. But the cancer is your body's own cells gone haywire, so to kill the cancer, they have to very nearly kill YOU at the same time!
LIE #14. Once the drug companies find a cure for cancer, they'll give it to the world for free
TRUTH: The drug companies are interested in profits, not saving humanity. The very idea that drug companies would spend billions of dollars developing a drug and then give it away for free is laughable.
All these people giving money to "search for the cure" don't realize that the cure will never be released to the world for free, even if it is ever found in the realm of pharmaceuticals. Drug companies seek profits, and profits come from controlling the treatments while keeping people diseased. They don't come from finding a cure and releasing it for free.
LIE #15. Having a double mastectomy prevents breast cancer
TRUTH: Chopping off body parts that might someday get cancer is perhaps the most foolish way imaginable to attempt to avoid the disease.
There's a sexist component to this, too: Ever notice that cancer doctors never tell men to cut off their testicles to prevent testicular cancer? Maybe they will soon recommend people chop off their own heads to prevent brain cancer, too...
LIE #16. Sunlight causes cancer (and sunscreen prevents it)
TRUTH: Sensible sunlight exposure actually PREVENTS cancer by generating vitamin D in your skin. Most people are horribly vitamin D deficient, and it's low vitamin D levels that encourage tumors to grow throughout the body.
(This is why most tumor growth happens in the winter, by the way.) Vitamin D is such a powerful nutrient that it alone has been shown to prevent more than 80% of all cancers. But it has to be consumed in much higher doses than typically used.
LIE #17. The only reason we haven't already cured cancer is because we haven't invested enough money in it yet
TRUTH: This is the same lie repeated since the 1960s... a claim that the cure for cancer is just around the corner, and we only need more research money to finally solve it for good.
But what this lie utterly neglects to admit is that the cancer industry isn't interested in a cancer cure. There's far too much money to be made from cancer patients, cancer donations, cancer research and cancer drugs. Cancer is a multi-billion-dollar industry, and nobody in the industry is actively trying to make themselves irrelevant.
LIE #18. Modern cancer treatments are highly effective and backed by scientific evidence of their efficacy and safety
TRUTH: The real scientific evidence shows that chemotherapy only works on about 2% of cancers. For the other 98% of patients receiving chemo, it's just a deadly poison that damages their heart, liver, brain and kidneys.
(See Questioning Chemotherapy by Ralph Moss.) As with nearly everything in the pharmaceutical industry, the scientific "evidence" on cancer treatments is distorted or fabricated to favor the financial interests of the drug industry.
LIE #19. There is no link between diet and cancer
TRUTH: Unless you are a smoker, what you eat is the #1 determining factor of whether you get cancer or avoid it.
The foods you consume daily have a direct, measurable and irrefutable influence on cancer: either preventing it or causing it.
LIE #20. The cancer industry wants to put itself out of business
TRUTH: Ultimately, the "great lie" of the cancer industry is that it wants to make itself obsolete by solving cancer. This lie is predicated on the laughable premise that every cancer expert, cancer doctor, cancer non-profit, cancer research facility and cancer drug company wants to bankrupt itself by eliminating cancer forever.
Do you think that pharmaceutical companies making billions a year from oncology products would give away a cancer cure for free?
Any intelligent person knows that people who are steeped in the profit of cancer will never give up those profits, even if it means making sure people stay sick and diseased. (Your suffering is no concern to them. They need profits!)
Cancer Cures Exposed: Natural Medicine Revealed As The Answer
Natural cures for cancer not only exist, but have a huge body of scientific literature supporting them. Why don't more know about it? Both GreenMedInfo.com and Ty Bollinger's documentary, The Truth About Cancer, provide a powerful combination of awareness raising tools to help move the paradigm of cancer prevention and treatment out of the Dark Ages into a compassionate, natural, effective and affordable, root cause resolution approach.
GreenMedInfo.com's #1 health advocacy is cancer, measured both by the sheer density of research we have collected and reported on the subject over the past seven years, and the primary interest of our user base measured by traffic to cancer related topics, which includes an average of over one million unique visitors monthly.
Our cancer database - a byproduct of a decade of work - now contains thousands of abstracts from published studies documenting the therapeutic or preventive value of natural interventions for cancer, as well as the unintended adverse effects of conventional appraoches.
For this reason we are excited to spread the word about one of the most popular and authentic awareness raising events in the history of cancer advocacy work: A 9-part docu-series titled, 'The Truth About Cancer..A Global Quest', which interviews on site over 100 doctors, survivors and scientists, who together, break the medical and research community's 'code of silence' and expose the truth about cancer: namely, how to prevent, treat and beat cancer 100% naturally.
Best of all, its free for anyone to watch.
In this groundbreaking series, Sayer Ji, founder of GreenMedInfo.com, reveals the incredible depth of scientific validation supporting the complementary and alternative (CAM) medical movement, making an appearance in all but one episode.
The Truth About Cancer: A Global Quest Docu-Series - Official Trailer
So, how did the docu-series come about?
Ty Bollinger lost 7 family members to cancer. He decided to uncover why cancer exists. What causes cancer? How does a person get cancer? How do you stop cancer?
Current statistics show 1 in 2 men, and 1 in 3 women will be diagnosed with cancer. At present, modern solutions for healing cancer have a documented 2.1% success rate. Which means 1 in 50 people diagnosed with cancer are likely to survive using popular mainstream methods of healing.
Few people realize how quickly cancer is spreading. In the early 1900's roughly 3 in 100 people were diagnosed with cancer. Today cancer has spread so quickly 41 in 100 people are expected to die from cancer. Making cancer one of the worlds leading causes of death.
Lowering Cholesterol Increases The Risk Of Death May 23 2016 | From: DrMalcolmKendrick
A group of researchers went back through the data from the Minnesota Coronary Experiment run between 1966 and 1973 in the US – on many thousands of participants.
They were, in part stimulated to do this because they had previously looked at the Sydney Diet Heart Study 1966 – 73. In their own words:
“Our recovery and 2013 publication of previously unpublished data from the Sydney Diet Heart Study (SDHS, 1966-73) belatedly showed that replacement of saturated fat with vegetable oil rich in linoleic acid (a polyunsaturated fat) significantly increased the risks of death from coronary heart disease and all causes, despite lowering serum cholesterol.
Our recovery of unpublished documents and raw data from another diet-heart trial, the Minnesota Coronary Experiment, provided us with an opportunity to further evaluate this issue."
To make this clear. The Sydney Diet Heart Study (SDHS) was set up to show that replacing saturated fat with unsaturated fat would reduce the risk of heart disease The original researchers who set up and ran the SDHS did not fully publish their data at the time (one can only speculate as to why this may be so).
When this current group of researchers finally managed to get hold of the full data from the SHDS, it was found that replacing saturated fat with polyunsaturated fat did lower cholesterol, however:
Replqacement Of Saturated Significantly Increased The Risk Of Death From Coronary Heart Disease And All Causes.
I am not normally a great fan of capitalisation, and using bold, but I think this statement needed that treatment.
Now, a few years later, the researchers who re-analysed the Sydney Diet Heart Study decided to try and find all the unpublished data from the Minnesota Coronary Experiment (MCE). (One can again only speculate as to why the original researchers did not reveal all of their data).
The main points from this re-analysis were the following
Though the MCE intervention lowered serum cholesterol, this did not translate to improved survival
Paradoxically, MCE participants who had greater reductions in serum cholesterol had a higher, rather than lower, risk of death
Results of a systematic review and meta-analysis of randomized controlled trials do not provide support for the traditional diet heart hypothesis
The More The Cholesterol Was Lowered The Greater The Risk Of Death.
The Minnesota Coronary Experiment (MCE), a randomized controlled trial conducted in 1968-73, was the largest (n=9570) and perhaps the most rigorously executed dietary trial of cholesterol lowering by replacement of saturated fat with vegetable oil rich in linoleic acid.
The MCE is the only such randomized controlled trial to complete post-mortem assessment of coronary, aortic, and cerebrovascular atherosclerosis grade and infarct status and the only one to test the clinical effects of increasing linoleic acid in large prespecified subgroups of women and older adults.
Those who have read my ramblings over the years will not be in least surprised by this finding. Because, as you may know by now.
I believe that raised cholesterol has nothing whatsoever to do with the heart disease. So, this finding is not a paradox to me. It is simply further confirmation of many, many, other studies which utterly contradict the cholesterol hypothesis.
I would not, however, hold my breath waiting for this study to make any difference to anything. My current favourite comment on this study comes from an opinion leader from the British Heart Foundation. It is, as follows:
‘Professor Jeremy Pearson of the British Heart Foundation commented:
“This is an interesting study which shows that decreasing your intake of saturated fat can have a positive impact in helping lower cholesterol. More research and longer studies are needed to assess whether or not eating less saturated fat can reduce your risk of cardiovascular death.’
Read and weep gentle readers. Here is a man so completely and utterly convinced of the dangers of saturated fat consumption and raising blood cholesterol that he is incapable of grasping what this paper is saying. Max plank said that ‘Science advances one funeral at a time.’ There is at least one funeral, currently, that I can think would help to move science along.
Perhaps time from a quote from Professor John Ioannidis, who wrote a rather sad article recently, entitled Evidence-based medicine has been hijacked: a report to David Sackett.
“This is a confession building on a conversation with David Sackett in 2004 when I shared with him some personal adventures in evidence-based medicine (EBM), the movement that he had spearheaded.
The narrative is expanded with what ensued in the subsequent 12 years. EBM has become far more recognized and adopted in many places, but not everywhere, for example, it never acquired much influence in the USA.
As EBM became more influential, it was also hijacked to serve agendas different from what it originally aimed for.
Influential randomized trials are largely done by and for the benefit of the industry. Meta-analyses and guidelines have become a factory, mostly also serving vested interests. National and federal research funds are funnelled almost exclusively to research with little relevance to health outcomes.
We have supported the growth of principal investigators who excel primarily as managers absorbing more money. Diagnosis and prognosis research and efforts to individualize treatment have fuelled recurrent spurious promises.
Risk factor epidemiology has excelled in salami-sliced data-dredged articles with gift authorship and has become adept to dictating policy from spurious evidence. Under market pressure, clinical medicine has been transformed to finance-based medicine.
In many places, medicine and health care are wasting societal resources and becoming a threat to human well-being. Science denialism and quacks are also flourishing and leading more people astray in their life choices, including health. EBM still remains an unmet goal, worthy to be attained…."
“David, I was a failure when we started this conversation and I am an even bigger failure now, almost 12 years later. Despite my zealot efforts, my friends and colleagues have not lost their jobs.
The GDP devoted to health care is increasing, spurious trials, and even more spurious meta-analyses are published at a geometrically increasing pace, conflicted guidelines are more influential than ever, spurious risk factors are alive and well, quacks have become even more obnoxious, and approximately 85% of biomedical research is wasted.
I still enjoy science tremendously, focusing on ideas, rigorous methods, strong mathematics and statistics, working on my weird (and probably biased) writings alternating with even more desperate poetry, and learning from young, talented people.
But I am also still fantasizing of some place where the practice of medicine can still be undeniably helpful to human beings and society at large.
Does it have to be a very remote place in northern Canada close to the Arctic? Or in some isolated beautiful Greek island where corpses of unfortunate refugees are found on the beach or floating in the water almost every day, as I am writing this commentary, although no naval battle has been fought?
Is there still a place for rational thinking and for evidence to help humans? Sadly, you cannot answer me any longer, but I hope that we should not have to escape to the most distant recesses of geography or imagination.
Twenty-five years after its launch, EBM should still be possible to practice anywhere, somewhere - this remains a worthwhile goal.”
David Sackett, the founder of Evidence Based Medicine, is now dead. I presume he is spinning in his grave at what has happened to medicine and medical research. Which is, currently, not based on any evidence at all. If the evidence does not fit with the currently dogma it is simply not published.
Does anyone in the higher reaches of the medical establishment actually give a stuff about this? It seems that they do not. Meanwhile the shelves of our supermarkets groan under the weight of the super-healthy polyunsaturated fat products that we are encouraged to eat, by the likes of the British Heart Foundation.
Yet, here is what the uncovered evidence from the largest study done in this area is screaming at us:
Greater cholesterol lowering, using polyunsaturated fats, increases the risk of death.
And don't even go there with the Soy - which was a waste material reclassified as a 'food' a couple of decades ago to make money out of selling you more toxic crap. And beyond that is the GMO Soy... It goes on and on...
So, British Heart Foundation, the question must be asked… are you killing people with your advice on saturated fat consumption? Perhaps you ought to think about changing it, before more people die.
Here is what the BHF currently say about saturated fats:
‘Swap these for unsaturated fats. Eating too much saturated fat increases the amount of cholesterol in your blood.’
Do you have any actual evidence to base this advice on… any at all? If so, let’s see it. If not, change it.
"We're Running A F**king Casino" Congressman Admits Washington DC Is A "Sinkhole Of Leeches" May 23 2016 | From: NewYorkPost
An anonymous congressman has dropped a bombshell election-year book that confirms why Americans hate their national government and have rallied to anti-establishment presidential candidates like Donald Trump.
The veteran politician lays bare a rotten and corrupt Congress enslaved by lobbyists and interested only in re-election in an anonymous, 65-page manifesto called “The Confessions of Congressman X.”
“Like most of my colleagues, I promise my constituents a lot of stuff I can never deliver,” he admits.
“But what the hell? It makes them happy hearing it . . . My main job is to keep my job.”
The House member - a Democrat who is either still in Congress or served sometime over the past two decades - says more time is spent fundraising than reading bills and calls Washington a “sinkhole of leeches.”
The title of one chapter sums up his view of congressional leaders: “Harry Reid’s a Pompous Ass,” he says of the Senate Democratic leader.
The book, published by the small Mill City Press, is based on years of transcribed private discussions, which the congressman last November gave editor Robert Atkinson.
Senate Majority Leader Harry ReidPhoto: Getty Images Atkinson declined to say whether Congressman X is a current or former House member.
X says the cloak of anonymity gave him the freedom to expose secrets, including how the public’s money is wasted.
“We spend money we don’t have and blithely mortgage the future with a wink and a nod. Screw the next generation. It’s about getting credit now, lookin’ good for the upcoming election,” he says.
He said he and his colleagues often lie to try to be all things to all people instead of tackling the nation’s problems.
“I contradict myself all the time, but few people notice,” X says.
“One minute I rail against excessive spending and ballooning debt. The next minute I’m demanding more spending on education, health care, unemployment benefits, conservation projects, yadda, yadda, yadda.”
Voters are described as gullible, know-nothing jerks, while the only people who count are the big donors who pour billions of dollars into lobbying.
“Voters are incredibly ignorant. It’s far easier than you think to manipulate a nation of naive, self-absorbed sheep who crave instant gratification . . .,” vents Congressman X.
He says money “corrupts” and House members are “puppets” to lobbyists who bankroll their campaigns.
“Business organizations and unions fork over more than $3 billion a year to those who lobby the federal government. Does that tell you something? We’re operating a f–king casino,” he says.
He describes himself as a “closet moderate” who supports charter schools and tax vouchers to allow poor kids to go to private schools. But students take a back seat to partisan politics.
“Our education’s in the toilet, and all we do is snipe at each other,” he says.
Congress is too polarized and partisan to get anything done, by the congressman’s account.
“There seems to be a complete disintegration of confidence in government. A fear that government is its own special interest,” he says.
“America’s on an irreversible decline and no one in Washington seems to care . . . God help us.”
The controversial book set off a guessing game in the political world about the author’s identity.
New York sources speculated it’s Rep. Steve Israel (D-LI), a moderate who announced he’s retiring and who has complained about the constant need to fundraise to finance re-election campaigns. But Israel, a novelist, denied that he took pen to paper this time.
“Absolutely not true, never heard of it before. And frankly, now that I’m leaving Congress, if I were to write a book like that, I would put my name on it,” Israel said in a statement.
What Would Happen If We Just Gave People Money? May 22 2016 | From: FiveThirtyEight
Daniel Straub remembers the night he got hooked on basic income. He had invited Götz Werner, a billionaire owner of a German drugstore chain, to give an independent talk in Zurich, where Straub was working as a project manager for a think tank.
He had read an article about the radical proposal to unconditionally guarantee citizens an income and spent a few years casually researching the idea.
Straub had heard Werner was a good speaker on the topic, and that night in 2009 he was indeed excellent at connecting with the audience, a sold-out house of 200. “It was a very intense evening; people were paying attention,” Straub recalled.
Werner posed a pair of simple questions to the crowd: What do you really want to do with your life? Are you doing what you really want to do?
Whatever the answers, he suggested basic income was the means to achieve those goals. The idea is as simple as it is radical: Rather than concern itself with managing myriad social welfare and unemployment insurance programs, the government would instead regularly cut a no-strings-attached check to each citizen. No conditions. No questions.
Everyone, rich or poor, employed or out of work would get the same amount of money. This arrangement would provide a path toward a new way of living: If people no longer had to worry about making ends meet, they could pursue the lives they want to live.
Straub had studied business, international policy and psychology at school and spent years working for IBM, the International Red Cross and a Montessori school. Basic income “struck a nerve,” he said.
“People are burned out more than ever. You come to Switzerland and talk to people, they aren’t happy. They fear for their jobs. There is a gap between the economic possibility in this country and the quality of life.”
After Werner’s talk, Straub quit his job at the think tank and began to campaign for a basic income full time. He and a few hundred volunteers gathered 126,000 signatures over two years to force a referendum, now slated for June 5, to amend the Swiss Constitution to guarantee a basic income to all citizens. (The suggested amount is 2,500 Swiss francs per month, or about $1,700 after adjusting for the cost of living.)
Switzerland is one of the world’s richest countries, and compared to the United States, it offers far more generous health care and education to its citizens. But supporters of the referendum think the government can provide even more security.
“We limit ourselves too much,” Straub said. “I’m interested in consciousness, expanding consciousness. And basic income is a wonderful tool for that - it challenges a lot of assumptions we have.”
The entirety of the Swiss government opposes the referendum, citing potential effects on people’s willingness to work and the huge fiscal costs as reasons to vote “no.” Even Straub and his fellow supporters don’t expect it to pass. But he’s excited by the enthusiasm, and media attention, he’s seen for the idea in the past few years. Just getting on the ballot “was a moment of hope, for me and for a lot of other people,” he said. “It was a moment of departure.”
He’s right that interest in basic income is spreading across the world. Finland and the Netherlands are developing plans to study the idea. Canada will likely see an experiment in Ontario, if not on a national level. In France, several members of Parliament have supported running an experiment, and the finance minister is open to it. And in January, Sam Altman, the president of Y Combinator, announced that the San Francisco-based startup fund was organizing a basic income study in the U.S.
“In the last five years we’ve taken on a new respectability. But in the last two years it has become an avalanche,” said Guy Standing, a British economist who co-founded the Basic Income Earth Network in 1986 to promote debate and research on the topic. Initially a small cabal of young economists, philosophers and activists, BIEN has grown into the largest hub for basic income supporters - a global network with national organizations in 23 countries.
Basic income, Standing says, is more than good policy. He calls it “essential,” given that more and more people in developed economies are living “a life of chronic economic insecurity.” He sees this insecurity fueling populist politicians, boosting far-right parties across Europe and the rise of Donald Trump in the U.S. Economic stagnation increases the appeal of extreme politicians, and unless those insecurities are addressed, Standing said, that appeal is only going to get stronger.
The economic uncertainty surrounding basic income is huge, and the politics of bringing such a program about on a large scale are daunting.
But something makes this radical proposal so exciting that people and governments are increasingly willing to try it. Basic income challenges our notions of the social safety net, the relationship between work and income, and how to adapt to technological change.
That makes it one of the most audacious social policy experiments in modern history. It could fail disastrously, or it could change everything for the better. Basic income has attracted a motley crew of supporters, spanning the ideological spectrum. Efficiency-minded libertarians like the idea of streamlining the bureaucracy of the welfare state.
Silicon Valley techies hope a guaranteed income would cushion the blow as automation replaces human jobs.
Those with a more utopian bent, such as the organizers of the Swiss referendum, want to open up more options, to let people create art and free the world of what Straub calls “bullshit jobs.”
Critics of the idea say it’s too expensive, would encourage people to stop working and possibly tank a country’s economy. It’s thought to be a political non-starter, too, especially in countries less wealthy and with less generous welfare states than Switzerland.
And because basic income proposes a radical reform to the existing welfare system - one that many progressives, at least in the United States, have been defending tooth and nail over the last 30 years - it makes anti-poverty advocates nervous. Max Sawicky, a former economist at the Economic Policy Institute, a liberal think tank in the U.S., outlined a progressive case against basic income in 2013, calling it a “distraction” from raising the minimum wage, guaranteeing full employment, rolling back Clinton-era welfare reforms and supporting unions - all policies, he argues, “more in keeping with our current system and our political culture.”
Both lovers and haters of basic income often miss an important point: We don’t have great data on how it would work or what would happen if it did. Similar policies were tested in both Canada and the U.S. in the 1960s and ’70s, but studies of their effects were either flawed or abandoned.
“To be honest, a full long-term universal basic income has never been tried, let alone rigorously evaluated,” said Michael Faye, the co-founder and executive chairman of Give Directly, a nonprofit that has pioneered direct cash transfers to the extreme poor, primarily in Kenya and Uganda.1
Earlier this month, Faye announced Give Directly’s plan to launch a large basic income pilot in Kenya, giving at least 6,000 people a guaranteed income for 10 to 15 years. They hope to find out what happens when everyone in a randomly selected place receives a guaranteed basic income for a long period - something that has never been done before.
Experiments like this are important for our understanding of how basic income would work. But the idea has always been about politics as much as economics. Until we have more evidence, the best thing basic income has going for it is its broad appeal - after all, who doesn’t like free money?
Basic income is not a single idea but a family of closely related ideas, which go by an assortment of names: universal basic income, unconditional basic income, social dividend, guaranteed annual income, citizen’s income, negative income tax, etc. But the core motivation - to address social ills by just giving people money - has a long history.
Thomas Paine, the intellectual founding father and pamphleteer, outlined a plan in his 1797 essay “Agrarian Justice” to create a national fund making payments of 15 pounds sterling to each adult over 21 years old.
In the early 20th century, socialists and labor activists took up the cause, arguing basic income could empower workers and transform economies: British philosopher Bertrand Russell backed it, along with those in the social credit movement in Britain; left-wing Louisiana Gov. Huey Long supported it while pushing to “Share the Wealth.”
But basic income never really caught on. In the U.S., the New Deal - which focused on boosting employment through public works projects, expanded workers’ rights and new forms of social assistance like Social Security - was the approach that won out instead.
In the 1960s, basic income became intertwined with the civil rights movement and the War on Poverty. Martin Luther King, Jr. was a fan. In his 1967 book “Where Do We Go From Here: Chaos or Community?” King wrote:
"I am now convinced that the simplest approach will prove to be the most effective - the solution to poverty is to abolish it directly by a now widely discussed measure: the guaranteed income.”
Around the same time, its appeal expanded rightward. Libertarian economist Milton Friedman began to advocate for a negative income tax, whereby those earning below a certain threshold would get money from the government instead of paying taxes.
At the end of the ’60s, President Richard Nixon’s plan for a partial basic income passed the House of Representatives before stalling in the Senate. No longer a proposal of bleeding-heart lefties, basic income was endorsed by a slew of notable economists (including several who went on to nab Nobel Prizes).
But by the early 1980s, enthusiasm had petered out again. Ronald Reagan and Margaret Thatcher took power in the U.S. and Britain, riding a wave of conservative backlash to expansive government programs. The tenor of debate shifted from improving the welfare state to cutting it.
Those receiving government assistance were called lazy, if not corrupt. “Welfare queen” entered the lexicon and President Bill Clinton promised to end welfare as we know it. Progressives and anti-poverty advocates went on the defensive. Basic income was tabled, if not forgotten.
In the U.S., we’re left with a patchwork benefits system, an indecipherable alphabet soup of programs: SNAP, TANF, CHIP, Section 8, EITC, WIC, SSDI. The U.S. government spends nearly $1 trillion across dozens of separate programs at the state and federal level,2 as this byzantine diagram from the House Ways and Means Committee shows. This all requires enormous administrative oversight on the part of the government, and it requires the ability to navigate multiple agencies on the part of recipients.
The problems with this system go beyond its complicated structure. Because eligibility for most social assistance is based on income (or is “means-tested”), recipients lose their benefits as they earn more income - this is often labeled the “welfare trap” or “poverty trap.” For example: A family of four can’t qualify for food stamps if it earns more than $31,536. These benefit phase-outs, or “cliffs,” essentially create steep marginal tax rates on the poor.
Even welfare advocates are critical of the incentives embedded in this system. “If you’re a dollar over, you can’t get assistance,” said Wessita McKinley, founder and director of Sistas United, a nonprofit working with individuals in poverty around the Washington, D.C., area. “Sometimes it feels like a governmental control; you’re on a leash, and you can only go so far.”
Basic income promises an escape from the welfare trap - all the benefits would be the same, regardless of circumstance. And by cutting a single check for the same amount of money, it could dramatically reduce administrative costs.
“The money we spend on welfare will be better spent - more productive for the kind of ends we want - if we spend it through a basic income,” said Matt Zwolinski, a philosophy professor at the University of San Diego and one of the most prominent libertarian advocates for basic income.
Despite squeamishness at the idea of government “handouts,” some libertarians see basic income as a more efficient replacement for current social programs, one that would streamline the welfare bureaucracy and reduce costs overall.
He also argues that basic income is superior on moral grounds. People could spend their money however they want. No longer would food stamp recipients, for example, be constrained to using their benefits to buy food, or even certain types of food.
“There is something objectionable about paternalism: treating adults as children who need to have their decisions made for them,” Zwolinski said.
A basic income could be any amount, but estimates typically begin with how much is currently spent on social assistance programs (that’s more or less how the Swiss basic income advocates arrived at 2,500 Swiss francs).
This method is practical for both quantitative and political reasons: It’s fairly simple to evaluate existing social spending and to advocate basic income as a replacement. It’s harder, amid government austerity, to argue for more generous benefits, though many supporters of basic income would like to see spending increase.
Welfare spending varies widely from country to country. In 2011, per capita public social spending in the U.S. totaled about $700 per month, according to the Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development, a group composed mostly of rich countries.
This includes some programs commonly thought of as welfare, like food stamps and housing vouchers and bigger expenses like pensions (Social Security) and health care (Medicaid and Medicare). Among 35 OECD countries, the U.S. ranks 11th in this kind of social spending.
These figures are just a floor for a basic income; other economists researching the idea envision something “high enough to ensure a material existence and participation in society,” said Valerija Korosec in an email. Korosec is a sociologist at the Institute of Macroeconomic Analysis and Development in Slovenia, and the author of the first proposal for a basic income in her country.
She suggests a target between the current poverty level and as high as 60 percent of the median income. Yes, that would require a huge increase in government revenues and thus, most likely, a big hike in tax rates to fund the redistribution as basic income.
Replacing existing benefits with a single, universal check also raises eyebrows among advocates for the poor who might otherwise be friendly to the basic income idea. “There are some benefits that could be made universal … but there are some benefits that are targeted to people in need,” said Deborah Weinstein, the executive director of the Coalition on Human Needs, a Washington, D.C.-based anti-poverty alliance. People with disabilities, for example, “have requirements that not everyone has.”
Even if you could agree on an amount, there are other economic costs. The biggest concern among critics is that with a guaranteed basic income, too many people would stop working, or would be deterred from working more than they already do. It’s not clear exactly what work effects would materialize under a basic income scheme. However, over the last 50 years there have been numerous attempts to study this question.
Between 1968 and 1980, the U.S. ran four major negative income tax experiments in which families were assigned into treatment and control groups, given cash and tracked over several years.
The experiments were located all over: in New Jersey and Pennsylvania; Iowa and North Carolina; Gary, Indiana; and, the largest, in Seattle and Denver.
The core question unanswered by either side: What is an acceptable decline in work?
Unsurprisingly, work effort did decline. Some NIT recipients cut back their hours, but the declines were modest: no more than 5 to 7 percent among primary earners, and a bit more for secondary earners.
But participants quitting altogether didn’t happen, and people who did cut back their hours used their newly available time to pursue other goals, including going to school.
“Some of the experimenters said that they were unable to find even a single instance of labor-market withdrawal,” wrote Widerquist in his 2005 paper summarizing the studies.
While the purpose of the NIT pilots was to observe changes in work effort, an unrelated phenomenon caught the eye of critics: divorce. Controversy erupted when data from the Seattle and Denver studies seemed to show an increase in the divorce rate among participants (those findings were later discovered to be the result of a statistical error).
The press spun wild stories, and the political credibility of NIT - and of basic income, for that matter - began to unravel. Sen. Harrison Williams of New Jersey threatened to prosecute families in the experiments with welfare fraud. The experiments were allowed to run their course but the divorce controversy and concerns about work disincentives effectively killed the momentum behind the program.
As time has passed, the interpretation of these experiments has become more positive. While work declined, it fell by a modest amount. That gives hope to advocates, who cite these studies as evidence that basic income can be implemented with few economic side effects. “I don’t worry as much about work disincentives as some other people,” said Zwolinski, the libertarian advocate.
The original seed planted by Friedman’s negative income tax idea eventually blossomed into the Earned Income Tax Credit, thought by both conservative and liberal economists to be one of the more effective anti-poverty programs in the U.S. because it manages to encourage work while avoiding the benefits cliff. The argument for a basic income as an anti-poverty program over something like the EITC is that it would be easier to administer.
What do we know about giving a guaranteed income to everyone? Not much. Negative income tax policies such as the EITC target specific groups, usually the poor. They have been tested. But basic income is often pitched as universal - everyone would get the same amount, regardless of their circumstances.
And that has never been examined in a rigorous way.
The closest research we have to how a universal basic income could work comes from a small town in Canada.
From 1974 to 1979, the Canadian government partnered with the province of Manitoba to run an experiment on the idea of providing a minimum income to residents.
The result was MINCOME, a guaranteed annual income offered to every eligible family in Dauphin, a prairie town of about 10,000, and smaller numbers of residents in Winnipeg and some rural communities throughout the province.3
MINCOME remains one of the most influential studies of basic income in a rich-world country.
Evelyn Forget, now an economist at the University of Manitoba, was a student in Toronto at the time. “I knew this was happening in Manitoba.
I just stopped hearing about it,” she said. When Canada’s governing party changed midway through the MINCOME experiment, funding dried up and the researchers were told to archive their data for later analysis.
No database was created, and the results of MINCOME were not examined.The closest research we have to how a universal basic income could work comes from a small town in Canada.
From 1974 to 1979, the Canadian government partnered with the province of Manitoba to run an experiment on the idea of providing a minimum income to residents. The result was MINCOME, a guaranteed annual income offered to every eligible family in Dauphin, a prairie town of about 10,000, and smaller numbers of residents in Winnipeg and some rural communities throughout the province.3 MINCOME remains one of the most influential studies of basic income in a rich-world country.
Evelyn Forget, now an economist at the University of Manitoba, was a student in Toronto at the time. “I knew this was happening in Manitoba. I just stopped hearing about it,” she said. When Canada’s governing party changed midway through the MINCOME experiment, funding dried up and the researchers were told to archive their data for later analysis. No database was created, and the results of MINCOME were not examined.
Decades later, Forget started digging for the data. She unearthed 1,800 dusty cardboard boxes - with information on each family receiving MINCOME - at Canada’s National Archives. Forget digitized the materials and matched MINCOME records with those in the database of Canada’s universal health insurance program, which was introduced around the same time.
That allowed her to compare the health of those receiving MINCOME to the health of similar people who didn’t. It resulted in a blockbuster research paper, decades in the making: “The Town With No Poverty,” published in 2011.
Families receiving MINCOME had fewer hospitalizations, accidents and injuries, Forget found. Mental health hospitalizations fell dramatically. And the high school completion rate ticked up during the years of the experiment, with 16-to-18-year-old boys, in particular, more likely to finish school. Younger adolescent girls were less likely to give birth before age 25, and when they did, they had fewer kids.
The program brought most recipients above Canada’s poverty line. And the employment effects in Dauphin were modest. “For primary earners - those with full-time jobs - there was virtually no decline” in work, Forget said. “Nobody was quitting their jobs.” Cash from the government eased families’ economic anxiety, allowing them to invest in their health and plan over a longer horizon.
MINCOME is now serving as inspiration for basic income’s comeback in Canada. The Liberal Party, which recently swept to power behind Prime Minister Justin Trudeau, is seriously flirting with the idea. There are severalpopular petitions to add it to the party’s platform, and a Liberal-dominated committee in Parliament is recommending the federal government study the idea. In its 2016 budget, the provincial government of Ontario announced plans to conduct a basic income pilot this year.
The U.S. negative income tax experiments and the Canadian MINCOME pilot, while useful, can only tell us so much about what happens when you give people free money. One reason is that they don’t meet rigorous modern standards for randomized control trials, the gold-standard of experiments. A number of basic income experiments popping up around the world are designed to get better data.
Give Directly, which is launching the basic income pilot in Kenya, has previously run RCTs to examine the effects of giving cash unconditionally; those experiments have shown that cash works wonders, and the peer-reviewed results have won over economists. The children of recipients are healthier and get more education; adults earn more income by using the cash to plan investments over a longer horizon; spending on alcohol and other vices - a worry some critics of cash grants raise - stays flat or even declines.
Give Directly’s work has gained broad acclaim as a more efficient and effective form of charity. “We have learned a lot about the positive impacts of cash transfer programs,” Faye, the group’s executive chairman, said. But taking the next step requires addressing many more questions that haven’t even begun to be answered: “Should the transfer be one-time or recurrent? How long should the transfer last? What is the right amount?”
Give Directly’s analysis of previous basic income experiments finds them coming up short. A bullet-proof experiment on basic income should be universal, randomized, long term and basic (that is, the income should be sufficient to live on). No experiment has met all four: Some are basic, but not randomized; some are randomized, but not universal; and so on.
The MINCOME pilot, for instance, was randomized and basic but lasted less than five years. The U.S. negative income tax experiments were similarly limited. Some highly touted experiments, including in Namibia and India, either weren’t randomized or didn’t provide enough income to be called basic. (Give Directly has a detailed breakdown of why every basic income experiment attempted so far has failed to be rigorous.)
With basic income’s credibility on the line, Faye worries a flimsy study could be worse than none at all. He points to the excitement over microfinance as an instance where evidence later disappointed expectations. Basic income should avoid letting anecdote get ahead of the data.
“There is no empirical evidence on whether basic income works or not,” said Markus Kanerva, the founder of Tänk, a think tank working with the Finnish government’s social security agency to design and prepare the implementation of a basic income pilot. The study has been promised 20 million euros over two years and could provide a partial basic income up to 750 euros per month to more than 1,000 Finnish citizens.
Researchers in the Netherlands have a similar aspiration to run a rigorous randomized controlled trial of basic income in municipalities around the country. Just don’t call it basic income. “For political strategy reasons, they’re staying away from the term ‘basic income,’ ” said Jurgen De Wispelaere, a research fellow at the University of Tampere in Finland, who is in contact with those running the Dutch experiments.
Instead, the pilots are billed as “trust experiments” and the basic income is often called a “citizen’s wage.” The cities of Utrecht, with a population over 300,000, and Tilburg, at over 200,000, are the largest Dutch municipalities planning to conduct an experiment. Two other major municipalities are on board but are waiting to get a green light from the minister of social affairs; and 15 smaller municipalities are hoping to get clearance, too.
It’s not just governments and charities attracted to the idea of basic income. The private sector is curious, too. Silicon Valley in particular. These enthusiasts are motivated less by an interest in improving the welfare state and more by a desire to guard against much bigger economic changes coming down the pike.
In a much-written-about 2013 paper, two Oxford economists estimated that 47 percent of all U.S. jobs were at risk of computerization. Increasingly, technologists envision basic income as a “hack,” or fix, to the system - it offers a way of coping with an economic future dominated by automation, a fallback plan for when most human labor isn’t valued or needed.
“We think there could be a possibility where 95 percent - or a vast majority- of people won’t be able to contribute to the workforce,” said Matt Krisiloff, the manager of Y Combinator’s basic income project.
“We need to start preparing for that transformation.”
Sam Altman, Y Combinator’s president, committed $10 million personally toward YC Research, out of which this experiment will be run. Plans are still in early development but the study will “most likely be a randomized control trial,” said Krisiloff. That means giving cash to randomly selected Americans, hopefully over a long period.
“To really do this well, you’d have to do it on a large swath of the nation,” Krisiloff acknowledged. The ultimate goal, he hinted, will be to inspire some local or state government to launch a basic income pilot of its own.
“Basic income is about wanting to embrace automation,” said Albert Wenger, a partner at the venture capital firm Union Square Ventures. In his forthcoming book “World After Capital,” Wenger argues scarcity has driven epoch shifts: The invention of agriculture changed the scarcity from food to land; the Enlightenment and subsequent industrial developments shifted scarcity from land to capital; but as computers and the internet have transformed us into an information society, capital is no longer scarce.
“We have enough physical capital in the world. but it’s unequally distributed,” Wenger said. The last big scarcity is attention.
“What are we actually spending our time on, both collectively and individually?”
Wenger wants less time spent on tasks that could be automated and more time spent on issues he thinks are insufficiently addressed: fighting climate change, exploring space, preventing the next global pandemic.
Like the backers of basic income in Switzerland, he thinks providing for basic needs will allow innovation to flourish.
With a basic income, he said, “you’re put in charge of your time. You’ll have 100 percent of your time available to you.”
Cameron Ottens wasn’t going to wait on some government or company to run an experiment. “There is some steam behind basic income,” he said, so he wanted to “start the ball rolling.” For some hard-core advocates, basic income is less about pure science than living a lifestyle.
Ottens is a co-founder of My Basic Income, a San Francisco-based, one-year basic income raffle.
Yes, that’s right - anyone can enter, for free, to win a basic income of $1,250 per month for a year. My Basic Income successfully raised $15,000 and plans to raffle it off at the end of April or in early May. The group plans to track the winner as a case study in what a basic income can free us up to do. The idea has already attracted interest from sweepstakes and raffle enthusiasts who may not know much about basic income but like a free shot at $15,000.
Others have crowdfunded their own basic income. About two years ago, Scott Santens, a New Orleans-based writer, discovered Patreon, a Kickstarter-like crowdfunding site with a focus on creative types.
It enables musicians, artists and niche bloggers to raise money directly from their fans. He took as his starting goal to raise enough to live on $1,000 per month; it took about a year to reach that goal, but at the end of last November he hit $12,000 and hasn’t looked back. Since then, he’s been living entirely off his personally crowdfunded basic income.
Popular interest in basic income has exploded, affording him the opportunity to fund a basic income for himself, mostly from fans of his writing - about basic income. Santens sees the rapid change happening in the world as driving this curiosity.
“We have all this technology, and it scares some people. You’re thinking, when is my job going to be eliminated?”
In this context, Santens believes basic income will be “extremely impactful.” “We’re going away from a traditional, 40-hour per week economy… there is going to be a lot more flexibility and variety in what we’re doing,” he said.
From Switzerland to the Netherlands to Kenya to Silicon Valley, a mixture of insecurity and curiosity are driving interest in basic income, but its dominant ideology - and appeal - is utopian. The core existential struggle lurking in the debates over basic income centers on what meaning work holds in our lives.
Straub, the Swiss referendum organizer, remembers his great-grandfather working 10 hours per day, six days per week. That kind of toil is no longer necessary, nor desirable. The dream of a world where we produce more than we need has come true.
Back when he was gathering signatures in 2012, he would joke about the supposedly impending Mayan apocalypse as a way to engage listeners on the core questions of basic income, questions he thinks still resonate: “Well, if the world really was going to end, how would you live this year? Why don’t you live your life like that?
“The market economy is great, but we want to substitute it with another system - take it to the next level,” he said. The big picture is about changing how we live.
“This is a paradigm shift, and we want a referendum on that paradigm shift.”
In this video chat, Andrew Flowers and Ben Casselman discuss basic income and respond to questions and comments raised by readers:
Regular readers of this website will know that the Natural Health and Supplementary Products bill (which was recently re-named the Natural Health Products bill) has been causing significant concern in organisations devoted to protecting health freedom in NZ, including the NZ Health Trust and the Health Freedom NZ Trust.
As we reported recently, a legal opinion about various aspects of the bill has been obtained. You can read more about this here.
The Supplementary Order Paper (or SOP) which is the latest version of the bill may be read by accessing the April 4th update from the Health Freedom NZ Trust here.
If you would like to sign the new petition click here.
The Natural Health Products bill and has been through two readings and its third (and final)reading could be coming up very soon.
If you would like to write to MPs, as the Health Freedom NZ Trust has recommended, a key message to include in your letter or email is that you would like the current Natural Health Products bill scrapped and replaced with the original model bill developed by David Sloan and the NZ Health Trust. This model bill had wide industry* and consumer support.
Information (including email addresses) to help you write to MPs. may be found here.
Updates on the health freedom issue are also shared through our new Facebook page.
*There is an industry group that supports the Natural Health Products bill as it currently stands (its press release may be read here), however many small businesses are very worried about the potential impact of the regulation on their businesses. Unlike the industry group which has publicly stated its support for the bill, the businesses that oppose the bill are not vocal about their concerns.
It would be fair to say that larger, well-established natural health products companies are more likely to favour the current Natural Health Products bill as it stands because the bill would confer a competitive advantage to to companies that are already in the industry and would make it harder for new companies to enter the NZ market place. Larger companies could also gain more market share if smaller companies in the natural health industry were forced out due to inability to meet new compliance costs.
A press release by Anonymous explained in the intentions behind the operation know as #OpIcarus:
"The banks have been getting away with murder, fraud, conspiracy, war profiteering, money laundering for terrorists and drug cartels, have put millions of people out on the street without food or shelter and have successfully bought all our governments to help keep us silenced.
We represent the voice of the voiceless. We are uniting to make a stand. The central banks which were attacked in recent days were attacked to remind people that the biggest threat we face to an open and free society is the banks. The bankers are the problem and #OpIcarus is the solution.”
Operation Icarus was relaunched in conjunction with a video release announcing the beginning of a “30-day campaign against central bank sites across the world.”
Since that time, the scope and magnitude of the attacks have increased exponentially, with Anonymous, Ghost Squad Hackers, a number of Sec groups and BannedOffline coordinating attacks - each focusing on separate financial institutions in an effort to maximize the number of targets hit.
Some individuals have expressed reservations about Anonymous attacking the central banking system – thinking that this will in some way impact their individual accounts held in the banks. In an exclusive interview with The Free Thought Project, an Anonymous member explained that this operation is directed solely at the 1%:
"We would just like to make it very clear that all targets of #OpIcarus have been Rothschild and BIS central owned banks. In fact most of the targets so far such as Guernsey, Cyprus, Panama, Jordan, British Virgin Isles, etc are in the top 10 places of tax havens for the elite.
No on-line consumer accounts were harmed, no ATM’s were blocked and no personal client data was leaked. This has been a protest against the Central Banks and the 1% - no innocent or poor people were harmed.”
The operation began with an initial attack on the Central Bank of Greece and was quickly followed up with a similar DDoS attack on the Central Bank of Cyprus. Last weekend, hackers reportedly targeted the Central Bank of the Dominican Republic, the Dutch Central Bank, the Central Bank of Maldives, and Guernsey Financial Services Commission, according to the official @OpIcarus Twitter account, which has been taken offline - presumably by Twitter. The National Bank of Panama and the Central Bank of Kenya were also reportedly targeted a day later, according to hacking news publication HackRead.
Additionally, reported Ghost Squad Hacker, s1ege also tweeted about taking the Central Bank of Bosnia-Herzegovina offline and provided a screenshot to verify.
The Twitter account @BannedOffline also reported the Central Bank of Mexico had succumbed to a DDoS attack by the hacking collective. The online hacktivist groups have continued to conduct a series of high-powered distributed denial-of-service (DDoS) attacks, which forced the website of Central Bank of Jordan, Central Bank of South Korea, Bank of Compagnie, Monegasque and the Central Bank of Montenegro offline.
On Saturday, hackers conducted a series of 250 Gbps DDoS attacks on the Bank of France, Central Bank of the United Arab Emirates, Central Bank of Tunisia, Central Bank of Trinidad and Tobago and Philippine National Bank. The recent attack, on Monday morning, took down the Central Bank of Iraq.
In the most high-profile hacks thus far, during OpIcarus, the U.S. Federal Reserve Bank of Boston, the Bank of England and the Bank of France all fell victim to separate cyber attacks.
In an exclusive interview with The Free Thought Project, an Anonymous representative explained:
"OpIcarus in support of Nuit Debout took the bank of France off line throughout the day as we continue to address the corruption of the banking elite.
We are acting on behalf of the countless victims and the voiceless as the banking cartels continue their agenda of buying the governments while selling out the people they are supposed to govern. This Op in no way is meant to harm or disrupt the common person and their day-to-day activities.
We are you, we may be your neighbors, those you pass in the street and we are the working class. A Filipino hacker within Anonymous was also able to disrupt services in the Philippines as an act of protest against his nation’s corrupt and brutal government.
We will not and cannot sit by idly while the banking systems strip man of his dignity.”
Anonymous has released a list of institutions the collective plans to target, which is divided into four sections; websites associated with the U.S. Federal Reserve, the International Monetary Fund (IMF), sites owned by the World Bank, and over 150 sites associated with national banks around the globe.
In two weeks, OpIcarus hackers have hit dozens of financial institutions listed in their online manifesto.
Any questions about whether the hacktivists would be able to take out some of the more high-profile institutions seem to have been answered with the recent successful attacks on the U.S. Federal Reserve Bank in Boston, the Bank of France and the Bank of England - the central banks of the U.K. and France.
The attack on the Bank of England was unique from the previous attacks, as it reportedly took down the internal email server.
"While the impact on the individual targets of the DDoS attack campaign, ‘OpIcarus’ is unclear; obstructing or eliminating the availability of email servers is significant.
In an online world any type of service outage is barely tolerated, especially in the banking industry where transactions and communications are often time-sensitive, and account security is of utmost importance.”
Make no mistake that this operation has already been extremely effective - evolving and growing rapidly. In the world of high finance time is money, and every minute that a bank is forced offline it is losing potential revenue, which in turn hurts the bottom line of those that support the imperial war machine.
Thus far, all targeted banks have refused to comment on the damage inflicted by the continuous cyber attacks.
13-Year-Old Invents Tesla Inspired Free Energy Device For Under $15 May 21 2016 | From: WakingTimes
Inspired by the geniuses Nikola Tesla and Albert Einstein, teenager Max Loughan loves to invent things, in fact, he says he has known his entire short life that his purpose was to change the world with his inventions. And he may just do it.
Wearing a lab coat while speaking in a televised interview with KTVN Channel 2 in Reno and Tahoe, Nevada, Max explains the free energy device that he made in his parents’ boiler room turned laboratory.
His invention looks somewhat reminiscent of Tesla coil, and operates on some of the same principles described by the electric visionary. The device is rather simple, harvesting electromagnetic energy from the atmosphere, then converting it to direct current which can be used to power electrical devices.
What’s even more incredible is that Max built his free energy device out of materials he purchased for less than $15. That’s right, for the price of an average lunch, it appears that anyone can have access to free energy.
"He created an electro magnetic harvester out of a coffee can, some wire, two coils, and a spoon.”
In a demonstration with KTVN, Max uses current created by the machine to power a strip of LED lights that he had wrapped around his twin brother, astonishing to both his own family and the visiting news crew.
The harvester conducts radio waves, thermal, and static energy, and turns it into electricity.
Max’s achievement is impressive, to say the least, and the fact that works of Nikola Tesla are now inspiring the next generation of inventors is quite inspiring, although one has to wonder why Tesla’s ideas have taken some 75 years to reach the mainstream.
The big message here again, though, is that free energy technologies are real, so why is the world still dependent on fossil fuels and extraction based methods of energy production that are destroying our planet? Why can’t we have clean running automobiles that are powered with ambient energy and produce zero emissions?
The suppression of free energy devices and technology by the energy industry and by the government is an established fact of our world. Using many techniques and programs to suppress ideas and inventions like Max’s is finally coming to an end, however, in the information age. Now anyone can participate in the energy revolution.
“My true goal is to help. It is to invent a future where people can be happy, where they can be safe and sound.”
– Max Loughan
Check out Max’s interview with KTVN here, and please share this inspiring story far and wide to help break the silence on the possibility of clean and free energy. Our future depends on it.
8 Signs The World Is Undergoing A Paradigm Shift May 20 2016 | From: WakeUpWorld
Browsing through history, it’s very clear that the world has undergone many monumental shifts that have uprooted our society’s very foundation in place of new seed.
Though it might appear the opposite in the corporate controlled mainstream news, it appears that the entire world is in the very early stages of a paradigm shift.
A paradigm shift is a fundamental change in approach or underlying assumptions. For example, when Pythagoras proposed that the Earth was round instead of flat, the foundation of science and people’s understanding of the world was completely changed.
Similarly, when the Industrial Revolution took place there was a complete shift in manufacturing, lifestyle, and economics. A paradigm shift can literally shake a society to its core, taking it off its current path and putting it on a brand new one. These shifts take place in many of the world’s most basic elements and redefine how life functions.
Here are 8 signs the world is currently undergoing a Paradigm Shift:
1. The Power of the Internet and the Age of Information
The Internet is arguably the greatest invention in the history of man. Never in our known history has man had access to such a broad range of diverse information from all over the world at the tips of his fingers. Many forget that the Internet has only really been commercialized in the west since the early 1990’s and its spread across the world hasn’t even come close to peaking yet.
The Internet is undoubtedly giving rise to the Age of Information as people become more awake to what’s really going on in the world. A multitude of information is now accessible if one knows where to look. People can now learn new skills or hear different versions of the truth in mere minutes.
The Internet is not only giving rise to an open access of information, but communication is almost instantaneous all over the world. It is paramount that the Internet remain an open decentralized system in which everyone can freely add and operate if this paradigm shift is to continue. It feeds almost all other shifts.
2. The Ascent Of the Independent Non-Corporate Online Media
Thanks solely to the Internet, the rise in independent journalism has taken off. Alternative media has become an increasingly popular choice for those wishing to stay truly informed, especially younger generations. People are continually switching off cable news (cable TV all together), and instead resorting to online sources.
While mainstream news is still the number one source of current world events for the masses, the tide is slowly changing as people are awakening to the fact that corporate sponsored media is mostly propaganda and half-truths.
War is becoming much harder to justify as independent journalists have shined the light on what the powers that be never wanted anyone to see. A prime example is the conflict in Syria in which the establishment, despite the lack of popular support, so desperately wanted to start a war that when the rebels they were funding used chemical weapons, it was then blamed on the Assad government to protect their investment and design.
This new faction of journalism will give peace a legitimate chance as all dirty laundry is now being aired and corrupt alliances exposed. This in turn has allowed many people to deprogram from the countless media they have taken in over the years and see the world through a clearer lens in which the truth is more evident.
3. A Global Monetary Reshuffling
Though it will never be broadcast on mainstream news, the real threat of a U.S. dollar collapse as the world reserve currency is very real. The paradigm of central bank controlled economies that can issue credit and zero percent interest rates through nearly unlimited printing of money backed by nothing is an illusion that is beginning to break down.
It’s not just the U.S. dollar that’s under threat, but many other central currencies such as the Euro and Yen. Massive equity bubbles are being blown up by this cheap credit along with massive debt that will be nearly impossible to pay back with the current economies in which only the very elite benefit.
Many countries are waking up to the fact that, like all other bubbles, these bubbles will burst and they are beginning to break away from the dollar.
Not only has there been a shift in the pecking order of fiat paper currencies, but decentralized crypto-currencies like Bitcoin are threatening the very system of fiat money and the centralized control a select few elite have on that system through central banks. This would shift power worldwide.
4. The Rise of the Peer-to-Peer Economy
A Peer-to-Peer (P20) Economy is a de-centralized model whereby two individuals interact to buy or sell goods and services directly with each other, without intermediation by a third-party, or without the use of a company or business. We see this being used by companies like Air BnB, Uber, Craigslist, Sidecar, and Dogvacay among others.
Often referred to as a sharing economy, there is no centralized control of power, allowing people to more directly profit of their goods/services rather than pay unnecessary middlemen along the way.
This is a trend that is sure to grow as technology makes it easier for people to make it on their own and allows for people to own their means of production and finished goods, instead of just being paid in the production process. The peer-to-peer economy is also possible through the abundance of goods already out there, allowing for goods to be shared and recycled rather than thrown away and reproduced.
Not only is the peer-to-peer economy growing, but many young people are ditching the career 9-5 jobs and branching off into independent careers or job hopping. The top down business model in economics has now found a legitimate system in which a decentralized bottom up approach gives the power back to the people.
5. The Shift Towards Renewable Energy
The shift towards renewable energy is a forgone conclusion as renewable energy is the way of the future. In fact, the shift looks to be happening faster than people realize. According to the Global Energy Initiative, “Numerous scenarios projected levels of renewable energy for 2020 that already were surpassed by 2010.”
The IEA states that, “In 2012, the world relied on renewable sources for around 13.2% of its total primary energy supply, and in 2013 renewables accounted for almost 22% of global electricity generation.” With increased technological capabilities along with ever-growing concern over the state of the environment, the world is beginning to not only shift towards renewables, but the power over energy supplies and grids is decentralizing.
"In more than 60 countries around the world, including Australia, Japan, and all of the countries in the European Union, there are significant restrictions or outright bans on the production and sale of GMOs.”
The rise is so strong that according to the Organic Trade Association, “Supply shortages [of organics] are one of the greatest challenges facing the industry today. Despite continued growth in production, handlers are not able to keep up with demand.”
Thanks in large part to the Internet and non-corporate sponsored research, people are beginning to understand the importance behind knowing exactly what’s in the food one consumes and how it directly correlates to health. This has put mounting pressure on food businesses to adapt.
The signs are already evident as Chipotle sees their profits increase while operating completely Non-GMO, while sales giants such as McDonalds see profits continue to decrease amidst health concerns over their food. Many are beginning to truly care what goes into their body and the rise of localized non-organic food in this country is a direct result of this health-conscious shift.
7. The Understanding Of a World of Abundance
As Gandhi famously said;
"The world has enough for every man’s needs, but not for every man’s greed.”
People are finally awaking to the fact that there is enough to go around, just not with the current systems in place. No one is saying there is enough for everyone to live at current western consumption rates, however with adoption of renewable energy, new forms of decentralized government and economics, and the increase in the usage of technological capabilities, there is more than enough for everyone in the world to live happily.
For example, the world produces enough food for 10 billion people, yet many go starving as a result of faulty systems of distribution. Another example is water; there is more than enough water on the planet, but it’s the economic systems that get in the way of technology.
The notion of scarcity has long haunted the systems of government and economics, but now a new paradigm of abundance is beginning to take root in the minds of people. The Venus project is a prime example of an alternative resource based economy in which sustainability and resource supply are taken into account.
A world of abundance with zero emission is no longer just a pipe dream, but could very well become a reality as people think in terms of abundance.
8. The Global Consciousness Shift
Finally a consciousness shift is underway in which people are starting to see themselves as more than just individual people operating in an isolated bubble, but instead as a connected piece in the collective consciousness of planet Earth.
The Internet, along with the increased capacity for travel, has allowed people from all over the world to connect. So many parts of the global society have become interconnected and people are beginning to take notice of not only their own country, but countries abroad.
Many are beginning to realize that one group of people suffering means everyone is suffering. This interconnection to everything has given rise to practices such as meditation, yoga, and travel, as well as the continued global acceptance towards mind altering organic substances like marijuana and mushrooms.
People are beginning to emotionally connect to life all over the world and not just their immediate home and surroundings. This new reality is showing people that there is more to life than money, as connection to all living things is equally, if not of more, valuable.
As one can see, the world is very much in the early stages of a shift in consciousness and design. These shifts are leading to a growing decentralization movement in which the power controls of society are taken from the few and given to the many. Obviously, there is a very strong force at play that is fighting against this paradigm shift.
This force is fighting for centralization of power in almost all facets of life. There can be no doubt of the presence of this resistance when one examines the ever increasing wealth and power gap that is out of control in this country. The actions taken by these elite organizations are getting more radical and desperate by the day.
With all that being said, the global paradigm shift has one advantage that I believe will be the game changer, and that’s the will of the people. This is not just the people of a a single country, but internationally, as united global movements such as Occupy Wall street, the Arab Spring, and March Against Monsanto are happening simultaneously all over the world around central causes.
So wake-up and participate, for we are in the early stages of a revolutionary paradigm shift in the consciousness of the masses that can truly change society for the better.
In a recent interview to the Columbia Journalism Review, former NS contractor, Edward Snowden spoke of the extent to which journalism has shifted from its main focus.
He said that the media is the strongest now, more than ever before, since its existence but now is the time it is the farthest from its goal of serving the people. The relationship between the media and the masses has undergone a lot of change and the media’s ‘capitalistic greed’ is to be blamed for it.
The aim is to keep the news flow going and staying ahead of competitors by reporting first, rather than reporting the accurate or the important. He says;
"When the reporting of facts takes a back seat, the media isn’t doing its only job.”
Instead of breaking a good story, competitors write against a story that has been started by a media house. He spoke of the recent case of the Drone Papers in this regard and pointed at the New York Times as the biggest offender. He said;
"You don’t take your child into the dentist thinking it will be the last time you see them alive. You should feel comfortable and safe at the doctor or dentist office – never scared for your child’s life."
“The Intercept recently published The Drone Papers, which was an extraordinary act of public service on the part of a whistleblower within the government to get the public information that’s absolutely vital about things that we should have known more than a decade ago… But the majors – specifically The New York Times – don’t actually run the story, they ignore it completely.”
According to Snowden, the media has now drifted far away from its purpose of pointing out what is contrary to the public good to becoming a tool of strengthening the elite and supporting the government.
Speaking about the major news outlets in countries like the US, Snowden said; ‘If the government said, “Look, this is secret for a reason, this is classified for a reason,” journalists would leave it at that’. However, he also believes that with so many technological tools at hand, now is the best time to revolt against such monopoly.
He says the media could be the strongest check on the hegemony moves of a government or its biggest weapon. Reports of incidents such as the NSA’s blanket spying program called PRISM could deal severe blows to the government.
Snowden explains that these changes in the media’s role became more vivid particularly after the 9/11 attacks when the social media emerged as a more powerful form of reporting. However, he warns saying that these trends just hand over more power to new media ‘malicious actors’ to gain control of the ‘media narrative’ in novel ways.
The trouble with these media outlets is, whoever has the loudest voice always wins – irrespective of the accuracy of their statements. He explains saying;
"The director of the FBI can make a false statement or some kind of misleading claim in congressional testimony. I can fact-check and I can say this is inaccurate. Unless some entity with a larger audience, for example, an established institution of journalism, sees that themselves, the value of these sorts of statements is still fairly minimal.”
So what difference did the NSA leaks bring about really? Snowden says it covered the distance between allegation and fact. He says:
"What happened in 2013 is we transformed the public debate from allegation to fact. The distance between allegation and fact, at times, makes all the difference in the world’. "
It did create an impact on the government by making it believe that more transparency could be demanded from it. Staying in exile in Russia, Snowden feels whistle blowing should be the purpose of the media but more important is that people realise they have the right to know what their government is doing.
Dental, Medical And Climate Lies May 19 2016 | From: DrSircus
Anyone alive today that believes we are living in a world of truth, justice and love needs to have their heads examined. We live in a world of lies and half-truths, which are really the same or worse than outright lies, because they confuse the human mind so much.
Selected not elected
As such rare to non-existent are the politicians who do not lie because they have to swim in a sea of lies to get anywhere in politics.
Lies cause unmeasurable amounts of human suffering and lead people to early graves. Too often the lies are hidden from view from the vast majority because there are plenty of people in power who know exactly how to deceive the public through manipulation of their collective imaginations.
The public media of course is the carrier wave of this manipulation but it is possible to see through the smoke and mirrors if one invests the energy to do so.
It is impossible to break through to a person who has swallowed the manipulations when they are widely shared, because these kinds of people feel comfortable and surrounded by others who feel the same. Even in cases where individuals have been abducted by extreme groups and have to be kidnapped back by parents, when possible, the reprogramming can be more than difficult. We humans cling to our beliefs no matter what they are.
Big Lies in Dentistry
Wrong beliefs kill yet even professionals cling, even when children die for them. For a first example, let us turn to the world of dentistry. I have written before about one of the biggest lies that they entertain that effect the broad public in the countries that put fluoride into the public water systems.
It is a broad lie shared by doctors that poisons are good for us. That poison is safe when actually very dangerous, especially to the children who are more sensitive than adults are.
Personally I have always liked and trusted all the dentists I have had, even my uncle who started putting in tons of mercury into my mouth starting at age five.
Daisy Lynn Torres was taken to Austin Children’s Dentistry in North Austin for the "routine" dental procedure, but halfway through the treatment she died. The mother said';
"You don’t take your child into the dentist thinking it will be the last time you see them alive. You should feel comfortable and safe at the doctor or dentist office – never scared for your child’s life."
One has to read the news article and read into it to see the deception. There are two glaring ones. First is that anesthesia is safe when it is extremely dangerous. Moreover, the second is the lack of mention that sugar consumption is the cause of most cavities in children. White sugar is a poison that causes a host of health problems but the first of them shows up in the teeth.
We should pay attention to what the mother said at the end of the news report. She said, “You should feel comfortable and safe at the doctor or dentist office – never scared for your child’s life.”
This exposes a broad manipulation in our civilization for the opposite is true. We should always be uncomfortable and always scared for our children’s lives when we take them to a doctor or dentist’s office.
Big Lies in Medicine
Doctors kill and maim many more people than dentists do. The biggest lie that I have written about is that vaccines are safe. When a parent takes their child to a pediatrician’s office (to a professional terrorist), they are playing Russian roulette with their child’s life.
My first published book was originally titled Cry of the Heart but I eventually changed that to the Terror of Pediatric Medicine, which I still give away freely. We just recently saw that the CDC has been caught red handed lying about the link between vaccines and autism.
They know to put gas into the gas tank and oil and water where they belong where doctors are working over quicksand meaning they have no idea of the basic causes of disease (like nutritional deficiencies in basic minerals) and as such they do nothing to address these fundamental issues.
Just one example to mention in this regard is that surgery is safer when doctors administer magnesium before, during and after surgical events. Do doctors administer magnesium? Hell no, they are too caught up in their own lies because their imaginations have been manipulated too.
“It will feel more like February in places such as New York City, Syracuse and Buffalo, New York; Boston; Burlington, Vermont; and Portland, Maine,” says accuweather.com at the beginning of April.
The cold is expected to linger at least through mid-month, giving us temperatures more like single digit highs anywhere between 2, 3 °C (35.6, 37.4 °F) when we’d normally be seeing daytime highs of around 10 °C (50 °F).” Sounds like NOOA and NASA reports of record heat are going out the window.
Global warming mongrels have a serious mental disease that is characterized by deliberately forgetting the most important aspect of all life on earth as well as its weather and that is the existence of the sun, whose output is in a cyclic decline for the next few decades. They are sick just like the vaccinationists who just happen to forget that there are dangerous poisons the pharmaceutical companies put into the vaccines.
Time Magazine and the Guardian both have recently published hysterical articles about the deadly serious threat of sea level rising because of ice melting in Antarctica.
Unfortunately, for these dishonest media organizations that fact is that Antarctica is gaining not losing ice. According to NASA the Antarctic ice sheet showed a net gain of 112 billion tons of ice a year from 1992 to 2001. That net gain slowed to 82 billion tons of ice per year between 2003 and 2008.
In addition, another reminder of how warm it isn’t. A 142-year monthly April record shattered in Concord, New Hampshire. Not just for the day, but for the entire month of April. The temperature on Tuesday morning dipped to a bone-chilling 4 degrees Fahrenheit (-15.6 C).
It has been a brutal spring in both the United States and Russia with hard freezes, record low temperatures, and heavy snowfalls. Farmers are losing crops but our favorite politicians and governmental organizations will not stop getting on the horn about how warm it is.
Governments are suiciding the trust people have in them, democracy is becoming a cruel joke in Japan, the United States and Europe. Moreover, the media is showing how dishonest it is and how ready it is to prostitute itself to commercial and government interests.
Furthermore, with the financial and economic lies compounding everyone’s problems we are in for a rough ride. Bill Bonner writes;
"We live in a world of sin and sorrow, infected by a fraudulent democracy, Facebook, and a corrupt money system. Wheezing, weak, and weary from the exertion of trying to appear “normal,” the economy staggers on.”
Undeniable Evidence From Numerous Studies Proves That Fluoride Causes Cancer May 19 2016 | From: NaturalNews
The California Environmental Protection Agency's Office of Environmental Health Hazard Assessment (OEHHA) recently released a document called Evidence on the Carcinogenicity of Fluoride and Its Salts that highlights the many health hazards caused by the consumption of fluoride.
And the Fluoride Action Network (FAN) recently submitted a compilation of its own to OEHHA, which is so
FAN has been working for many years to raise awareness about the toxicity of fluoride, with the eventual goal of getting it removed from public water supplies. And its most recent efforts involving OEHHA could be the straw that breaks the camel's back, so to speak, as it has the potential to unleash the truth about fluoride on a massive scale, and spark a revolt against its use.
According to a recent FAN press release, OEHHA's report was birthed out of an inquiry into the science of fluoride's toxicity. It is also a prelude to the group's scientific advisory board Carcinogen Identification Committee (CIC) meeting to be held on October 12 - 13, 2011, which will make a decision on the status of fluoride as a carcinogen.
The OEHHA report already states that:
"Multiple lines of evidence (show) that fluoride is incorporated into bones where it can stimulate cell division of osteoblasts [bone-forming cells]," an admission that already recognizes fluoride as a cause of bone cancer.
The report goes on to state that fluoride induces:
"Genetic changes other cellular changes leading to malignant transformation, and cellular immune response thereby increasing the risk of development of osteosarcomas."
To add to this, FAN presented OEHHA with additional studies from the National Research Council (NRC), the National Toxicology Program (NTP), and several esteemed universities that all illustrate a link between fluoride consumption and various cancers, including liver and oral cancers, and thyroid follicular cell tumors.
With this mountain of evidence, the only logical conclusion OEHHA can come to in October is that fluoride is a toxic poison -- and just like lead and other known toxic chemicals already are in California, worthy of being publicly identified as dangerous.
"While we understand that there will be tremendous pressure put on the CIC and OEHHA by the proponents of fluoride and fluoridation, we ask that the Committee continue to rely on its high level of scientific knowledge and integrity when deliberating and reaching a final conclusion on the carcinogenicity status of fluoride and its salts," wrote FAN as part of its official submission.
To read the entire FAN press release, which contains further details about the cancer studies included, visit:
More than 30 million of us take antidepressants, including one in seven women (one in four women of reproductive age). Millions more are tempted to try them to end chronic, unyielding distress, irritability, and emotional “offness”—trapped by an exhausting inner agitation they can’t shake.
It is time, even according to leaders in the field, to let go of this false narrative and take a fresh look at where science is leading us. The human body interacts in its environment with deep intelligence. Your body creates symptoms for a reason.
Depression is often a manifestation of irregularities in the body that often starts far away from the brain and is not associated with so-called “chemical imbalances.”
The medical literature has emphasized the role of inflammation in mental illness for more than twenty years (unfortunately, it takes an average of 17 years for the data that exposes inefficacy and/or a signal of harm, to trickle down into your doctor’s daily routine; a time lag problem that makes medicine’s standard of care “evidence-based” only in theory and not practice).
In other words, the serotonin theory of depression is a total myth that has been unjustly supported by the manipulation of data.
Much to the contrary, high serotonin levels have been linked to a range of problems, including schizophrenia and autism. So if you think a chemical pill can save, cure, or “correct” you, you’re dead wrong. That is about as misguided as putting a bandage over a nail stuck in your foot and taking aspirin. It’s absolutely missing an opportunity to “remove the splinter” and resolve the problem from the source.
2. Antidepressants Have the Potential to Irreversibly Disable the Body’s Natural Healing Mechanisms
Despite what you’ve been led to believe, antidepressants have repeatedly been shown in long-term scientific studies to worsen the course of mental illness - to say nothing of the risks of liver damage, bleeding, weight gain, sexual dysfunction, and reduced cognitive function they entail.
The dirtiest little secret of all is the fact that antidepressants are among the most difficult drugs to taper from, more so than alcohol and opiates. While you might call it “going through withdrawal,” we medical professionals have been instructed to call it “discontinuation syndrome,” which can be characterized by fiercely debilitating physical and psychological reactions.
Moreover, antidepressants have a well-established history of causing violent side effects, including suicide and homicide. In fact, five of the top 10 most violence-inducing drugs have been found to be antidepressants.
And what about a genetic vulnerability? Is there such thing as a depression gene? In 2003, a study published in Science suggested that those with genetic variation in their serotonin transporter were three times more likely to be depressed.
But six years later this idea was wiped out by a meta-analysis of 14,000 patients published in the Journal of the American Medical Association that denied such an association.
4. Most Prescriptions for Antidepressants are Doled Out by Family Doctors - Not Psychiatrists
What’s more, when the Department of Mental Health at Johns Hopkins Bloomberg School of Public Health did its own examination into the prevalence of mental disorders, it found that most people who take antidepressants never meet the medical criteria for a bona fide diagnosis of major depression, and many who are given antidepressants for things like OCD, panic disorder, social phobia, and anxiety also don’t qualify as actually having these conditions.
5. Many Physical Conditions Mimic Psychiatric Symptoms
We think (because our doctors think) that we need to “cure” the brain, but in reality we need to look at the whole body’s ecosystem: intestinal health, hormonal interactions, the immune system and autoimmune disorders, blood sugar balance, and toxicant exposure.
6. Basic Lifestyle Interventions Can Facilitate the Body’s Powerful Self-Healing Mechanisms to End Depression
Dietary modifications (more healthy fats and less sugar, dairy, and gluten); natural supplements like B vitamins and probiotics that don’t require a prescription and can even be delivered through certain foods; minimizing exposures to biology-disrupting toxicants like fluoride in tap water, chemicals in common drugs like Tylenol and statins, and fragrances in cosmetics; harnessing the power of sufficient sleep and physical movement; and behavioral techniques aimed at promoting the relaxation response.
7. Depression is a Message and an Opportunity
It’s a sign for us to stop and figure out what’s causing our imbalance rather than just masking, suppressing, or rerouting the symptoms. It’s a chance to choose a new story, to engage in radical transformation, to say yes to a different life experience.
Kelly Brogan, MD, is a Manhattan-based holistic women’s health psychiatrist, author of the book, A Mind of Your Own, and co-editor of the landmark textbook, Integrative Therapies for Depression.
She completed her psychiatric training and fellowship at NYU Medical Center after graduating from Cornell University Medical College, and has a B.S. from MIT in Systems Neuroscience. She is board certified in psychiatry, psychosomatic medicine, and integrative holistic medicine, and is specialized in a root-cause resolution approach to psychiatric syndromes and symptoms. She is a mother of two.
Many feel that the American government has for years, overstepped its democratic mandate to secure Americans. It has perpetuated crimes that are purported to be focusing on securing the safety of the citizens.
In his opinion piece, John W Whitehead has suggested that the American government has for years broken all laws of civility for its own narrow ends. It does this by brainwashing Americans and making them feel that the moves of the government are aimed at enhancing the quality of life of Americans.
Comment: It is important to clarify that this is not a sleight on the American people, but rather on the Khazarian Nazi-Zionists that had taken over that country. Note: Had.
According to the author, the government has a spin operation in place that camouflages the ulterior motives of the government and presents them as legitimate actions of a government which is enthusiastic about the interests of the people.
The author says that the government considers the citizen as cannon fodder and is not worried that its actions could cause untold misery among people. The recent war propaganda, the enhanced security measures that followed and coordinated measures that stifled the freedom of expression of Americans were all aimed at furthering the interest of the government, he claims.
"There is no way the government had our best interests at heart when it passed laws subjecting us to all manner of invasive searches and surveillance, censoring our speech and stifling our expression, rendering us anti-government extremists for daring to disagree with its dictates, locking us up for criticizing government policies on social media, encouraging Americans to spy and snitch on their fellow citizens, and allowing government agents to grope, strip, search, taser, shoot and kill us.”
The author also goes on to make serious allegations that successive governments in the US have been conducting secret experiments that have subjected US citizens to miseries that are at par with cruelties inflicted on people in Hitler’s camps.
For example, in Alabama, about 600 black people were subjected to syphilis and in California; older prisoners were also subjected to crimes in the name of medical testing aimed at enhancing security or preventing biological attacks.
These tests increased even as pharmaceutical companies made profits, which points to a commercial angle to the whole story. At least half the states in the nation used prisoners for probing medical conditions.
While some may dismiss these reports as propaganda, there are many analysts who continue to prove that the government has been imposing blocks on privacy and curbs on freedom in the modern world.
While some might argue that even if these acts were confirmed, they were conducted by old US governments and not the new US governments. However, the author claims that there are reports that the government is checking new countries where it can test medicines and drugs on people.
The author concludes that while it is shameful that the government, which has ascended to power on the virtues of democracy is doing such nefarious activities, it is even more disdainful that the people are believing the US government and expecting it to live up to its false promises.
"In other words, we are citizens of a government that has dehumanized us and reduced us to little more than faceless numbers, statistics and economic units…
What’s in it for the government? Money and power. Or as John Lennon summed it up, “I think we’re being run by maniacs for maniacal ends and I think I’m liable to be put away as insane for expressing that.”
Khazarian Crime Syndicate: The Rotten Society We Live In May 17 2016 | From: FinalWakeUpCall
An Evaluation of Crimes Against Humanity:
Jacob Rothschild lounging with David Rockefeller. Sorry to fuck up your shit boys.
Most of the Khazarian committed crimes over the last centuries are ingrained in humanity and are seen as business as usual. These crimes are so unbelievable deceitful and corrupt why they require additional explanation in waking up everyone, because we all are victim of this grand scale fraud on a daily basis.
Frauds that have been set in motion so long ago that nobody even recognise these as crime.
The real power in the world is not the elected government that is employed by the people to serve the people, but it is the Illuminati controlled banking world that manipulates every one of us. Politicians supported by party funds, big business contributions, campaign funds, etc. are owned and controlled by these criminals.
They are hired and brainwashed being motivated to support new rules of law that facilitate the Khazarians to penetrate their network into society even deeper, and secure continuation of their fraud.
Their fake money represents priority; keeping revenue short ensures laws are ‘revised’ and the money from the middle class flows to the rich.
Contrary real money has to have value of itself, as it is used as exchange for other things of value. This kind of money cannot be manipulated.
Inconceivable quantity of fraud has engulfed the world over the last hundreds of years, enacted in particular through the criminal banks and governmental services corporations, with extended tentacles to the farthest reaches of the globe.
This vast criminality cannot be defeated by the efforts of one or even thirty nations, as these crimes have been replicated in almost all countries throughout the world with the same results, those must be addressed as a global issue and resolved in favour of the people, because the people have not authorised nor benefited from these criminal activities caused by the Central Banksters and their corporate affiliates.
All people have been victimised along with the rest of the world, by the wrong doings and fiduciary trust fraud on an inconceivable scale.
The people of the western world, Japan and Australia have been all but destroyed by the British Controlled Federal United States and their endless warmongering and deceitful deliberate money value manipulations through inflation.
Over the last one hundred years alone the US dollar, and mutatis mutandis all other major paper currencies have been devalued by over 98%, as direct result of reckless, criminal, unlawful and fiduciary trust fraud on the part of central banksters and their banking cartels.
In order to grasp the enormity of the perpetuated crime and fraud upon all of us, it is important to know that most of it is accomplished through the corporate banks and government services corporations, presented as legalised banking institutions and the so called ‘elected governments’ that instead of serving the people, are simply hired contractors of the British Crown in the City of London.
All these corporations are owned by foreign “Bloodline” families. They are private corporation, most of them franchisees of the privately owned Bank of London located in the City of London, a private Khazarian Mafia nation-state with its own ambassadors and police. The City of London is not part of the UK and doesn’t pay taxes.
The Rothschild Banking family used covert maleficent operations to extract illegally enormous amounts of money with which they bought the UK. They expanded their private central banking kingdom, and became the functional head of the Khazarian Mafia, the World’s leading Organised Crime Syndicate.
It is known that the RKM private central banking system is international, and functions like an octopus with many tentacles.
The only reason people pay taxes is because the RKM Banksters have transformed each country into their own police state with their “owned” judicial system, and their ability to use their unbridled power of the boot in your face and threatened imprisonment to force compliance.
It is of the highest priority to rooting out these criminals and imposters responsible for all of today’s misère the world is in. These banks and governments are all foreign Khazarian controlled corporations, contractors, and agencies that are responsible for the mismanagement of the greatest part of the world.
Royalty is Involved:
Her Royal Majesty Elizabeth II and her predecessors with the Lords of the Admiralty, the Lord Mayor of London, and their predecessors have betrayed their Sacred Trust and have been in breach of trust with respect to the corporate Nations Trust for at least over the last 150 years.
Sorry if this bursts anyone's bubble but the supposedly lovely, harmless, perfunctual old woman is in actual fact a viscious bitch that finds it most pleasing that everyone loves her; despite the fact she and her duplicitous, inbred family of criminals have been fucking you over for as long as they have been around. It's an illuminati-type thing that will not make any sense to most, but hey that's what these hapless charlatans do. Not to mention the most hideous posit that they do indeed want 90% of you dead. These people are not "elite" - they are nothing more than common psychopathic criminals.
Comment: The Rothschilds sit above the Windsors in the scheme of things. Matters are becoming unstuck. And oh, how unbecoming. It has come to our attention that a leading member of the Rothschild family noted that it seemed a shame that the family had put so much effort into forming a world only to destroy it. Interesting. Not all is in alignment.
And as all western nations are involved in this same fraud scheme, this demonstrates the international conspiracy to control and defraud entire nations.
Insomuch the Holy See has declared and strived to build a Global Estate Trust on the Convocation of 1537 that includes all nations within that trust and endeavour to establish Global Jurisdiction and common government services for all nations, with other words the New World order.
In fact, this obliges the Holy See to obtain a peaceful resolution and enforce the return of people’s property assets. If the Holy See doesn’t correct and stop this systematic fraud against humanity the Global Estate Trust will also stand in breach of trust.
Actually the Holy See and the Vatican have been instrumental in converting all national governments on the planet into national corporations deceitfully with the same name in capital letters, operating in the international jurisdiction of the sea and the Roman Curia that made all those fraudulent manipulations a legal fiction.
It now is the unique responsibility of the Holy See and Pope Francis to correct this breach of trust and the mismanagement of the corporate nations, as they in the first place are responsible for their creation.
The private Federal Reserve bank, the United States Inc. the United Nations Inc. and their agents and contractors have acted as criminals and these companies should be liquidated with their offending subcontractors and agencies. Because these enterprises have never been authorised by the people to offer us credit or using our assets or private estates for the security of debts of any governmental services corporation whatsoever.
They pretend that we the living people are responsible for paying of their debts as they made us deceptively corporations named trust, with the same name in capital letters, to be plundered by the banking cartels, when in fact those that created all this are responsible.
They are merely using deceptively similar names and exercising what appears to be public office for their private benefit.
The Federal Reserve and central banks are running the bankrupt incorporated nations as a bankrupt pass-through to purposefully advance vast sums of credit based on people’s assets and their respective earthly nation, and use this fraud scheme in exchange for establishing unseen bonds against us the people, while our property and assets serve as security as part of the overall fraud designed to entrap people’s assets and credit for the benefit of the criminals.
They made the fraud scheme complex and long term, hidden by deceptive covers of sham to create lucrative fraud schemes, carried out over decades and even centuries on a mindboggling scale.
The Federal Reserve and central banks unlawfully converted private accounts of millions of people into corporate accounts, technically belonging to corporate contractors simply named after living people, to facilitate the seizure of these accounts that banks unlawfully convert into accounts belonging to the central banks without disclosure, and eventually being converted into ownership of the IMF, all executed without people’s knowledge or consent.
Fortunately, the Germans are beginning to understand that their country is not sovereign as it should be, but a corporate vassal state of Washington DC, and that their chancellor Angela Merkel serves those crooks and their financial interests, and not the interests of the Germans.
The Holy See:
The abuses of the corporations continue and have reached legendary proportions while still there is no comprehensive statement from the Holy See revealing the fictitious nature of these entities that have been spawned under its auspices and without public denunciation of criminality, and there is no visible undertaking to punish, regulate, or liquidate them.
The Holy See officially has been informed for about a decade of the illegal and immoral actions against humanity and against humanity’s lawful government, which has been on going since the 1800’s, as all these acts have been accomplished by fraud and deceit.
All these illegally established corporations must be liquidated without harming the millions of innocents who have been misrepresented and mischaracterised by them as willing contractors. Unfortunately, many people still don’t have a clue what has been done in their names and assets, and never have had the opportunity to respond.
It is at the Pope’s discretion that these evil men continue their actions unopposed and each day drag more innocent people into the web as accomplices-after-the-fact and still many others fall victim to this system of lies.
As a matter of fact the bank also unlawfully has converted your “mortgage” and mortgage contract into “negotiable instruments” showing your signature. You may have noticed that nobody representing the bank ever signed any of this type of paperwork. The only signatures appearing are yours.
The first thing the bank does beyond stealing your mortgage contract, is qualifying it to be a ‘Promissory Note’, underconditions of deceit and non-disclosure in order to create a conduit loan – not a home loan – between you and unknown investors, usually money markets or institutional investors, and then they place you in default by never transferring “your” mortgage into a Real estate mortgage investment conduit, called REMIC.
This negligence on their part means that “you” are always in default from the moment the paperwork is signed no matter what you do or how much you pay or how timely you are about paying.
It also means that they aren’t providing you with a “home loan”, but they also are cheating the institutional investors. The banks play both ends of the loan game. They are cheating you and are cheating the investors and they get away with this because politicians are stupid, corrupt, and most of the time bought.
Corrupt politicians and “governmental services corporations” run by banks have sold us out. The bankers make money at our expense. They steal people blind, and enslave them for their profit, and invent legitimacy by buying the judges. So it is time to permanently shut down these banks.
Did You Know?
Did you know that your national identity theft has occurred?
Did you know that all the mortgages already have been paid off, but these bankster crooks are continuing to bill clients for non-existent debts and to take them to phoney corporate courts and steal their private property and deceive investors on the stock market?
Did you know that they are using private commercial mercenaries paid for with our taxes to steal us blind and instigate wars? This isn’t a matter of politics. This is crime and conflict of interest, pure and simple, committed against humanity.
Wake Up folks and let’s get our legitimate world back out of the hands of these criminals!
Promissory Note and Mortgage Contract Fraud:
A promissory note is basically an IOU that contains the promise to repay the loan, as well as the terms for repayment. The purpose of the mortgage or deed of trust is to provide security for the loan that is evidenced by a promissory note.
It is legitimately proven that banks and lending institutes organised under the same system, never give anything of equitable value in exchange for the Promissory Notes and mortgage contracts that they obtain.
And this relates to debt collectors as well. Under contract law all you have to do is ask them to show you the contract that you signed with them agreeing you are liable to any debt. No contract. No debt. F*ck off. The entire debt collection industry is a SCAM
This demonstrates the basic fraud process; the banks create the credit for they loan out of thin air simply by entering numbers in a ledger and that credit is based on the borrower’s ownassets – not the bank’s assets.
The bank loans nothing of value of its own! All these institutions act under the same system. As evidenced by jurisprudence from a court case that confirms that banks gave no equitable consideration, and that no valid contract ever existed. This establishes the motive for the bank’s deceit.
They were able to obtain funds equal to the entire amount of the loan from the borrower without his/her knowledge. This enabled the banks to deposit the borrower’s own funds in a bank account and write a check off those funds back to the borrower, thus creating the illusion that they gave the borrower a loan of the bank’s own assets.
For moneylending is this common practice, it’s an on going systematic fraud, committed by the crime syndicate in cooperation with the courts, law enforcement agencies, and magistrates.
5 Most Powerful Families that Control the World:
Farage: The people’s army of bloggers will prevail over anti-democratic but fascist EU
Shocking U.S. Death Chart Reveals Root Cause Of Most Mortality Comes From Prescriptions And Food Chemicals May 17 2016 | From: NaturalNews
With 100,000 deaths and 2 million injuries each year being caused by legal prescription drugs in the United States, and with 1.5 million Americans contracting cancer each year, the pharmaceutical and biotech industries have become far more of a threat of "terrorism" to Americans than any people or other country could be, or have been, to this day.
Actual poisoning from prescription drugs has RISEN to become the second-largest cause of unintentional deaths in the US, according to the CDC themselves. When did the increase really gain so much momentum?
In its Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report, researchers found that deaths from prescription drugs nearly doubled in the US from 1999 to 2004. This mortality data was collected from the National Vital Statistics System.
On the lighter side, statistics from the U.S. National Poison Data System have revealed, in a 174-page detailed report, that the number of Americans actually killed in 2009 by vitamins, minerals, amino acids or herbal supplements was exactly zero. Yes, you read that correctly... zero.
Well, we were using these "alternative" 'natural' remedies for, oh, I don't know, maybe thousands of years before the pharmaceutical industry came along - were we not?
On top of that, data shows that not even one single death was caused by a dietary supplement in the prior year of 2008. The annual report published in the journal Clinical Toxicology shows zero deaths from taking any of the vitamins A, B, C, D or E.
That full report also states zero deaths from any other vitamins.
Deaths in the US from auto wrecks: Nearly 30,000 per year.
Deaths from cancer: At least 1.5 million Americans get cancer each year, and more than half die from it. That's 750,000 people dying of a preventable and curable disorder of the cells, including children and babies.
Deaths from heart disease: 375,000 people a year in US.
Deaths from strokes: 140,000 per year.
Deaths from Alzheimer's and Dementia: The sixth leading cause of death that has a grip on five million Americans right now kills one in every three seniors.
Deaths from chemotherapy: More patients are dying from associated symptoms of chemotherapy and radiation than the cancer itself. On July 10, 2015, Detroit-area oncologist Farid Fata, M.D., was sentenced to 45 years in prison for administering chemotherapy on healthy patients, some of whom died, and for defrauding Medicare and private insurance companies to the tune of $34 million in filed claims. Fata plead guilty (less than a year ago) to 13 counts of health care fraud, two counts of money laundering and one count of conspiracy involving kickbacks.
More Alarming Statistics
Number of people unnecessarily exposed to hospitals? Pushing 9 million a year. Antibiotics improperly prescribed for viral infections? 20 million.
Total number of deaths from vaccines and flu shots: Unknown. The CDC will NEVER publish this statistic.
Deaths from consuming GMOs? Unknown, but cancer and Alzheimer's are on the rise.
Now the good news: No deaths from marijuana, hemp seed oil, cannabis (CBD). In late December 2015, the National Center for Health Statistics at the CDC released its yearly statistics revealing overdose death rates from various (legal and illegal) drugs, and the death count from marijuana remained the same as for the year before: exactly zero. Not one single person died from smoking or ingesting marijuana, and no one on record ever has. And there's more good news...
Total Deaths From Vitamins, Minerals, Amino Acids and Herbs?
Zero Deaths from natural plant-based medicines and supplements is zero, and so now the big question – how many lives have natural remedies SAVED?
Who's counting? Can we?
What we do know is that deaths from chemical consumption, whether by food, water, personal care products, inhalants, prescriptions or chemotherapy, are on the rise, and with the spread of GMOs, and superbugs in hospitals, and forced vaccination by a pharma-led government, and the majority of food mutated by the biotech cabal of corporations, you simply cannot afford to live in the dark. Get smart, eat clean, take only clean food as medicine, and enjoy longevity.
How Processed Foods Wreak Havoc On Your Health May 16 2016 | From: OrganicConsumers
Many people probably can’t recall the last time they ate a meal prepared entirely from wholesome, farm-to-table ingredients, without any canned or prepackaged products.
That’s because most Westerners today consume mostly processed foods - foods produced with pesticides, GMOs and synthetic chemicals, routinely laced with too much sugar, salt and unhealthy fats.
In fact, processed foods make up as much as 70 percent of people’s diets - meaning only 30 percent of what they consume consists of wholesome, natural, or organic foods!
But here’s the truth about processed foods: Long-term consumption of these “food products” spell bad news for your health.
Processed vs. ultra-processed: What’s the difference?
The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) defines “processed food” as any raw agricultural commodity that has been subjected to processing methods, including canning, cooking, dehydration, freezing or milling.
This means that the only time a food can be classified as “fresh” is when you’ve taken it straight from the source (washing it is okay, and would not be classified as a form of processing) and eaten it. By this definition, most foods would be considered processed.
However, in layman’s terms, processed foods can refer to sodas, potato chips, candy, baked pastries with extended shelf life - basically, “convenient,” easy-to-eat products that have been altered through the addition of artificial or ingredients, synthetic flavorings, fillers and chemical or genetically engineered additives.
But this type of description actually refers to “ultra-processed food.” Researchers from the University of São Paulo and Tufts University define “ultra-processed” as:
Formulations of several ingredients which, besides salt, sugar, oils, and fats, include food substances not used in culinary preparations, in particular, flavors, colors, sweeteners, emulsifiers and other additives used to imitate sensorial qualities of unprocessed or minimally processed foods and their culinary preparations or to disguise undesirable qualities of the final product.
Click on the image above to open a larger version in a new window
But most people use the term “processed food” and “ultra-processed food” interchangeably when talking about these consumer products. Conventional processed foods today come in a variety of forms.
Canned and frozen fruits and vegetables
Canned meats (luncheon meat and sausage, corned beef, and meatloaf)
Breakfast foods, including cereals, oatmeal, energy bars
Canned, bottled, or tetra-packed fruit juices, energy drinks, and soda
Jarred baby foods and infant cereals
Foods “fortified” with nutrients
Ready to eat meals, microwave dinners
Pastries, including cookies, breads, frozen pizza, and pies
Condiments, seasonings and marinades, salad dressing, and jams
Yogurt and other commercially made fermented foods
The simplest way to determine if a food is processed is by looking at the ingredient list at the back of its packaging. The longer the ingredient list, the more processed a food is likely to be.
After more than 20 years of struggle by consumer activists and public interest groups such as the Organic Consumers Association, major food manufacturers are finally being forced to label GMO ingredients in processed foods sold in grocery stores.
Because of this, many of them are starting to remove GMOs from their products, along with other artificial chemicals and additives.
The History of ‘Processing’
Humans have been “processing” food through traditional methods for thousands of years. Egyptians have used salt for 4,000 years to extend the shelf life of food. In ancient sites in Italy, Russia and the Czech Republic, there was evidence that early humans pounded cattails and ferns into flour and mixed it with water to bake bread.
Other methods of food preservation, including fermentation, pickling and curing, have also been used for thousands of years, in different cultures. The food was used to help survive long winters and voyages, and also as rations when soldiers went to war. This led to the production of foods like beer, wine, cheeses, yogurt and butter.
The 19th century saw the rise of modern food processing methods. Canning and bottling began mainly to serve military needs, although the initial cans used were hazardous, as they were contaminated with lead.
Pasteurization, a method that prolongs the shelf life of dairy and wine to allow increased production and distribution, was discovered and patented by Louis Pasteur in the mid-1800s.
In the 20th century, the rising consumer society contributed to the growth of food processing. Advances such as freeze drying, spray drying and juice concentrates were developed. At the same time, coloring agents, preservatives and artificial sweeteners were introduced.
Self-cooking meals, “TV dinners,” reconstituted fruits and juices and other “instant” foods like coffee and noodles became popular. These were mostly marketed to working wives and mothers who were tired of preparing foods from scratch.
To convince people that processed foods were as good, or even better, than wholesome foods, they were marketed as a means for people to save time and money - hence the term “convenience foods.”
But do the time and money you save by choosing these processed goods make up for the havoc that they wreak with your health?
Not What the Human Body Needs, or Wants
The human body is not designed to thrive on processed foods. And foods are not meant to be altered. The more altered they are, the worse they are for your health.
Processed foods are actually lacking in nutritional content compared to natural foods. For example, processed bread and other snacks use refined grains that have the bran and germ removed and, along with it, important nutrients like fiber, iron and B-vitamins.
Dehydrated foods not only have reduced amounts of vitamin C and fiber, but they also become more energy dense, which causes them to contribute to weight gain. When dehydrated foods are constituted and cooked with water, even more nutrients leach out.
Processed foods are also loaded with sugar, unhealthy fats and sodium, all of which your body is not designed to handle in high amounts, and all of which can endanger health. Particularly damaging are refined sugars, like high-fructose corn syrup (HFCS), which convert into fat in your body.
This wreaks havoc on your insulin and leptin levels, and leads to chronic diseases like obesity, diabetes and cancer. Meanwhile, synthetic trans fats, in the form of partially hydrogenated vegetable oils, have been linked to heart disease.
And of course processed foods are routinely laced with hazardous genetically engineered and pesticide-drenched ingredients derived from GMO corn, soybeans, canola, sugar beets and cotton (cottonseed oil is common in low-grade vegetable oils).
According to the Grocery Manufacturers of America, 80 percent of all (non-organic) supermarket processed foods contain GMOs. Only now are those ingredients being labeled, as food manufacturers are being forced to comply with Vermont’s GMO labeling law.
Loaded with Health-Harming Synthetic Additives
Close to 5,000 additives are now allowed to be used in food products. And this number keeps growing. If you factor in the additives found in the packaging (which can also leach into your food), that number of additives can rise to 10,000!
What’s worse, most of these food additives have not undergone any safety testing, and very few have been tested according to the way that they are ingested - meaning in combination with other additives. Some of these additives are downright dangerous.
Diacetyl and 2,3-pentanedione (PD), both of which are added to microwave popcorn to give it a buttery aroma, are linked to brain health, Alzheimer’s disease and respiratory toxicity.
Monosodium glutamate (MSG), which is found in chips, processed meats and a wide array of other foods, is an excitotoxin that can lead to cell damage, triggering brain dysfunction and leading to learning disabilities, Lou Gehrig's disease, Parkinson's disease, Alzheimer's disease and more.
Artificial food dyes like Red #40, Yellow 5, and Blue #2 are linked to brain tumors, hyperactivity, hypersensitivity and other behavioral effects in children.
Preservatives like butylated hydroxyanisole (BHA) and butylated hydroxyl toluene (BHT) can mess with your brain’s neurological system, causing behavioral problems and even cancer. Another preservative, tertiary butylhydroquinone (TBHQ), is also deadly. In fact, just five grams can kill you, according to the FDA.
Giving Up Processed Foods - Easier Said than Done
If you think you can simply shake off your processed food cravings, you’re wrong. These foods are intentionally addictive.
They stimulate dopamine, a “feel-good” neurotransmitter that affects your brain similarly to how drugs affect you. Manufacturers are fully aware of this, and actually engineer their products to produce this “delicious” yet dangerous effect. (Michael Moss details this in his book, “Salt, Sugar, Fat: How the Food Giants Hooked Us.”)
Sadly, many people still consume GMO and pesticide-tainted, highly processed foods because of their affordability, convenience and “delicious” flavor. But what you save in terms of money and convenience will ultimately put a double whammy on your health.
Instead, go for a diet composed mostly of wholesome foods, like organic fruits and vegetables, grass-fed and pasture-raised meat and raw (unpasteurized and unhomogenized) dairy, and healthy saturated fats like coconuts, coconut oil, avocados and raw nuts.
For your beverage, choose pure water and fresh green juice instead of processed fruit juices, soda and energy drinks.
In addition, make sure to cook these wholesome foods in your home, so you can be sure that nothing harmful goes into your meals. Cooking at home will also help you avoid dining at fast foods and restaurants (which also use processed ingredients).
Encouraging your whole family to sit down and have a hearty meal together not only cultivates good health, it cultivates good relationships.
Rothschild Bank Now Under Criminal Investigation Over Missing $4 Billion In Global Corruption Probe May 16 2016 | From: DCclothesline
Last year the veil of invincibility seemingly came off the secretive Rothschild banking empire, as Baron David de Rothschild and his company the Rothschild Financial Services Group were indicted by French prosecutors for allegedly defrauding British pensioners in a scheme that saw large sums of money embezzled.
Only two months ago, we reported on the Swiss branch of the Edmond de Rothschild Group announcing that they were the target of a French criminal probe “regarding a business relationship managed by a former employee.”
Now, the Luxembourg unit of Rothschild banking empire is being investigated by the Luxembourg state prosecutors office — alleged to have sent hundreds of millions of dollars to an account at a bank in Luxembourg that originated from 1Malaysia Development Berhad (1MDB).
The fund, 1MBD, was established by Malaysian Prime Minister Najib Razak in 2009 as a government investment fund. There have been widespread accusations of corruption surrounding Razak after $1 billion dollars in deposits into his personal bank accounts were revealed.
The deposits totaled hundreds of millions of dollars more than had previously been exposed by probes into state fund 1MDB, according to the Wall Street Journal.
The Luxembourg investigation stems from an international probe of money that may have flowed from the Malaysian government investment fund, which is at the center of various worldwide corruption probes.
"The Luxembourg unit of Edmond de Rothschild Group, a private bank that manages money on behalf of wealthy clients, said it is “cooperating” with an official investigation of money that may have flowed from a Malaysian government investment fund at the center of various world-wide corruption probes…
The Luxembourg investigation widens probes of 1MDB already under way by authorities in Switzerland, Malaysia, Singapore, Hong Kong and Abu Dhabi.
Swiss authorities said in January that 1MDB-related losses from misappropriation could reach $4 billion. The Luxembourg prosecutor said its case was connected to the investigation in Switzerland.
1MDB was created to invest in local energy and real-estate projects to boost the Malaysian economy. The fund amassed $11 billion in debt which it has struggled to repay. Last July,The Wall Street Journal reported that almost $700 million was transferred to Mr. Najib’s bank accounts via a web of entities, money which investigators believe originated with 1MDB.
1MDB has denied sending money to Mr. Najib’s accounts and denied wrongdoing and said it is cooperating with probes."
“Edmond de Rothschild Europe is actively cooperating in the judicial proceedings,” a spokeswoman for the Edmond de Rothschild Group told the WSJ.
The Edmond de Rothschild Group oversees roughly $164 billion in assets, according to Bloomberg. The private bank and asset management firm to the elite was founded by Edmond de Rothschild in Paris in 1953.
Baron Edmond de Rothschild
Edmond’s son Benjamin de Rothschild succeeded his father as head of the group in 1997. Last year, Benjamin appointed his wife, Ariane, chairwoman of the executive committee. The Swiss unit traces its roots to the acquisition of Banque Privee in Geneva in 1965.
"The Rothschild Family as we know it is descended from Mayer Amschel Rothschild, who was born in what is now Frankfurt, Germany. The son of Jewish moneychanger and trader Amschel Moses Rothschild, Mayer Amschel Rothschild was the fourth of 8 children, and went on to establish a huge international banking empire.
Through his 5 sons, Mayer Amschel Rothschild expanded his banking business, which was founded in the 1760s, to international areas and, as such, managed to bequeath his huge wealth, unlike many rich members of the Jewish community at the time.
Mayer Amschel’s 5 sons were each stationed at one of the major European financial centres, one in Frankfurt, London, Naples, Vienna, and Paris.
This passing on of Mayer Amschel’s wealth and business meant that his sons could continue to build on the foundations of their father’s success. In the 19th century the Rothschild Family were at the height of their powers, and were known all around the financial world.
Their great fortune and ingenious business minds meant that they carried great power during this time. They utilised this power by affecting some very significant events in human history in order to profit greatly from it.
This included backing the British forces with huge sums of money during the Napoleonic Wars (more on that later) and funding Brazil’s claim for independence from Portugal."
The Rothschild banking dynasty is a family line that has been accused of pulling the political strings of many different governments through their control of various economic systems throughout the world.
Historically, there is ample evidence to show that the family has used insider trading to bilk money from both private and public funds.
Towards the end of the Napoleonic Wars, in 1813, Nathan Mayer Rothschild saw Napoleon’s war efforts as a threat to his business practices and decided to step in to help defeat the French conqueror. He became the most important financier of the British war effort pouring the equivalent of $900 million dollars in today’s dollars in 1815 alone.
The defeat of Napoleon, and subsequent ending of the Napoleonic Wars, which started in 1803 and raged throughout the continent for 12 years before finally coming to an end in 1815.
During the Battle of Waterloo in the Napoleonic wars, Nathan Rothschild was responsible for one of the oldest cases of “insider trading,” which led to the Rothschild family robbing a whole nation blind. When the battle of Waterloo took place in 1815, horse messengers were the fastest method of communicating information.
The Rothschild’s took advantage of this by having their own spies on the frontlines of the battle that would then expedite the information to the family faster than the messengers used by the military.
When the British won the battle, Nathan Rothschild, was, of course, the first to know, and he immediately went to the stock exchange and started selling stocks while putting out the rumor that the French had won the war. This created a panic on the floor of the stock exchange and investors all over England began frantically selling their stocks.
With the price of all stocks plummeting Rothschild was able to buy out the whole English market for a fraction of its cost. When word returned that the English had actually been victorious, the value of the market soared, and overnight Nathan Rothschild expanded his family’s wealth and cemented their position as one of the richest, and most influential families in the world.
Although the Rothschild family now keeps a very low public profile, they still have significant business operations across a wide spectrum of sectors.
While you may not find any one particular Rothschild on the Forbes’ most rich list, the family is estimated to control $1 trillion dollars in assets across the globe, thus having a strong voice across the geopolitical spectrum that many perceive as a hidden hand manipulating events silently from behind a veil of virtual secrecy and silence.
How A Secretive Elite Created The EU To Build A World Government May 15 2016 | From: TheTelegraph
Voters in Britain's referendum need to understand that the European Union was about building a federal superstate from day one.
As the debate over the forthcoming EU referendum gears up, it would be wise perhaps to remember how Britain was led into membership in the first place. It seems to me that most people have little idea why one of the victors of the Second World War should have become almost desperate to join this "club".
Others seem to believe that after the Second World War Britain needed to recast her geopolitical position away from empire, and towards a more realistic one at the heart of Europe. Neither of these arguments, however, makes any sense at all.
The EEC in the 1960s and 1970s was in no position to regenerate anyone’s economy. It spent most of its meagre resources on agriculture and fisheries and had no means or policies to generate economic growth.
"When we entered the EEC our annual growth rate was a record 7.4 per cent. The present Chancellor would die for such figures"
When growth did happen, it did not come from the EU. From Ludwig Erhard's supply-side reforms in West Germany in 1948 to Thatcher's privatisation of nationalised industry in the Eighties, European growth came from reforms introduced by individual countries which were were copied elsewhere. EU policy has always been either irrelevant or positively detrimental (as was the case with the euro).
Nor did British growth ever really lag behind Europe's. Sometimes it surged ahead. In the 1950s Western Europe had a growth rate of 3.5 per cent; in the 1960s, it was 4.5 per cent.
But in 1959, when Harold Macmillan took office, the real annual growth rate of British GDP, according to the Office of National Statistics, was almost 6 per cent. It was again almost 6 per cent when de Gaulle vetoed our first application to join the EEC in 1963.
In 1973, when we entered the EEC, our annual national growth rate in real terms was a record 7.4 per cent. The present Chancellor would die for such figures. So the economic basket-case argument doesn’t work.
What about geopolitics? What argument in the cold light of hindsight could have been so compelling as to make us kick our Second-World-War Commonwealth allies in the teeth to join a combination of Belgium, the Netherlands, Luxembourg, France, Germany and Italy?
Four of these countries held no international weight whatsoever. Germany was occupied and divided. France, meanwhile, had lost one colonial war in Vietnam and another in Algeria. De Gaulle had come to power to save the country from civil war. Most realists must surely have regarded these states as a bunch of losers.
De Gaulle, himself a supreme realist, pointed out that Britain had democratic political institutions, world trade links, cheap food from the Commonwealth, and was a global power. Why would it want to enter the EEC?
"Harold Macmillan and his closest advisers were part of an intellectual tradition that saw the salvation of the world in some form of world government."
Harold Macmillan, here with Edward Heath, couldn't get a free-trade deal
The answer is that Harold Macmillan and his closest advisers were part of an intellectual tradition that saw the salvation of the world in some form of world government based on regional federations. He was also a close acquaintance of Jean Monnet, who believed the same.
It was therefore Macmillan who became the representative of the European federalist movement in the British cabinet.
In a speech in the House of Commons he even advocated a European Coal and Steel Community (ECSC) before the real thing had been announced.
He later arranged for a Treaty of Association to be signed between the UK and the ECSC, and it was he who ensured that a British representative was sent to the Brussels negotiations following the Messina Conference, which gave birth to the EEC.
In the late 1950s he pushed negotiations concerning a European Free Trade Association towards membership of the EEC.
Then, when General de Gaulle began to turn the EEC into a less federalist body, he took the risk of submitting a full British membership application in the hope of frustrating Gaullist ambitions.
His aim, in alliance with US and European proponents of a federalist world order, was to frustrate the emerging Franco-German alliance which was seen as one of French and German nationalism.
The French statesman Jean Monnet, (1888 - 1979), who in 1956 was appointed president of the Action Committee for the United States of Europe
Monnet met secretly with Heath and Macmillan on innumerable occasions to facilitate British entry. Indeed, he was informed before the British Parliament of the terms in which the British approach to Europe would be framed.
Despite advice from the Lord Chancellor, Lord Kilmuir, that membership would mean the end of British parliamentary sovereignty, Macmillan deliberately misled the House of Commons - and practically everyone else, from Commonwealth statesmen to cabinet colleagues and the public - that merely minor commercial negotiations were involved.
He even tried to deceive de Gaulle that he was an anti-federalist and a close friend who would arrange for France, like Britain, to receive Polaris missiles from the Americans. De Gaulle saw completely through him and vetoed the British bid to enter.
Macmillan left Edward Heath to take matters forward, and Heath, along with Douglas Hurd, arranged - according to the Monnet papers - for the Tory Party to become a (secret) corporate member of Monnet’s Action Committee for a United States of Europe.
According to Monnet’s chief aide and biographer, Francois Duchene, both the Labour and Liberal Parties later did the same. Meanwhile the Earl of Gosford, one of Macmillan’s foreign policy ministers in the House of Lords, actually informed the House that the aim of the government’s foreign policy was world government.
"The Anglo-American establishment was now committed to the creation of a federal United States of Europe."
Today, this is still the case. Powerful international lobbies are already at work attempting to prove that any return to democratic self-government on the part of Britain will spell doom. American officials have already been primed to state that such a Britain would be excluded from any free trade deal with the USA and that the world needs the TTIP trade treaty which is predicated on the survival of the EU.
Fortunately, Republican candidates in the USA are becoming Eurosceptics and magazines there like The National Interest are publishing the case for Brexit. The international coalition behind Macmillan and Heath will find things a lot more difficult this time round - especially given the obvious difficulties of the Eurozone, the failure of EU migration policy and the lack of any coherent EU security policy.
Most importantly, having been fooled once, the British public will be much more difficult to fool again.
Ten Years On: Al Gore's 'Inconvenient Truth' Propaganda Film Turns Out To Be Total Bunk - How Is His Profit From Carbon Taxes Not Criminal Fraud? May 15 2016 | From: NaturalNews
However, in the decade since the documentary was produced, its creator has raked in millions of dollars from the entire "global warming" scam, and is now poised to become "Our first carbon billionaire."
In the 2006 film, Gore made a number of wild claims regarding what we could expect to see happening over the next few years due to global warming, but virtually all of his alarmist prognostications have turned out to be false.
Arctic Didn't Melt, Polar Bears are Thriving
For instance, the film predicted that that the Arctic could become ice-free within the next decades, and that polar bears would begin drowning. Both claims were untrue.
As reported by Investor's Business Daily:
"In the mid- to late-2000s, Gore repeatedly predicted that an ice-free Arctic Ocean was coming soon. But as usual, his fortune-telling was wrong. By 2014, Arctic ice had grown thicker and covered a greater area than it did when he made his prediction."
And the polar bears?
The Daily Caller reports:
"A new study by Canadian scientists once again debunks the notion polar bears are currently being harmed by global warming. Researchers with Canada's Lakehead University found 'no evidence' polar bears are currently threatened by warming.""
Kilimanjaro's Snow Hasn't Disappeared
Another prediction made in the film was that Mt. Kilimanjaro would be snow-free "within the decade." But in fact:
"In 2014, ecologists actually monitoring Kilimanjaro's snowpack found it was not even close to being gone. It may have shrunk a little, but ecologists were confident it would be around for the foreseeable future."
In Inconvenient Truth, Gore also forecasted that storms would begin occurring more often and at higher intensities.
Wrong again, Al:
"Gore's claim is more hype than actual science, since storms aren't more extreme since 2006. In fact, not even findings from the United Nations's Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC) support Gore's claim.
"The IPCC found in 2013 there 'is limited evidence of changes in extremes associated with other climate variables since the mid-20th century.'
The IPCC also found 'no significant observed trends in global tropical cyclone frequency over the past century' and '[n]o robust trends in annual numbers of tropical storms, hurricanes and major hurricanes counts have been identified over the past 100 years in the North Atlantic basin.'
"Gore should probably take these findings seriously since he shared the Nobel Prize in 2007 with the IPCC for its work on global warming."
Despite False Claims, Gore Grows Richer from Climate Change Myth
Although Gore's claims have been thoroughly debunked by a number of experts, he has been quietly amassing a huge fortune based on the climate change scam.
Mad World News reports:
"Gore's wealth went from $700,000 in 2000 to an estimated net worth of $172.5 million by 2015 thanks to his environmentalist activism. Gore and the former chief of Goldman Sachs Asset Management made nearly $218 million in profits between 2008 and 2011 from a carbon trading company they co-founded. By 2008, Gore was able to put a whopping $35 million into hedge funds and other investments."
He was apparently upset about the post below which states that 5 sitting MP’s have name suppression for child abuse, and features a picture of Nick Smith.
If you read the full poster, it does not actually say Nick Smith is one of them, it simply highlights the fact that Kiwis do not know which MP’s it is.
Five sitting / current New Zealand Members of Parliament have name suppression for child abuse convictions.
The problem is obviously - the public have no idea who.
But is there more to this story?
Facebook whistle blower Justin Davis has also stated publicly that Nick Smith is in fact involved in a child abuse ring being operated from his Nelson office.
Justin Davis’ allegation is posted below – and is taken from a total of 58 pages of allegations Justin has made about child abuse rings operating across various NZ Crown agencies with the full protection of the NZ police and judiciary.
"Make no mistake the pedophiles have police and CYFS in there pockets.
M.P. Nick Smith got a child rape club running right out of his office by a guy called Dan Dolejs, who has links to the most powerful pedophiles in this country.
If the head of the wellington hospital emergency department Dr Paul Quigley is getting away with drugging and raping children, which is filmed , what else do you think might be going on ?”
Please visit Justin Davis on Facebook- add as friend – read his posts – check out his photo album – ask him questions- and show your support- his life is in danger.
It seems astounding doesn’t it? Is it possible that those in the highest positions of power and prestige in our little Nation are in fact pedophiles?
Yet if we look over to the UK at the recent Westminster Scandal we in fact see that their Government has been run by pedophiles and pedophile rings, which have operated for at least 40 years with the apparent full protection of the UK Judiciary and power structure.
Over 100,000 children have come forward and claimed they were raped (or worse) by British Lords, judges, celebrities and MP’s, and yet there has still not been one arrest. In fact, NZ Judge Lowell Goddard has been put in charge of that “investigation” – which is of course just another cover up.
It seems that this is the way that our Governments are controlled, by promoting then bribing and controlling pedophiles into positions of power.
John Key pictured feeling up Ponytails at every opportunity.
We should make it clear here that we have no hard evidence that Nick Smith or anyone else named in the Justin Davis files are directly involved in NZ pedophile rings – but if you read the document, the level of detail is astounding. It is almost impossible to think it is all made up, in our opinion.
Perhaps one clue as to this alleged situation, is to look at the portfolios these MP’s are given to manage. Nick Smith has of course been put in charge of Auckland Housing and we have seen that market destroyed by foreign buyers and immigration since the Key regime came to power, leaving almost an entire generation of Kiwis out of the market.
Smith has been kicked out of parliament because of his screw ups, but as in the case with others such as Judith Collins - after a few months in the dog box (or more to the point when the sheeply have forgotten about their past crimes) they get shoe-horned back into parliament!
Nick Smith has been fronting that entire scam - possibly one of the biggest scams of any NZ government in history, and Nick Smith is there in front of the cameras making excuses and telling lies day after day. How do you make someone do that?
His other portfolio is the Environment, as we have seen our lakes and rivers be destroyed by intensive dairy farming to feed Chinese babies.
Again, there is MP Nick Smith on the news telling lies and helping cover up the extent of the damage. How does the shadow government convince someone to make such a complete asshole out of themselves day after day? And could that be related to the allegations above?
We have also seen at least one MP stand down suddenly in recent years, in a swirl of allegations, that being Northland MP Mike Sabin. The public were left guessing what that was all about.
Then there is PM John Key’s numerous pedophilia gaffs – from pulling little girls ponytails at primary schools up and down the Nation, to making “jokes” about escaped pedophile and murderer Phillip Smith at the G20 meeting in Brazil a couple of years ago. “John Key’s killer pedophile joke disgusts family” .
John Key’s own daughter Stephanie Key is now doing soft porn in Paris, which looks very much like a cry for attention and help in our view.
In our opinion- the question must be asked, are we governed over by an elite group of child sex offenders and perverts who are all being bribed and controlled into taxing us all to fund the Rothschild bank debt we have been laden with in recent years?
Are we indeed Governed by a Global gang of inbred Rothschild pedophiles? Many across the internet seem to agree that we are. just chuck “Rothschild pedophiles” into Youtube and Google and read the evidence all day long.
And hugging Bill Clinton, a serial rapist named in the Epstein pedophile ring court documents. Also Stephanie Key’s “art” or cry for help?)
Related Research and Docos:
NZ author Greg Hallett alleges the NZ judiciary is a pedophile movement:
"The judiciary shows itself to be a paedophile and crime creation movement whose primary goal is fatherless families.”
Brendon O’Connell exposes pedophile Freemasons in the Australian Government and Councils:
Only Half Of Americans Realise Election System Is Rigged + Why Vote When Our Votes Really Don’t Count? May 14 2016 | From: TheDailySheeple / ActivistPost
In politics, nothing happens by accident. If it happens, you can bet it was planned that way.
According to a Reuters/Ipsos poll, about half of American voters believe that the system U.S. political parties use to pick their candidates for the White House is “rigged” and more than two-thirds want to see the process changed.
One would think that, by now, most (if not all) people would realize that the entire voting system is a sham.
"The United States is one of just a handful of countries that gives regular voters any say in who should make it onto the presidential ballot. But the state-by-state system of primaries, caucuses and conventions is complex.
The contests historically were always party events, and while the popular vote has grown in influence since the mid-20th century, the parties still have considerable sway.
One quirk of the U.S. system – and the area where the parties get to flex their muscle – is the use of delegates, party members who are assigned to support contenders at their respective conventions, usually based on voting results. The parties decide how delegates are awarded in each state, with the Republicans and Democrats having different rules.
The delegates’ personal opinions can come into play at the party conventions if the race is too close to call – an issue that has become a lightning rod in the current political season.
Another complication is that state governments have different rules about whether voters must be registered as party members to participate. In some states, parties further restrict delegate selection to small committees of party elites, as the Republican Party in Colorado did this year.”
In other words: the establishment selects two candidates and “allows” us to choose from them on election day. Same deal everywhere. Do you want the blue party or the red party? Same agenda - different muppets to the fore.
Third-party candidates? Forget about it. The mainstream media largely ignores them. Suggest voting for one, and most Americans will tell you that you are “wasting your vote.” Unfortunately, they aren’t wrong: the elite will never allow a third-party non-establishment candidate a real shot at the presidency.
"The rise of anti-establishment candidates like Sanders and Trump has thrown into sharp relief the mess of rules and processes deliberately designed to keep these candidates from clinching the nomination.
For these voters, and the many more across the political spectrum just waking up to the ground rules of the highest-stakes game in the country, the primary races can seem horribly unfair.”
The Guardian also polled Americans to ask what they think about the election system. More than 300 readers responded, and many expressed their misgivings about the way the parties select nominees, describing the modern primary process as “rigged”, “undemocratic,” and a “charade.”
"Why should the states, the party organizations and the voters go through all the hype, expense and time to have a primary when the party poobahs make the ultimate decision?”
- Don Grafues
“Now that we have true grassroots, anti-establishment, populist candidates on both sides [Sanders and Trump], the political machine is in full survival mode to maintain the status quo. Party leaders sense a real and direct threat from both campaigns…
and both major parties are going to use every tool they have to block what they feel is a threat to their very existence.”
“The reason I never voted is because I thought of corruption. I thought maybe I was wrong or unfair, but it’s [the electoral process this year] kind of making me think there’s a lot of corruption and your voice doesn’t count.”
- Wendy Kranmer
Earlier this month, RT discussed the rigging of elections with Dr. Ron Paul, who called the system “rotten” and a “charade”:
"…as the saying goes, “the path to hell is paved with good intentions”. In a ponerized society with a corrupt political system, good intention, hope and voting don’t result in positive change, but merely wishful thinking and denial.
There are no free elections in this country. There hasn’t been in a long time. The Voting System is a fraud sold to the public to give them the illusion of choice. The same goes for the two-party set-up. Democrats and Republicans. Back and forth. Two sides of the same coin. Despite popular belief we actually don’t live in a democracy anymore. People are so caught up in this left/right tunnel vision that they don’t see how they’re being duped and played with.”
Elections are nonsense. They serve to maintain the illusion that we actually have a say in selecting a new master every four years. Participating in this system gives it validity – voters are giving their permission to keep the current system in place.
Why Vote When Our Votes Really Don’t Count
For years I never could understand why people said it was not worth voting and that things were rigged. I found that to be anathema to both my studies and beliefs.
However, the last several general election cycles seem to have impressed upon me and others, apparently, that there may be some validation for such remarks.
Personally, I’m a registered Independent! I’m not very impressed with party politics, since Democratic candidates usually are, or have been, Republicans who switched parties, and vice versa. Current political shenanigans only leave me cold since the political agenda ‘de jour’ is about “political correctness” and memes restructuring society into a moral morass, in my opinion, rather than dealing with real issues that are pushing us into a Corporatocracy. But that’s my opinion!
One of the more famous political party ‘fence jumpers’ was the late Ronald Reagan, the Republican 40th President of the USA, who started out as a registered Democrat and an FDR’s New Deal supporter in California.
Hillary Clinton - yes - the 2016 Democratic presidential nominee hopeful campaigned for Republican presidential campaigner Richard Nixon, and also worked for Barry Goldwater’s campaign in 1964.
Hillary even was elected president of Wellesley College’s Young Republican Club!
Leon Panetta joined the Nixon (R) administration as director of the Office of Civil Rights only later to become Bill Clinton’s (D) White House Chief of Staff!
Condoleezza Rice was a registered Democrat, who voted for Jimmy Carter (D) but switched and became a rather high ranking Republican in the George W Bush (R) administration.
Former NYC mayor Michael Bloomberg was a lifelong Democrat, who became the Republican mayor of New York City. The late Senator Arlen Spector represented the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania in the U.S. Senate as a Republican from 1981 to 2009, but was a Democrat from 2009 to 2011.
Democratic political ‘gadfly’ Senator Elizabeth Warren of Massachusetts was a Republican at one time too! Arianna Huffington of The Huffington Post also is a political ‘fence jumper’. Former Secretary of Labor Elizabeth Dole switched from being a Democrat in 1969, and eventually wound up being in Republican president Reagan’s administration and Cabinet.
This website lists 21 of the most famous political party switchers of all time.
Those who bang political party drums seem not to see the forest for the trees, in my opinion. Party politics infighting and voting party lines really leave me to wonder;
"Can’t anyone think outside the box he or she has pledged their loyalties and surrendered their minds to?”
All the above leads up to this overlooked theme regarding politics, elections, and voting: Party politics rule-making and rigging! A friend recently emailed James Perloff’s Blog wherein Perloff tells the story of what happened to a 2012 alternate delegate at the Republican convention in Tampa, Florida, who was representing candidate Ron Paul.
Delegate Rachel McIntosh obviously had a very rude awakening about the dark, stinky underside belly of presidential campaign politics, conventions, and party national committees, which I think you will find equally disturbing after your read about her experiences here.
The upshot of McIntosh’s story is how Ron Paul was ‘railroaded’ at the convention and Mitt Romney wound up being the ‘favorite son’ and nominee of the Republican Party. It would seem that the very same shenanigans are going on now and the RNC is between a rock and a hard place regarding Donald Trump’s popularity, including his majority of pledged delegates.
Frankly, what I don’t understand is how voters will allow party bosses to manipulate who becomes any party’s presidential nominee, instead of what the people decide.
What’s the use of holding caucuses, primaries, or even general elections, if it’s all rigged? I think all that political BS boils down to whom they - the controllers - can control while in the White House. The current president seems to be the ideal example. Hillary would be the perfect follow through president to sink the U.S. ship of state, in my opinion.
However, with twelve FBI agents investigating her State Department emails, there’s a possibility that her derriere may wind up in ‘Quantico’ or somewhere like that, I offer. Since most legal minds agree there are legal problems for Hillary, see what you think after this news analyst explains.
Hillary, like Barack Obama has, will rubber stamp the New World Order-Rockefeller-Rothschild-U.N. Agenda. However, Ron Paul would not march to party bosses dictums or the New World Order contingent’s plans and dreams for our future.
Will The Donald or Bernie?
As Perloff says;
"If you want to glimpse how far back this sort of power-brokering goes, read Ferdinand Lundberg’s 1937 classic America’s Sixty Families.
He related how, a century ago, the rich were scorning voters and maneuvering their own choices into nominations, whether a Democrat like Woodrow Wilson in 1912 or a Republican like Herbert Hoover in 1928.”
So, shouldn’t we be asking, “What’s voting all about, and do our votes really count?”
This YouTube video, wherein a computer programmer, Clinton Eugene Curtis, under oath in Florida says that in October of 2000 he was asked to write a program to rig elections; that “would flip the vote 51-49”; and confirmed that there is “vote rigging software.”
His testimony will make you cringe when you hear him say, “… to control the votes in South Florida.” The 2000 presidential election is the one the U.S. Supreme Court decided! What happened to the voters’ votes?
Can, or will, that happen again, especially in 2016? The inside word would suggest no, not this time. Game's up and shortly to be out.
Foreign Control Of New Zealand: Key Facts May 13 2016 | From: CAFCA
Foreign direct investment (ownership of companies) in New Zealand increased from $15.7 billion in March 1989 to $110.6 billion at March 2015 – over seven times.
As a proportion of the total output of the economy, Gross Domestic Product, it has risen from 22% to 46%.
Ownership of overseas companies by New Zealand residents has not grown as fast over that period (over five times) so net foreign direct investment has grown eight and a half times from a net liability of $8.8 billion to $74.6 billion, and as a percentage of GDP multiplied two and half times from 13% of GDP to 31%.
Foreign Direct Investment from International Investment Position, National Accounts, Statistics New Zealand, InfoShare series IIP088AA. GDP from National Accounts, Statistics New Zealand, InfoShare series SNE038AA.
Foreign owners controlled 33% of the share market in 2015. In 1989, the figure was 19% and it was estimated to be below 5% in 1986.
At March 2014, they owned an estimated 29% of all equity (shareholdings) and 37% of privately owned equity, including shares not listed on the stock exchange.
Foreign investors owned 27% (or $355 billion) of wealth in New Zealand whose commercial net value totalled $1.3 trillion at March 2015.
This comprised housing, land, other property, plant, equipment and financial assets owned directly or indirectly by households, government and foreign investors. New Zealand residents owned a further $202 billion of investments abroad. (These totals exclude wealth held by non-profit organisations, shared natural wealth such as rivers, and human and social capital.)
In 2015, the OIO approved the sale of 75,008 hectares of freehold rural land and 4,889 hectares of leases and other interests in land to foreigners. About 43,000 hectares of the freehold land and 4,000 hectares of the leases and other interests in land were from one foreign investor to another.
In the decade 2006 to 2015, the average was 124,012 hectares of freehold and 42,044 hectares of leases and other interests in land approved for sale. Statistics on sales of land to overseas interests are poorly recorded and incomplete.
Our best estimate is that in 2011 at least 8.7 percent of New Zealand farmland including forestry, or 1.3 million hectares, was foreign-owned or controlled and it could have reached 10 percent.
In 2014, the OIO approved the sale of 38,120 hectares of freehold rural land and 2,671 hectares of leases and other interests in land to foreigners. About 12,000 hectares of the freehold land and 1,000 hectares of the leases and other interests in land were from one foreign investor to another.
In the decade 2005 to 2014, the average was 131,488 hectares of freehold and 43,162 hectares of leases and other interests in land approved for sale. Statistics on sales of land to overseas interests are poorly recorded and incomplete. Our best estimate is that in 2011 at least 8.7 percent of New Zealand farmland including forestry, or 1.3 million hectares, was foreign-owned or controlled and it could have reached 10 percent.
Overseas Investment Commission and Overseas Investment Office.
"Overseas Ownership Of Land: Far Greater Than The 1% The PM Claims", by Bill Rosenberg (www.converge.org.nz)
Statistics NZ figures, as of March 2015, list the biggest foreign owners of New Zealand companies as being from, in decreasing order: Australia, US, Hong Kong, UK, Singapore, Japan, Canada, Netherlands, British Virgin Islands, Ireland, Cayman Islands, China, Switzerland, Norway and France.
All had over $160m in foreign direct investment in New Zealand. These accounted for 96% of foreign direct investment in New Zealand and Australia alone accounts for 52%. British Virgin Islands and Cayman Islands are tax havens, and a Statistics New Zealand study showed that in 2010, large proportions of the foreign direct investment from the Netherlands, Singapore, Hong Kong and tax havens was in fact from other countries, led by the UK, US, Germany and Canada.
In 2015, Other tax havens with investments in New Zealand companies include Vanuatu, Channel Islands, Liechtenstein, Bermuda and the Bahamas, but for all except Bermuda, the value of their holdings has been suppressed as “confidential”.
Bermuda has shown a negative investment in New Zealand companies since 2009 (negative $1.8 billion in 2015). So has Germany since 2013. Negative investment suggests that the companies may have been loaded with debt to their parents or are technically insolvent.
International Investment Position, Statistics New Zealand: Directional basis stock of direct investment by country (Annual-Mar), InfoShare series IIP081AA. Note that these statistics are compiled on a different basis from those also from Statistics New Zealand above, so the total, $97.4b, does not match. These are compiled on a "directional" basis, based on ultimate nationality of ownership; the above are on a "balance sheet" basis, based on residency of the company. Industry statistics below are also compiled on a directional basis.
Mallika Kelkar. (2011). "The ultimate sources of foreign direct investment (p. 19). Presented at the New Zealand Association of Economists (NZAE) Conference, Wellington, New Zealand. Retrieved from stats.govt.nz
The Financial and insurance services sector, which includes the four big Australian owned banks, accounted for by far the biggest part of foreign ownership of New Zealand companies by industry in March 2015, with $32.1 billion. Next was Manufacturing at $14.7 billion.
Other industries having more than $1 billion of foreign investment were in decreasing size, Agriculture, forestry, and fishing; Retail trade; Wholesale trade; Electricity, gas, water and waste services; Rental, hiring and real estate services; Professional, scientific and technical services; Mining; Information media and telecommunications; and Health care and social assistance.
$16.6 billion was unable to be allocated to an industry because of the way foreign direct investment is estimated, or was suppressed as being confidential.
Source: International Investment Position, Directional basis stock of direct investment by industry (Annual-Mar), InfoShare series IIP080AA - Statistics New Zealand. See note regarding country statistics.
Transnational corporations (TNCs) make massive profits out of New Zealand. These can truly be called New Zealand's biggest invisible export. In the year to March 2015, they were $9.0 billion. Over the last decade they have averaged more than the combined exports of seafood and milk powder.
In the decade 2006-2015, TNCs made $77.5 billion in profits from New Zealand, an average rate of profit after tax on their shareholdings of 12.5% (12.0% in the year to March 2015). Only 26% was reinvested (only 15% in the year to March 2015). Profits have averaged twice the increase in foreign direct investment holdings each year.
Balance of Payments: Current account primary income (Annual-Mar), InfoShare Series BOP058AA; Current account investment income by sector (Annual-Mar), InfoShare series BOP059AA; and Balance of payments major components (Annual-Mar), InfoShare series BOP055AA – Statistics New Zealand.
Another $7.9 billion left New Zealand in the year to March 2015 made up of investment income from debt and smaller shareholdings (portfolio investment), making a total $16.9 billion. Over the last decade this has averaged more than the combined dairy and forest product exports.
International Ownership of New Zealand Banks
More than two out of every five dollars of the $16.9 billion went to the owners of New Zealand's banking sector: $6.9 billion. The investment income from overseas ownership of the banking sector ("Deposit taking corporations") after taking account of its small investment income from abroad, accounted for four out of every five dollars of New Zealand's current account deficit in the year to March 2015: $6.5 billion compared to $8.1 billion.
The investment income deficit (income on New Zealand investment overseas less income on foreign investment in New Zealand) has been greater than the current account deficit for all but two years since 1989, which further increases New Zealand's foreign liabilities.
Exports: Key Statistics Table 7.04 - Value of principal exports (excl re-exports), InfoShare series EXP005AA - Statistics New Zealand.
Foreign investors are not great for employment - they only employ 17% of the workforce (down from 21% in 2000), despite owning a large proportion of the economy. Foreign ownership does not guarantee more jobs. In fact, it quite often adds to unemployment. TNCs have made tens of thousands jobless.
Business demography statistics: Enterprises by industry and overseas equity 2000-15, Statistics New Zealand, available in NZ.Stat.
Foreign ownership does nothing to improve New Zealand's foreign debt problem. In 1989, total private and public foreign debt stood at $47.5 billion, equivalent to about two-thirds of New Zealand's Gross Domestic Product, and worth $86.4 billion in March 2015 dollars.
As of March 2015, it was $246.2 billion (or $270.9 billion including derivatives), equivalent to 102% of New Zealand's Gross Domestic Product despite being helped out temporarily by $20.2 billion of insurance claims for the Canterbury earthquakes and all of the asset sales and takeovers.
Source: Statistics New Zealand as follows: International investment position (IIP) (Annual-Mar) – InfoShare series IIP088AA; External lending and debt by sector and relationship (Annual-Mar) – InfoShare series IIP078AA; International non-equity financial instruments by sector (Annual-Mar) – InfoShare series IIP074AA;
New Zealand's A&L - Level 3 Components (Discontinued March 2000) (Annual-Mar) – InfoShare series IIP007AA; GDP(P), Nominal, Actual, Total (Annual-Mar) – InfoShare series SNE038AA; overseas reinsurance claims from the Canterbury earthquakes – http://tinyurl.com/j9kmree
Graphs to accompany the Key Facts information shown below are available to download in Microsoft PowerPoint (.PPT) or Adobe Acrobat (.PDF) format.
Each page of the Adobe Acrobat version has a small square in the top left corner. Hovering the mouse over this square shows the source of the information in more detail.
Note that there are often revisions to official data, leading to some changes to reported data for past years.
The Khazarian Mafia’s System Of Cartels May 13 2016 | From: VeteransToday
There is no naturally occurring terrorism - it is only violence and wars engineered by the World’s largest organized crime syndicate.
The 'Khazarian Mafia' often resemble their 'global control' in the form of an Octopus. This was, ad nauseum, evidenced yet again in the latest James Bond film which was about a secret cabal running the world...
Thus, we now are aware that the so-called problem of terrorism is really a problem of organized crime that is initiated and deployed by the world’s largest organized crime syndicate.
Never before in history has an organized crime syndicate become so large with global reach, and never before so powerful and evil, specializing in the frequent mass-murder of innocent people solely to enhance its power and riches.
This largest global organized crime syndicate is best identified as the Khazarian Mafia (KM). This name is appropriate, because its origins go back in history to the period 700-1200 AD in the nation of Khazaria, which is approximately the same area as Ukraine.
The KM also mass-murdered at least that many Chinese during the Khazarian Mafia directed Maoist takeover in China in 1945.
Mike Harris also uncovered the longstanding blood feud of the Khazarian Mafia (aka the Bolsheviks, or Zionists) against the Russian people for destroying Khazaria in 1240 AD.
It is clear that the Khazarian Mafia has also had a longstanding blood feud against America the Constitutional Republic for breaking away from their City of London establishment that the KM had infiltrated and hijacked via the Rothschild banksters.
This KM blood feud against America has been conducted with the usual methods involving infiltration of key institutions, followed by their hijacking. This has been done within each of the largest US Corporations, which are further consolidated into several larger corporations that cooperate together against consumers and buyers of their products and services.
The application of several key KM processes have resulted in the hijacking and consolidation of most institutions and large corporations.
These key processes, infiltration, hijacking and consolidation of major institutions, corporations and even most governments worldwide, has been repeated over and over in many nations around the world.
This has resulted in the stealing of huge amounts of wealth from people and resulting in a worldwide KM hierarchy of control, best described as the Establishment Hierarchy.
In essence, these cooperating corporations function as a cartel or an illegal monopoly. This makes it quite easy for the KM to control entire industries and sectors of society, because they ensure that the leaders of the corporations have been initiated into their hierarchy of control and have a personally vested interest in following KM wishes and directives.
This same process has been enacted in every sector of American society after 1913, and we discover that every major institution of government and private industry, as well as most large church systems have been infiltrated and completely hijacked to be under the spell and control of the top leadership of the KM’s hierarchy.
Here is a brief list of the various interlocked Cartels that the Khazarian Mafia has created that control most of the world and have been placed under the control of the Establishment Hierarchy, (and not necessarily in the order of importance).
Each of these Cartels is organized into a large system best referred to as the Hierarchy, and the several wrinkled-up old men in wheelchairs that control it are called the “Select Few” by insiders.
The Money Cartel
Otherwise known as the Reserve Banking System - and in the US as the Federal Reserve System. It is nothing more than a fraudulent illegal unConstitutional system that prints fake money debt-notes instead of real Gold or Silver Certificates.
This is the epitome of RICO crime and fraud. Of course there is no statute of limitations on fraud, and all assets illegally asset stripped can be clawed back some day using the US military, if necessary.
The Petro Cartel which has provided the linchpin of the US Petro Dollar.
The Knowledge Cartel
Otherwise known as the educational system including public schools, private and public universities.
Rigid controls have been imposed which prevent free thought and investigation or teaching about certain forbidden subjects like the Federal Reserve System or all the secretly run illegal, unConstitutional practices of the Establishment Hierarchy.
4. The Military and Intel Cartel
This has served as the World’s policemen and used the soldiers of most countries as disposable cannon-fodder.
This itself is one of the most sinister crimes against all of us and is a well-planned attempt to destroy Goyim men and prevent them from defending America from the KM’s “final solution” and final revenge for ever leaving England which is the mass-murder of 90% of all people worldwide - not just Americans; a repeat of what they did in Russian in 1917 and China in 1945.
The Judiciary, Corrections and Police Cartel
is used to run interference and cover-ups for the Establishment Hierarchy.
It America it is staffed by mostly Israeli-American “Israeli-first” Dual Citizens and ex-Jag Officers who serve the Establishment Hierarchy no matter what.
6. The Big Medicine Cartel
Controls all medical schools, all medical, dental and nursing degrees, the CDC, the FDC and all health policies.
Like all other Establishment Hierarchy Cartels it serves the Hierarchy’s needs and serves up limited truth about all health problems and is oriented to making people sick in order to gain maximum profits and control of the masses by weakening them and asset stripping them.
The Big Pharma Cartel
This cartel has been designed to work closely with the Big Medicine Cartel in a symbiotic arrangement where each feeds the other and increases business for each other.
This is a sinister result of what good be an asset that has turned bad, becoming a tool to gain major profits at the expense of the health and financial well-being of people.
The Agricultural Cartel
This cartel has been created by infiltrating and hijacking corporations that buy, broker and process grains and produce.
It is associated with the banks in various financing schemes designed to result in the loss of family farms to become part of large corporate farms.
The Major Mass Media Cartel
This is best described as the Controlled Major Mass Media (CMMM). It uses an Intel proprietary to vet every single story carried by the news networks which actually function as a virtual and illegal Monopoly.
This KM proprietary is a major Investment House that claims to be on the Vanguard of progressive investments.
The Entertainment Cartel
This is based on the sophisticated mind-kontrol served up by Hollywood and the Television networks and movie theaters. It controls the culture, values and mores of the group mind and and keeps the massed sedated and satiated.
When folks experience frequent “shoot em up” action scenario’s sitting in front of large screen TVs and in movie theaters and frequently see the impossible, this satiates their expectations and exhausts their motivation to actually change society for the better.
Many have become so “programmed” mentally by the TV and movies that they have trouble distinguishing between fantasy and reality and easily accept their mind-kontrolled state.
The Bread and Circuses Cartel
This is Big Sports designed to keep the masses appeased so they don’t have time to become concerned about how the Establishment is ripping them off at every level nor any inclination to be motivated to stop them from doing so.
The Romans came up with the idea that if you keep the people fed, watered and entertained - distracted - the 'elite' can get away with anything, behind the scenes. Today we have professional sports hysteria, mass media movies, mindless reality TV and music filling that role nicely, while subconsciously programming the masses with the themes and thoughtforms the elite decide on to further their agendas
"Bread and circuses" (or bread and games; from Latin: panem et circenses) is metonymic for a superficial means of appeasement. In the case of politics, the phrase is used to describe the generation of public approval, not through exemplary or excellent public service or public policy, but through diversion; distraction; or the mere satisfaction of the immediate, shallow requirements of a populace, as an offered "palliative."
Its originator, Juvenal, used the phrase to decry the selfishness of common people and their neglect of wider concerns. The phrase also implies the erosion or ignorance of civic duty amongst the concerns of the commoner.
Much of the violence and filth we have to live with can be directly attributed to this powerful mind-kontrol system which operates by the power of 60 HZ conditioned susceptibility, hypnosis for many. Hollywood superstars are paid big money because what they do is important to the Establishment Hierarchy, in terms of mind-kontrolling the masses and much of the world.
The Religious Cartel
Sad to say that the KM has infiltrated and hijacked almost every major religion in the World, including the Vatican and Catholicism, Lutheranism and all the rest.
The illegal, unConstitutional tax exempt status regulation for churches has kept them in line and restricted them from getting involved in politics or preaching much truth related to evil in the highest echelons of their own governments, local, state and federal.
The Secret Society Cartel
The KM has established a worldwide network of secret occult-based societies which form the secret associations that control almost every major Institution from the top echelons.
This network is closely associated with Intel groups and actually has been secretly deputized as agents of national security which gives them immunity from any prosecution.
This Cartel uses various occult groups in its network such as satanic cults like the Process to do its dirty work, often assassinations, gang-stalking, secret break-ins and other crimes for the Intel Agencies who want distance and deniability.
There are cases where certain occult members who have embarked on missions to assassinate targeted individuals who have been clipped by a well-trained intended target and these incidents never get into the light of day for what really happened.
As more and more Americans are becoming armed under the new concealed carry “shall issue” laws, it is not so easy anymore for these occult groups to assassinate targeted individuals without getting clipped in the process.
The Government and Politics Cartel
This involves a coordinated system that controls all governments.
Various manipulations are used to bring conformity to the wishes and edicts of the Establishment Hierarchy such as political favors, bribery, human compromise and even harassment, threats and assassinations often disguised as medical illnesses.
15. The Arms Cartel
This is one of the biggest money makers for the wealthy KM families that own large blocks of stock in these defense contractors, especially those with no-bid contracts which are also involved in kidnapping and sex-slavery.
War is extreme profitable for the FRS Banks and these KM investor Families.
And that is why the Hierarchy pulls so many strings to hire mercenaries to conduct Gladio-style, inside-job false-flag attacks in order to start illegal, unConstitutional, unprovoked, undeclared, unwinnable, perpetual foreign wars.
Because the Russian Republic has checkmated this war-making process in the Mideast, it is likely that the KM is planning on transforming America into a large GAZA II war-zone and eventually into the World’s largest open-aired prison camp while they complete their goal to depopulate America by 90%.
The Narcotics Cartel
This is the most lucrative KM Cartel of all, next to the Money Cartel, which is the “head of the snake”. Retired DEA officials have privately spoken out and claimed that most of the large Wall Street banks would go under in a month unless they could launder the vast fortunes obtained from the Establishments with their international drug trafficking, especially into America.
The richest, top Establishment Hierarchy (KM) families who are in the upper crust dress with the most expensive clothes, live in big mansions, and attend charity events and give token amounts from their vast tax exempt charitable foundations pretending to be caring folks, when they are actually the most two-faced and evil of all, and directly gain from the enormous drug cartel profits which they hid in these tax exempt foundations and draw money out as long term loans and “operating expenses”.
This vast illegal drug income is split with the Intel agencies, who use it for black ops money and personal gain.
There is some good news with all this bad news.
Recently the KM has been completely checkmated for the very first time, and this has been accomplished in Syria by Putin and the Russian Federation with its use of superior state of the art air power at its ally Syria’s request.
Not only that, numerous new economic, trade and monetary coalitions have developed, which in time will sink the US Petro Dollar as the World’s Reserve Currency, maybe sooner than later.
Thus we see the BRICS Development Bank emerging, followed by the Chinese AIIB System and CIPS, the Chinese version of the Swift money-wire system.
Already most of the world’s governments (except the USA and Israel) have either signed up for BRICS or sent letters of intent.
Private trade deals have been negotiated between China, Russia and other nations, which are for the first time conducting trade without the use of the US Petro Dollar. Even Saudi Arabia is beginning to negotiate with the Chinese about mutual new trade deals without using the US Petro Dollar.
The die is set, and no matter how much the Federal Reserve System and its partner in crime the US Department of the Treasury monetize the US foreign debt by buying it back with newly issued but worthless debt-notes, it is only a matter of time until the whole global Reserve Banking system collapses under its own massive Ponzi scheme of financial fraud and fake money.
How can we stop this insidious monster the KM and its Establishment Hierarchy that has hijacked almost every American institution using the extreme power of its debt-note counterfeit money-magick? They have done this by buying or bribing almost every single government official and Judge including five of the now eight US Supreme Court Justices?
This is a difficult question to be sure. The best way is for the spontaneous emergence of a large scale mass populist awareness all over America at every level. This is in process now thanks to the increasingly negative economic situation and the alternative news on the Worldwide Internet, the World’s New Gutenberg Press. Worldwide now there are coodinated efforts to take this cabal down and recently huge advancements in these areas have been made that are not permitted to be spoken of in the mainstream media- yet.
As more and more people worldwide wake up to this and find out about the KM, the Establishment Hierarchy and the Select Few that run it, more and more of us will become motivated to dissent, protest and work hard to change this at every level instead of wasting most of their free time on TV entertainment and bread and circuses.
Abject secrecy is necessary for the KM’s survival and power. Up until recently, any presentation of such realities to one’s family or friends usually resulted in the accusation that such was conspiracy theory or crackpot Internet stuff.
Lately with all the government lies exposed even in the CMMM, especially when economic statistics are reported that everyone knows are clearly lies, folks are catching on and beginning to listen to such talk and believing it for the first time.
The best way would probably be for a patriotic faction of the US Military High Command to stage a coup d’état and cut the head off of the snake by arresting all of the top Hierarchy members for Treason, Sedition and RICO crimes against America, especially the Select Few.
The problem is that the Hierarchy’s control over all institutions has reached the point that we are possibly going to have to see the Hierarchy and the KM destroyed by the geopolitical and geo-economic manipulations of Russia, China and its new economic allies all around the world.
As this new reordering of monetary systems and trading nations emerges, the death of the US Petro Dollar is imminent, and when that happens the power of the KM and its Establishment Hierarchy and system of interlocked Cartels will collapse.
In fact, every single one of the KM Cartels listed above is being exposed and many are being checkmated by dissident people from all walks of life, including retired Intel, government officials and many of the now well-informed public.
In addition, the Russian Federation, China and their new associations with BRICS nations and AIIB participants are seeding the complete disempowerment and destruction of the KM and the Establishment Hierarchy.
The KM knows its end seems imminent, and had built Malaysia and China into economic powerhouses to later parasitize as their new hosts after they had reduced the USA to rubble and dead bodies.
But the Chinese have very long memories and their leaders have connected the dots and are hip to this and working closely with Putin and the Russian Federation to prevent this.
In the not too distant future, there will likely be no place to hide for the KM and their Establishment Hierarchy.
Stay tuned, because in a future article, an attempt will be made to explain why the KM members are so two-faced and so remarkably inhuman and evil. We need to explore why they are able to order individual murders and mass-murders of innocent civilians in war at the drop of a hat with absolutely no remorse.
We need to learn why they enacted extreme rules of engagement with We The People, while never expecting that someday the same rules of engagement could be directed back at them systematically at all levels.
Obama Speech: Does He Hint At His Premature Resignation And Pending Death Penalty?
May 12 2016 | From: Ellaster
May 5th 2016, Neil Keenan placed a statement and video message on his blog with a remarkable message: Obama surrendered, secretly resigned and handed over his power to the General Joseph Dunford.
This information was handed to Keenan through various sources, yet it might be dis-info deliberately disclosed to him, a common Cabal tactic. However given Obama’s speech he gave at the White House Correspondent’s Dinner, a couple of striking remarks makes you wonder what is going on behind the scenes.
At The White House Correspondent’s Dinner (WHCD) is a yearly event for journalists associated with the White House, and is attended by the president and vice president. This dinner traditionally takes place at the Washington Hilton since 1920. It is organised by the White House Correspondents’ Association, an organisation of journalist who cover the White House and the President of the United States.
On April 30th 2016 Obama’s final WHCD took place and traditionally he gave a speech in advance.
The tone of the speech was more like a performance of a stand-up comedian rather than a presidential speech. Most likely the text was not written by Obama himself and it was full of jokes.
Various people within journalism and politics were either taken the piss out of, or put in the spotlight in a comical way. Obama himself looked drugged, although he was still capable to give the speech. All this made the audience euphoric and they began to laugh heartily once Obama started his recitation.
Obama started by saying:
"It is an honor to be here at my last, and perhaps the last White House correspondents’ dinner.”
Is this the first hint at the big changes that are taking place? Why would this be the last WHCD? Why would this yearly tradition not take place with the newly elected president next year?
According to Neil Keenan’s sources prior to the WHCD dinner a back room deal was made in which Obama had handed over his power. Obama was cornered in such a way that he surrendered and handed over the control to General Dunford.
Whether this really took place was contradicted by Drake Bailey, who is however closely involved with The Plan to arrest many political figure heads in the US for high treason, including Obama.
The many insinuations made by Obama during his WHCD speech, do imply that something is going on behind the scenes. Obama continued his speech by saying:
"You all look great. The end of the Republic has never looked better.”
The end of the republic? Which republic? The republic of the United States incorporated? Or is it an implication to the end of another republic?
Obama continued his talk: “I do apologize. I know I was a little late tonight. I was running on CPT” Does he imply he was running on drugs?
Or should we have heard “I was running on Cpt. (Captain)” and what does this mean then? But to exhilarate his speech everything was wrapped up in a joke, and he continued by saying “…CPT… which stands for jokes that white people should not make.” The unsuspecting audience doubled up with laughter.
Around 3:20 minuted in the video below, again Obama made a remarkable comment. He looked back at his 8 years as president and compared his earlier looks with his present looks.
"Eight years ago, I was a young man full of idealism and vigor. And look at me now, I am gray, grizzled and just counting down the days to my death panel.”
Despite this Obama kept his crowd laughing and read the rest of his speech, which was by no doubt prepared by an entire team in the weeks prior to the dinner.
Around 23:45 minutes a funny video in MTV style was shown about the departure of the president. At 24:30 minutes there is a scene where the president makes a phone call in search for a job for after his resignation.
He calls the Washington Lizards and asked them whether they need a coach. Around 25 minutes there is another peculiar fragment in the video. Obama makes a selfie with Michelle’s phone, using the app Snapchat, which allows you to morph your portrait into another creature.
Interestingly enough Obama is shown as a shape-shifter with a clear resemblance to scenes in the (disclosure) movie "They Live."
At the end of the speech (32:25 minutes in the Youtube-video) Obama says: “With that I just have two more words to say: Obama out.”
He then makes a Freemason hand gesture with two fingers on his lips while he drops the microphone with his other. This Freemason symbol means ‘it is my duty to keep the secret’.
It is also a sign to other members of the secret society to remain silent. I interpret the dropped microphone as a sign ‘I will make no public announcement’.
According to Neil Keenan’s sources Obama had not returned to the White House since and no longer lives there. To keep up appearances he pretends he is still commander-in-chief although he will solely remain the spokesperson.
Allegedly the real person in charge is General Dunford. However, it is the intent to keep things ‘business as usual’ for the outside world, while General Dunford is in charge of the Republic until the presidential elections have taken place.
The claim that Dunford is in charge is contradicted by Thomas Williams, who together with Drake Bailey presents the weekly Cosmic Voice radio show. He says about the alleged take over: “General Dunford is like the Magic Man, he seems to appear in all kinds of events, but nothing ever comes off of it".
On the Cosmic Voice Facebook page Thomas Williams wrote: “keep hearing for over 12 months that Dunford is doing this and that with zero evidence of any of it.”
It is remarkable that Drake Bailey, with his many [supposed] contacts at the Pentagon and American army, cannot confirm Neil Keenan’s claim.
As this is confusing enough in itself, the big question remains why was this information leaked to Neil’s team and not shared by Drake’s sources? Is it deliberate dis-info disclosed to Group-K (Keenan’s team), and if so, what is the hidden agenda?
According to Thomas Williams there is raging a fierce inner battle between the various factions of the Illuminati behind the scenes. He thinks that the story that Neil Keenan has brought out is the script of the Asian faction who think they can become the new NWO (New World Order).
It has now become very clear that both Drake Bailey and his assistant Thomas Williams are woefully out of their depth.
Given all the debts that the US has with the Chinese, could it be possible that Obama is put under pressure and might have changed sides, perhaps the side of the Asian Cabal?
Let’s not forget that April 30th is an occult date with great importance to the Satanists, so why was this specific date chosen for the alleged power transfer?
For now, the claims about the power transfer and Obama’s speech raise more questions than it clears things up.
One thing is clear though, things do not quite look like ‘business as usual’ due to another significant fact. Obama has signed a premature Executive Order (Facilitation of a Presidential Transition) on May 6th to transfer his control, something that normally would take place after the presidential elections. So who did he transfer his control to?
The exact meaning of the recent events will get clear as more information will come out. That something is brewing is one thing that is for sure.
On Friday April 22nd, the “historical climate deal” – better known as “Paris Agreement” – was signed by 174 member states of UN, with moderate fanfare. The atmosphere around the event was, of course, forcibly euphoric – if tad awkward – with new designated climate groupie, Leonardo di Caprio, chanting the spent “we must act now!” mantra, and UN luminaries jumping around in somewhat masturbatory orgy of self-congratulating.
However, all this serves to hide the fact that, from the stand point of catastrophic global warming fan club, the deal is a failure. Namely, the main drive behind the 21st Conference of the Parties (meaning: sovereign member states of UN participating in UNFCC) in Paris, which ended on 12.12.2015, producing a 31 page draft agreement, was to impose a binding treaty and not merely an agreement; something that apparently did not materialize.
The proceedings of COP21 and presentation of “historical climate deal” came to pass in a surreal atmosphere of feigned urgency and strange mixture of ecstatic delight which, however, was confined to a tiny circle of participants, environmentalist activists and their mainstream media entourage.
This strange display of few chosen men and women rejoicing at imaginary solution to imaginary crisis was largely overlooked by populous which is, at least semi-consciously, becoming resistant to climate alarmism, if for nothing else, then because every lie has it’s expiration date and global warming scare is approaching 27th anniversary of it’s grand entry into mass media channels.
Be that as it may, Paris agreement is a compilation of “shoulds” while it was obviously meant to be a legally binding codification of “shalls”: while sovereign state is an endangered species in this world, it is obviously not yet extinct to such an extent that majority of world leaders would ratify the treaty that would de jure install the apparatus of global governance on pretext of combating ecological crisis.
The Paris Treaty is, in this author’s opinion, falling short of this aim miserably as it could have been anticipated even in the September of last year, when UN presented it’s latest Agenda, the so called Agenda 2030.
Namely, doctrine of sustainable development, and not empirical research of esoteric “climate science”, is a main purpose, and consequently: the main drive, behind the climate scare road show.
This doctrine, under various names, is being steadily pushed as an official ideology of Euro-Atlantic Bloc from early Seventies of the previous century, and it doesn’t really require global warming to make it work upon the minds of gullible.
If there’s any solid constant in protean “enemy image” upon which the system of sustainable development must be built, then it would be “overpopulation”, the inherently genocidal idea pervading all flavors of this doctrine.
Sustainable development is, simply put, a system of world encompassing control conceived to automatically self-differentiate and develop it’s functions on the basis of fear.
All it really requires is one absolute outside threat which cannot be removed but only infinitely mitigated by unified action of mankind.
This enemy image is, of course, just an image, because such threat doesn’t exist and every basis chosen by sustainability programmers has a definite expiration date. On closer analysis, the Agenda 2030document already indicated that “global warming” scare is reaching this date.
It was not very prominent among other “17 sustainability goals” and now it is slowly giving way to another cosmic Osama bin Laden, invoked to make us survey and control ourselves through fear: global – or to be more precise: European-based terrorism.
Intended Nationally Determined Contributions (INDCs) in reducing greenhouse gases, which serve as a basis of reaching the goal of keeping the global average temperature – whatever the hell that is – under „2 °C above pre-industrial levels and pursuing efforts to limit the temperature increase to 1.5 °C above pre-industrial levels, recognizing that this would significantly reduce the risks and impacts of climate change.“ (PA, 2.1. (a)), are far cry from what global warming dupes would like to see implemented.
"The fact that solar warming is heating up all the planets strongly suggests that global warming on our planet is not being caused by human activity at all. "
While we can detect some sporadic attempts to link “climate catastrophe” with demographical shifts from Middle East towards Europe, it is all too obvious, even to the dupes, that those shifts, while obviously man-made, have nothing to do with climate.
Moreover, while until now each and every draught, warm winter or forest fire was pointed out as an unmistakable sign of coming end times, the warm European winter of 2015/2016. apparently flew under the radar of alarmists.
This is also one of the clear signs that climate scare is finally spent, admittedly not by efforts of critics, nor by crumbling of pseudo-scientific edifice of advocates, but simply by quite banal passage of time.
However, here we are presented with difficulty. The publicly visible “world leaders”, grouped roughly around UN and Davos summits, are acting as if everything is still business as usual. The situation is surreal: while majority of people are ridiculing them – that is, those that pay them any attention at all – individuals like Christina Figuerres or Bill Gates are still chanting their same old mantras.
This is quite worrisome. Namely, someone could infer that they are simply delusional, finalizing their detachment from reality, and leave it at that. However, this is only half-true.
The whole truth, as it seems, is that their detachment from reality is the result not of mere mental blindness, but of power inflicted darkening of the minds. This is unmistakable sign of complete detachment of power from the “people”, i.e. masses of humanity or self-conscious groups in their midst.
The global elites are not deluded by their stupidity, but by their confident belief that they cannot be challenged. And, judging by signs of the times, they are quite right. So, when they continue to push global warming scare despite the fact that most people are becoming conscious of it being a sham, this could very well mean that they don’t feel any need to deceive anyone anymore.
Moreover, sustainable development is a true reason for existence of global warming scare and it is a doctrine that can gradually discard it for the sake of some better and more convincing principle, if need be. After all, this is why the Paris treaty exists in the first place:
“This Agreement, in enhancing the implementation of the Convention, including its objective, aims to strengthen the global response to the threat of climate change, in the context of sustainable development and efforts to eradicate poverty (…)“ (PA, 2.2)
The main novelty of Agenda 2030 is the first of it’s 17. sustainable development goals: “1. End poverty in all it’s forms everywhere” (A2030, pg. 12), which is to be accomplished until 2030. So we are expected to believe that the main constituent of human condition – namely, material misery – will be decommissioned from existence in 14 years period.
Those who believe that UN luminaries really buy into this crap are sporting minds of ten to twelve years old children; anyone, with just a modicum of common sense, must conjecture that something else is afoot here.
However, for our purpose, it is sufficient to point out that intersection of climate change, sustainable development and final solution of poverty is a basis for Paris Treaty.
And in this intersection, there exists hierarchy where sustainable systematization of world resources – human, environmental and economical is at the top, encompassing the other two. Both lower aims are expendable, because they’re merely pretexts for accomplishing sustainable development world-wide.
The very fact that globalist spokespersons are seriously spinning yarns no one in his right mind can believe in, goes to show that the power of lower strata of society – and that’s approximately everybody under the level of mainstream media pundits and professional politicians eligible for employment in global institutions – is at the all times low. And the members of higher strata are, explicitly or implicitly, aware of it.
So there’s no reason to gloat about idiocy of our rulers, because it is not really an idiocy but just a normal conduct stemming from the fact that they are not paying us any attention anyway.
Admittedly, the stories are getting thinner and narratives crumble as they are being written.
But is it because we are so smart?
Or is it because we are so detached from any kind of control over our livelihoods that those that have a firm grip on it, via control of media, politics and finance, really don’t bother to deceive us anymore?
To learn more about Agenda 2030, listen to this interview with Branko Malić on the Sunday Wire radio show with host Patrick Henningsen…
Massive Vaccine Protests Erupt In China Over Widespread Deaths Of Children: Government Responds By Arresting Protesters
May 11 2016 | From: NaturalNews
Recently, a massive vaccine scandal in China exposed the weakness of government efforts to build up China's immunization program. It uncovered the system's flaws regarding the way in which vaccines are distributed, and revealed close links between vendors and government clinics.
Although the vaccines were made by licensed manufacturers, they were transported and stored without any refrigeration, and then sold by unlicensed distributors. Improper storing conditions may have ruined the vaccines, leaving children unprotected and at risk of disabilities and death.
According to Li Guoqing, who is in charge of drug supervision, investigators revealed how government clinics have been selling expired or near-expired vaccines to vendors on the cheap, who in turn have been selling them to other government clinics in remote areas where there is no oversight.
Authorities were well aware of these practices, and let an illegal vaccine shop continue its operations, thereby poisoning thousands of its citizens, especially young children.
Chinese parents have lost all confidence in the government and government clinics, and are demanding answers.
People across the country have gathered and joined forces in a nationwide protest over the vaccine scam. Dozens of Chinese parents have filed a lawsuit demanding justice for the children who have been harmed by these tainted, improperly stored vaccines, amid reports of child and infant deaths and illnesses following such immunizations.
"Everybody gathered outside the National Health and Family Planning Commission today, and then we all marched to their complaints department in the Xizhimen district," parent activist Liu Lixin told Radio Free Asia (RFA).
"We are calling for a vaccines law, because there is no legislation covering vaccinations right now, and families who have been victims of this disaster have no judicial redress," he said.
"Our children have suffered varying degrees of harm and disability as a result of immunization injections," the lawsuit reads. "Some have even lost the ability to live independently."
China Jailing Vaccine Protesters
The impact of the scandal couldn't be brushed under the carpet, so the Chinese government announced that 357 officials have been dismissed or demoted for "poor performance," and has promised to take further actions to ensure better storage and distribution methods.
However, the reality seems a bit different. As many as 2,000 people gathered outside the Health and Family Planning Commission in Beijing, among them many parents whose children have been affected.
The authorities took large numbers of people participating in the protests or lawsuits to an out-of-town unofficial detention center, and some were put under 24-hour surveillance at their homes.
"I had planned to take part [in the Beijing protests and lawsuits], but I was forcibly escorted home by officials from my hometown on April 13," parent activist Wang Liangqing said.
"Now they are watching us 24 hours a day, so we weren't able to go." Wang called on the government to take the victims of tainted vaccines seriously.
This incident is a perfect example of how governments collude with Big Pharma, and the U.S. isn't doing any better.
Soon, we will have no say when it comes to our own health. The CDC has set up a "police state" registry system to identify and track areas of so-called "under vaccination," and while this may seem like innocent data gathering, in the future people will be pushed to follow national vaccination guidelines against their own will.
And, just as in China, key people in the U.S. government are involved. Last year, California's vaccine mandate bill SB277 was halted by the public. Unfortunately, the vaccine mafia's henchmen came out to play, and helped replace seats on the committee with pro-vaccine activists to vote in favor of stripping Californians of their vaccine exemption rights.
The Positive Choice Wellness Center Calls Out Sun Avoidance As “Misguided” May 11 2016 | From: Mercola
Over the past 40+ years, dermatologists have promoted the idea that you should never be exposed to direct sunlight because it will damage your skin and cause skin cancer.
You might wonder, well what about vitamin D? No problem, as according to the American Academy of Dermatology, vitamin D deficiency can easily be addressed with vitamin D supplements.
What they fail to acknowledge and appreciate is that when you’re exposed to sunlight, many important biological processes occur in your skin, not just vitamin D production.
This is separate from swallowing oral vitamin D, which is an important but, according to many experts, clearly inferior alternative. While it will improve your vitamin D status, you forgo the many benefits sunlight offers aside from vitamin D production.
Weighing the Risks and Benefits of Sun Exposure
Unfortunately, the entire focus of most dermatologists is preventing skin damage, which means ignoring the other side - the benefits - of the sun exposure equation.
This includes heightened protection against a number of internal cancers and other chronic diseases, including heart disease, which kills far more people than melanoma does.
Ironically, recent research shows that vitamin D also improves survival outcomes for melanoma patients. It’s also important for cognitive health, immune function, healthy pregnancy and infant development, and strong, healthy bones, just to name a few.
As noted in a recent news report:
"Fifteen to 20 minutes in sunlight a day helps your body produce the vitamin D it needs to absorb calcium and promote bone growth and keep the heart healthy. But sunscreen - important to protect against skin cancer - reduces the body's ability to manufacture the vitamin.
Doctors can be torn on recommending time in the sun when too much and too little both have consequences.”
Ths would explain NZ's record high rates. If you are still eating corporate / corpse chemicals, or putting them anywhere near your body, you need your head read. Its a corporate death cult - the goal being population reduction.
Sun Avoidance Decreases Melanoma Risk But Increases All-Cause Mortality
A recent study driving home these benefits was completed in Sweden. More than 25,500 Swedish women between the ages of 25 and 64 were followed for 20 years. Detailed information about sun exposure habits and confounding factors were obtained and analyzed in a “competing risk” scenario.
Overall, women who got regular sun exposure had a lower all-cause mortality risk—likely due to their increased vitamin D levels.
Women with active sun exposure habits ended up having a lower risk of cardiovascular disease and non-cancer death compared to those who avoided the sun. Of particular note:
“Nonsmokers who avoided sun exposure had a life expectancy similar to smokers in the highest sun exposure group, indicating that avoidance of sun exposure is a risk factor for death of a similar magnitude as smoking.
Compared to the highest sun exposure group, life expectancy of avoiders of sun exposure was reduced by 0.6–2.1 years.”
Other Research That Puts Melanoma Risk Into Perspective
Previous research has shown that when sunlight strikes your skin, nitric oxide is released into your bloodstream and nitric oxide is a powerful blood pressure lowering compound.
This has led researchers to conclude that sun exposure may prolong your life by significantly cutting your heart attack/stroke risk. One 2013 study mentions an absolutely stunning statistic.
For every one skin cancer death in northern Europe, between 60 and 100 people die from stroke or heart disease, related to hypertension. Knowing your risk of dying from heart disease or stroke is 80 times greater on average than from skin cancer really puts it in perspective.
While higher vitamin D levels correlate with lower rates of cardiovascular disease, oral vitamin D supplements do not appear to benefit blood pressure, and the fact that supplements do not increase nitric oxide may be the reason for this.
According to researcher Richard Weller:
“Nonsmokers who avoided sun exposure had a life expectancy similar to smokers in the highest sun exposure group, indicating that avoidance of sun exposure is a risk factor for death of a similar magnitude as smoking.
Compared to the highest sun exposure group, life expectancy of avoiders of sun exposure was reduced by 0.6–2.1 years.”
Prime Minister John Key took the unusual step of arranging a 1pm Saturday press conference to respond to allegations from the anonymous source behind the Panama Papers.
This morning, the source – named only as John Doe – released an 1800 word statement on the website of the International Consortium of Investigative Journalists (ICIJ), the group that has released various documents leaked from Panama-based law firm and foreign trust specialist Mossack Fonseca.
Mr Key was the only world leader named in the statement.
"I have as much responsibility for tax in the Cook Islands as I do for Russia," said Mr Key this afternoon.
"Prime Minister John Key of New Zealand has been curiously quiet about his country’s role in enabling the financial fraud Mecca that is the Cook Islands," John Doe wrote (in his statement's only reference to Mr Key or New Zealand).
But at his 1pm press conference, the PM said, "The whistleblower has got confused about my responsibilities. I have no responsibilities fro the tax jurisdiction of the Cook Islands. New Zealand has responsibilities for foreign policy and defence of the Cook Islands, but not for tax. I have as much responsibility for tax in the Cook Islands as I do for tax in Russia."
Video of Key's full stand-up:
Closed Down After 1988
Asked about why the Panama Papers leaker would tie the Cook Islands to Mr Key, he said he asked tax officials about it this morning and they replied with the theory that "He or she is likely to be European, and Europeans get terribly confused about the Cook Islands because they use New Zealand dollars."
It's also possible, however, that the "confused" European was making a reference to the winebox controversy.
Comment: As has been previously observed, this whole 'Panama Papers' debacle is clearly being implemented to expose and wipe out some of the lower minions within the cabal. Very interesting indeed; that Mr Key should have the distinction of being the only western political figure to have been publicly named.
Key did make an oblique reference to thr Cook Islands scandal, saying: "Prior to 1988, there were issues with New Zealanders avoiding their tax by having a structure in the Cook Islands," he told reporters at his 1pm stand-up. In 1988 that all closed down and subsequently there have been no issues.
Since 1988, New Zealanders have been taxed on their worldwide income, the prime minister noted. He also added that the Cook Islands tax controversy was before his time.
No Responsibility, but Some Care [!?]
Commentator Bernard Hickey was quick to take issue with the prime minister on social media, saying;
“Has New Zealand pressured the Cook Islands to change its trust secrecy/info sharing laws? If not, why not? The Cook Islands uses the New Zealand dollar and Cook Island citizens are New Zealand citizens."
Mr Hickey added, If New Zealand is serious about not being tarred with the tax haven brush, why not stop the Cook Islands from being a tax haven?"
"New Zealand does actually try to support the Cook Islands in improving its tax and the way it operates its system," Mr Key said this afternoon, though qualifying, "It has its own double tax agreement, its own tax – sharing agreement and, over the years since 1988, New Zealand's been working with the Cook Islands to make sure they've got a better structure, and that they're operating in a way with much greater transparency."
The New Zealand government doesn't get directly involved but officials try to provide support and encourage the Cook Islands to have best practice, Mr Key said.
Earlier today, the Prime Minister's office released a statement saying an independent review of foreign trust disclosure rules is now under way by former PwC chairman John Shewan. Mr Shewan is due to report on June 30. Additionally, Inland Revenue is participating in an OECD review of international tax arrangements.
Overnight, there was more Panama Papers grief for the prime minister, with the Australian Financial Review name-checking his personal lawyer, Ken Whitney, in an extended report on how a controversial Mexican construction tycoon put $100 million into three tax-free New Zealand trusts.
More to Come
Today, Mr Key called New Zealand a "footnote" in the Panama Papers. That may be true so far but more could be revealed when a fully searchable version of the leaked Mossack Fonseca papers is released on May 9.
Peter Bale, the New Zealander behind the ICIJ, has already said he thinks there is more to come on New Zealand in the Panama papers.
And this morning on the Nation (where he was interviewed on the same programme as Mr Bale), Winston Peters said he agreed – and hinted he was ready to reopen his winebox.
“Well, I said some time ago that these papers would be very, very serious revelations because 11 and a half million documents and New Zealand mentioned 60 times and us being positioned here in the South Pacific giving aid to countries who were at the same time running tax haven utilities or using all sorts of fancy phrases for cheating and fraud and money laundering, I think that the mention of Mr Key relates to where they’re going to go in one part of the world on this matter," Mr Peters said.
For his part, John Doe said he (or she) was willing to cooperate with authorities "to the extent that I am able", expressing a willingness to help authorities but also noting actions taken against recent whistleblower including Edward Snowden, currently exiled in Russia.
Related: Is John Key “Inside Trading” with New Zealand’s Debt?
Hundreds Of Skull And Bones Secret Society Docs Set To Be Released
May 9 2016 | From: Infowars
Over 1,500 documents related to the secretive Yale fraternity Skull and Bones are set to be made public within the next few months under a Freedom of Information Act request.
The trove of “letters, memos, a draft speech and other materials… are set for release in July” by the National Archives and Records Administration unless President Obama or former President George W. Bush object, reports Politico.
“Additional records include vetting materials, emails related to scheduled events, a phone message, a press briefing on Turkey, a register of Frederick Law Olmsted’s papers at the Library of Congress, requests for comments from the press, and a request for Vice President Richard B. Cheney to attend William F. Buckley’s memorial service,” the FOIA states.
Founded in 1832, the secret society has been a gateway for the elite and boasts three US presidents, with other members taking up prominent roles in state and federal governments, the intelligence community, academia, industry and finance.
In 2004, for instance, both Democrat and Republican presidential candidates, John F. Kerry and George W. Bush, were members of the Yale fraternity. George W’s father, George H.W. Bush, and his grandfather, Prescott Bush, were also members.
The group’s “Tomb,” a windowless building located at the southwest end of the campus, is reportedly decorated with skulls and filled with rooms where members are rumored to conduct macabre rituals and initiation ceremonies, one of which may include the reciting of past sexual experiences, according to journalist Ron Rosenbaum.
“You could ask Averell Harriman whether there’s really a sarcophagus in the basement and whether he and young Henry Stimson and young Henry Luce (Time magazine) lay down naked in the coffin and spilled the secrets of their adolescent sex life to 14 fellow Bonesmen,” Rosenbaum wrote for Esquire in 1977.
The club was also sued in February 2009 by descendants of the Apache hero Geronimo, whom alleged in a federal lawsuit that the group was in possession of their ancestor’s skull – which members have posed with in group photos for decades.
The skull was reportedly stolen from the warrior’s grave at Fort Sill by members of Skull and Bones who were stationed at the base, with some accounts alleging Prescott Bush played a role in the theft. The lawsuit was dismissed the following year.
Rosenbaum and a team in 2001 were able to film rituals being conducted in the inner courtyard of the “Tomb,” where members “acted out the tableau of a throat-cutting ritual murder,” according to the journalist.
“Of course, there is more to Skull and Bones than the mystical mumbo-jumbo of its rituals,” Rosenbaum wrote for the New York Observer at the time.
“The rituals are less important than the relationships–the bonds of power and influence that develop between Skull and Bones initiates after they graduate.”
Politico reports the latest FOIA request was put forth by author and researcher Robert Gaylon Ross Sr., who has in the past published an exposé on the “Who’s Who of the Elite,” and written books regarding the elites’ role in the JFK and MLK assassinations.
Panama Papers: The Gift That Keeps On Giving & The Controversial Mexican Construction Tycoon Put $100m Into New Zealand Trusts, Report Says May 8 2016 | From: NationalBusinessReview / Various
Controversial Mexican construction magnate Juan Armando Hinojosa Cantu put around $US100 million into three tax-free trusts in New Zealand, according to a report by Neil Chenoweth - the only Australasian journalist who has been granted access to documents leaked from law firm Mossack Fonseca and known as the Panama Papers.
He also highlights a letter from Ken Whitney (Prime Minister John Key's personal lawyer at the time) in which Mr Whitney offered a professional endorsement for Auckland law firm Cone Marshall, which was seeking professional accreditation with Mossak Fonseca.
Mr Chenoweth doesn't make any accusation that any laws were broken, and NBR politics editor Rob Hosking says allegations of Mr Whitney's influence on foreign trust policy don't stack up. Nevertheless, Mr Chenoweth's article has become a fixture in the Australian Financial Review's top five most-read list - provides another spotlight on the foreign trust issue that the government will find unwelcome.
UnitedFuture leader Peter Dunne says ongoing Panama Papers revelations - and more are expected involving NZ once the ICIJ's database becomes searchable on May 9 - are potentially very negative.
“If the label ‘tax haven’ is being bandied about now as it is, sticks, then that’s extremely damaging. You think of the way we perceive other countries that we’ve historically labelled as tax havens. We don’t view them credibly, and I think that’s the big risk to New Zealand," he says, closely echoing concerns raised by IRD in 2013.
According to a New York Times report, Mr Hinojosa has been close to Mexican President Enrique Pena Neito since Mr Pena Neito was a young political aide.
Mr Hinojosa struck controversy in early 2015 after he built a $US7 million house for Mr Pena Neito's wife, but only $US3 million was paid upfront (the balance was covered by a promissory note).
Juan Armando Hinojosa Cantu
Around the same time, media highlighted that Mr Hinojosa had been awarded several large government contracts that did not go to tender. Several ran way over budget, to the benefit of his companies.
Mr Hinojosa was not charged with any wrongdoing, but companies associated with him did subsequently see several of their government contracts cancelled, including a $US3.7 billion rail contract.
The government has drafted former PwC chairman John Shewan to review rules around foreign trust disclose. He is due to report on June 30.
Silent Coup Beginning To Overtake America Now May 8 2016 | From: USAwatchdog
Former Clinton insider Larry Nichols has worked with, and now against, the Clintons. Nichols has some of the top political and financial connections on the planet.
Nichols hopes the public is finally realizing the enormous power struggle going on. Nichols explains;
“There is no two-party system in the United States of America. Let’s get that straight. There is no two-party system, there is one. Part of it is a red team and part of it is a blue team.
You think you have a choice, but as you know you only have a choice between the two they give you to vote for, but here comes Trump.
Trump doesn’t need their money . . . he will bust up the system, and he will not only bust up the system for the Republican Party, but he will bust up the system (for both parties).
So, there are many establishment Republicans that have said they would rather vote for Hillary than Trump. . . .
They must maintain status quo of the system for these power elite people to stay where they want to be.”
Nichols goes on to say, “We are at the beginning of a velvet or silent coup. It’s been going on for years. There’s been a slow subtle takeover of our form of government, starting years and years ago, but it is coming to an end. That’s why there is this power play now.
It’s more aggressive than you have seen before. If we don’t stop Hillary, it’s over.
Is Trump the answer to all of our problems? I don’t know. Here’s what I do know about Donald Trump. Donald Trump is not in the system. How do I know that? As hard as they are working to keep him out is a pretty good recommendation for me.
He’s not one of them. He might be a good president. When you mention Hillary or the establishment, there is no ‘might.’ With them, we would get what we have been getting but only worse. There is not a ‘might’ there.”
Nichols says the good news might come in the general election in November. Nichols explains;
“The American voters’ vote counts in the general election.
The play in the system has always been to trick it in the primaries and get both people that are the same but different colors. The general election has always been set up where people do get to vote, and they will get to pick the lessor of two evils.
This time, it’s different. This time, the American voters can make a difference if Trump can stay in and actually get the nomination.”
On the teetering financial system, Nichols says;
“One of the five major banks has way too much of that $72 billion Puerto Rican debt. It might not sink them, but it may cause a problem. If one of the major banks took a hit like that... The FDIC just said it does not have enough liquidity if two major banks went into default.
If one of the major banks falls or if one major bank was getting ready to take a nose dive, people would run on all the banks wouldn’t they? If everybody tried to cash their money out of the banks at one time, they would get about 6 cents on the dollar. You think you got a $100,000 protected in the bank - you don’t.”
Nichols, who is currently undergoing treatments for lung cancer, also says, “I believe President Obama doesn’t really want to leave. Now, how could he stay? It only takes a crisis. If a national crisis is declared . . . FEMA comes in.
Most people don’t even know about the FEMA provisional plan. In case a meteor hits America and we go into a national crisis, FEMA has already got a plan in place ready to go where they will set up a provisional government. So, if the banks were to start collapsing, guess what Obama would do?
He’d go to Congress and get them to vote and boom, in comes the provisional FEMA government, which makes the president . . . king.”
Join Greg Hunter as he goes One-on-One with former Clinton insider Larry Nichols.
There is much, much more in the extensive video interview.
Had Enough Of Government Corruption Kiwis? Here Is A Venue For Reporting, Exposing & Taking Action: The “Citizens Government Corruption Watchdog Commission” May 7 2016 | From: EnviroWatchRangitikei
By making these reports you are adding to a database of complaints that documents multiple violations. This makes the case for change much stronger and if the department concerned doesn’t act then we can take it to media for publication and to pressure change.
Mainstream media will probably be either forced to print our exposes or lose their place as Mainstream Media and those who DO share it will become the new “Mainstream Media”!
Those of you who think beyond the mainstream media … or even those who don’t … you’ve probably noticed a few things are not ticking the boxes lately regarding democratic processes.
One example would be the way District Councils appear to have minds of their own and increasingly they are failing to consult those who elect them regarding decisions that will be affecting them. Recently the Whaleoil blog featured the growing problem of local government breaking the law and points out that they get away with it because nobody is policing it. Check out the blog as there are many examples cited of things folks are encountering with their DCs.
Here is a recent example in Shannon where locals were consulted by their representing Councillor Ross Campbell on whether they wanted yet another liquor outlet licensed … overwhelmingly more were against than for (309 to 3) … yet the DC has gone right ahead and issued the liquor license anyway.
So who is this council batting for? Their constituents, or the liquor industry? No prizes for guessing. Shannon has also had recent issues with discharge by Council of raw sewage into the local waterways, an ongoing issue with many DCs NZ wide. Cr Campbell was trespassed for two years by HDC for filming the discharge of raw sewage into the town’s waterways. Shutting down dissent!
The street poll by Cr Ross Campbell in the Horowhenua district … the poll overwhelmingly against the issuing of yet another liquor license in Shannon, and the DC has gone and issued the one anyway
The Rangitikei DC was also exposed last year with regard to their long standing non compliance in relation to pollution of its waterways with leachate. They too shut down dissent by failing to accept the recommendation of their own Community Committee!
For further examples of local government corruption see our Local Govt Watch pages.
Health and Related Services
Then we have many services (formerly ‘government’, now ‘corporate’ departments) that blatantly ignore the rules and run rough shod over people. I heard of one for instance just recently. An older woman who was admitted to A & E at a public hospital, left in a cold corridor, no warm blanket, no buzzer, calling for the toilet, left for hours in her own feces then loudly told off! The patient was too sick to respond.
With recent events in our corporatized government departments we need a watch on our health care providers and their protocols, particularly with the elderly and the dying
Also, on the hospital subject, I heard recently of a dying patient on ‘nil by mouth’, without the family’s knowledge. On this horrific subject please google ‘Liverpool Care Pathway’ the thin end of the wedge in my opinion, to euthanasia. Now there’s huge debate as we know about that, however, since when do we administer ‘nil by mouth’ without explaining the rationale to the distressed relatives, whose loved one is crying out for water? And since when has this become the ‘norm’? Dying of thirst? I don’t recall any public discussion around this.
Weather Modification Practices
The other glaring elephant in the room on the topic of flagrancy is the practice of geoengineering… ie spraying us all daily with toxic chemicals then telling us it is only steam or condensation.
Or worse, “nothing doing here please move along you ‘conspiracy theorists'”.
There will be many more issues and other departments that spring to mind that need policing.
Reporting and Taking Action
When these various events happen we’re often left standing, mouth open, grasping for who to tell, or, we’re so deep in grief we’re unable to act. And from my experience, often nobody knows just who to tell anyway. Many have tried for instance in the geoengineering domain to approach the various authorities charged with protecting us from unhealthy toxic environments only to be told there’s nothing doing.
So here is a venue for you to report these various incidents. It’s easy to do, simply go to the site (links below) and fill in the appropriate form online (more forms to come).
The reports will be collated to reveal the extent of the respective complaints, all documented in reports and kept for evidence when confronting the department concerned, and/or for timely publishing on this and other websites, and on social media. Since our so called mainstream media is displaying a growing reluctance to fully air the truth, we can become a force to be reckoned with. This is people power!
“By making these reports you are adding to a database of complaints that documents multiple violations. This makes the case for change much stronger and if the department concerned doesn’t act then we can take it to media for publication and to pressure change.
Mainstream media will probably be either forced to print our exposes or lose their place as Mainstream Media and those who DO share it will become the new “Mainstream Media”!
Here are links to both the site and the new Facebook page (head there and ‘like’ the page, and get reporting. You can also report historic incidents).
Homeopathy Officially Recognized By Swiss Government As Legitimate Medicine To Coexist With "Conventional" Medicine May 6 2016 | From: NaturalNews
Broadening their definition of medicine, the Swiss government is announcing a positive shift toward alternative healing and complementary therapies.
For far too long, health insurance has guaranteed a monopoly for a system dominated by synthetic drugs.
The Swiss government is breaking out of that confining mold and allowing patients' health insurance plans to cover five new complementary therapies.
In May 2017, health insurance plans in Switzerland will be covering a variety of healing modalities, including homeopathy, acupuncture, traditional Chinese medicine, herbal medicine and holistic medicine. In this way, Switzerland will be bringing back the many healing arts that were used successfully in the past.
A shift away from the disease management, synthetic drug system
This shift toward integration will allow the Swiss healthcare system to heal, as it moves away from profiting off disease management. With the inclusion of these five eclectic healing modalities, Swiss healthcare will become more affordable. By legitimizing these true healing modalities, healthcare can compete to heal, empowering people instead of leaving them in an expensive cycle of side effects and negative outcomes.
Synthetic pharmaceutical "science" got its start in 1869, as experiments with coal tar were underway. The first drug was a sedative-hypnotic called chloral hydrate. Pharmaceutical companies got their start after experimenting with nasty coal-tar distillations.
Many of the first drugs were modeled after textiles and dyes. The first analgesic and antipyretic drugs, phenacetin and acetanilide, were made from aniline and p-nitrophenol, which are just byproducts of coal tar.
Pharmaceutical "science," for the most part, is an absolute abandonment of the healing modalities that have sustained humans for centuries. The good news is that many herbalists are still around today, passing on the trade of making real medicine using plants. Plants synthesize their own medicine and contain compounds that, when extracted and used correctly, work in conjunction with the human body systems, restoring its healing state.
Swiss people speak out, pressure government to include complementary therapies on list of paid health services
After Swiss health authorities blocked the alternative medicine fields from legitimacy in 2005, the people of Switzerland spoke out. In 2009, two-thirds of the Swiss voted to include these five important healing modalities on the country's constitutional list of paid health services.
When 2012 rolled around, all five complementary healing modalities were included in basic compulsory insurance coverage as part of a six-year trial period. At the end of the trial period, determinations would be made based on the alternative therapies "efficacy, cost–effectiveness and suitability."
Holistic approaches are gauged through observation, in the progress of healing over time
Holistic therapies are not like synthetic drugs. The whole person is treated, not just a symptom. It's impossible to gauge an "alternative" therapy on paper, in a perfectly controlled environment.
Comment: The whole concept of "Alternative Therapies" and " Alternative Medicine" is madness from the outset.
Natural remedies that have been used successfully for thousands of years were marked as whackery - simply because the establishment could not patent them, profit from them; and nor would actual cures have worked in favour of their depopulation agenda. It's not rocket science once you are aware of the agendas.
The Pharmaceutical nightmare that has been launched upon humanity is the alternative medicine / therapy that is the actual threat for the most part.
And what an utterly horrific, profit-driven monstrosity at that.
The proof is typically in the observation, in the progress of healing over time.
And so, in this understanding, these five healing modalities will continue to be reimbursed by compulsory health insurance plans, as long as they are administered by certified medical professionals. This is an enormous step in the right direction for a healthcare system that is seeking to integrate more than just synthetic manipulations and suppression of the human body.
This shift toward integration of medicine will also allow questionable treatments within these complementary healing systems to face more scrutiny, so that the best holistic approaches can come out and be a success for people.
What Democracy Really Means, According To One Of Its Most Outspoken Champions May 5 2016 | From: HuffingtonPost
It’s not just about the will of the majority, said Yanis Varoufakis.
When Greece’s European creditors cut off emergency assistance to the beleaguered country’s banks last summer, bringing its financial system to the brink of collapse, it was only a matter of weeks before the Greek government capitulated to their demands.
When Greece’s European creditors cut off emergency assistance to the beleaguered country’s banks last summer, bringing its financial system to the brink of collapse, it was only a matter of weeks before the Greek government capitulated to their demands. A band of radical socialist politicians elected to upend the status quo agreed to the most onerous austerity package the country had yet experienced, in exchange for emergency loans it needed to repay mountainous debts to those same official lenders.
Yanis Varoufakis, a progressive economist, who as finance minister had been the most visible face of Greece’s new government and remains one of the country’s highest-profile political figures, resigned his cabinet post under pressure shortly before the deal was signed.
After leaving public office, he founded the Democracy in Europe Movement 2025. The goal of the pan-European initiative is to democratize the European Union institutions that enabled the financial blackmail against Greece last summer. Absent such change, DiEm25 argues, the united, peaceful and prosperous post-Cold War Europe will “disintegrate” in no more than a decade’s time.
But what exactly is undemocratic about the duly elected governments of the other 18 nations in the euro currency area imposing their will on the duly elected government of Greece? After all, in a democracy, the majority rules.
Varoufakis was in Washington on Wednesday to plug his new book about the European debt crisis, And The Weak Suffer What They Must? Europe’s Crisis And America’s Economic Future, so I asked him just that.
“Let me remind you that democracy is not the same thing as majoritarianism,” Varoufakis responded.
“If the majority decides to have the minority tortured, this is a tyranny of the majority and it has absolutely nothing to do with democracy. Democracy needs to combine majority with due process and with rights.”
Ex-Greek finance minister Yanis Varoufakis appears at an encampment of protesters in Paris opposed to neoliberal labor reforms. He believes the EU is undemocratic in its current form.
In Greece’s case, the analogy to torture is presumably leveraging Greece’s reliance on the European Central Bank to keep its troubled banks afloat to force it to accept painful economic measures rejected by its voters.
To illustrate his point, Varoufakis recounted a story from his first days as finance minister in January 2015. He met with Dutch finance minister Jeroen Dijsselbloem, the president of the Eurogroup, the powerful council of the individual eurozone nations’ finance ministers.
Dijsselbloem, according to Varoufakis, asked Varoufakis what his government’s intentions were for fiscal policy.
Varoufakis claims he gave a “very nuanced answer.”
“I said, ‘Well, we were elected to challenge that and to change that fiscal policy,’” Varoufakis recalled.
In Varoufakis’ mind, even this was a major compromise, since the previous six years of top-down European austerity policies imposed on Greece and other struggling countries on the European periphery had been a “macroeconomic failure greater than that in the history of humankind.”
“Nevertheless, let’s sit down and re-think this and find common ground,” Varoufakis remembered telling him. “I thought this was a very moderate thing to say. And it’s the minimum that respect for Greek democracy required.”
There is much to support Varoufakis’ economic critique of the eurozone’s actions up to that point. The drastic fiscal austerity Germany and other wealthy European nations had demanded from Greece since 2010 in exchange for emergency loans had succeeded in shoring up the German and French banks with Greek debts on their books, but had plunged Greece into a deep depression and state of political crisis. Nearly one in four Greeks is unemployed and its economy has shrunk by roughly one-third since 2008.
“Now the only way of describing this is as a coup d’état, as the dissolution of every democratic principle that has ever been withheld in Western civilization."
Worse still, the money is not even enough to allow it to pay off its creditors. The Mediterranean nation has had to return to the bargaining table on multiple occasions to ask for more cash, only to repeat the same never-ending cycle of re-payment, economic contraction, crisis and begging.
But Djisselbloem, Varoufakis said, was not having it. He reminded Varoufakis right away who held the poker chips, in a preview of the drama that would occur in late June and early July.
“If you insist on re-negotiating the fiscal policy of the previous government, your banks will be closed by the end of the month,” Djisselbloem said, according to Varoufakis.
“Now the only way of describing this is as a coup d’état, as the dissolution of every democratic principle that has ever been withheld in Western civilization,” Varoufakis said.
Greek voters re-elected Syriza, Varoufakis’ former political party, in September. Only this time, prime minister Alexis Tsipras campaigned on the promise of distributing the burden of austerity as equitably as possible, rather than reversing the approach entirely.
And there have been signs in recent months that the Greek government still has some fight left in it. It publicly tussled with the IMF in January over the need to cut pensions to reach its budget targets, rather than raising taxes to do so.
It also took the Fund to task in early April for a leaked conversation in which IMF officials implied that only a crisis-inducing credit event would prod Greece to do what is necessary.
Meanwhile, news outlets reported on Tuesday that talks between Greece and its international creditors had once again reached a standstill over reforms required to unlock a tranche of loans the country needs to make upcoming debt payments. Greece’s compliance with this round of demands is the price of opening up discussion of debt restructuring, according to the lenders.
Varoufakis, however, dismissed the idea that Greece has any say in the matter.
“The Greek government surrendered last July. This is why I resigned,” he said. “The Greek government will do anything that creditors ask it to do. They are just waiting for the creditors to decide what they want to impose upon Greece.”
Instead, the delays are due to a disagreement between Germany and the IMF, according to the former finance chief.
“There is no way they can agree, because the IMF understands that without a sensible debt restructure and a diminution in the primary surplus target, Greece is finished,” Varoufakis said.
In fact, while Greece’s ongoing influence is a matter of debate, the dispute between the IMF and Germany is no secret. The IMF - along with its largest shareholder, the United States - insists that Germany grant Greece debt relief and lower the budget targets it must meet, in order for Greece to regain its financial independence. Germany remains resistant to the idea.
The Greek prime minister’s office did not immediately respond to a request for comment on Varoufakis’ characterization.
Varoufakis argued that German officials had made debt relief politically impossible for themselves by falsely selling the original loans to Greece as a bailout for the Greek people, rather than as a bailout of the German and French banks, which stood to collapse if Greece could not pay up. Now the German parliament, with the backing of a bitter, tax-paying public, has no interest in cutting Greece any additional slack.
“There is no way they can agree, because the IMF understands that without a sensible debt restructure and a diminution in the primary surplus target, Greece is finished,” Varoufakis said.
“The creditors are now in a trap of their own making,” he concluded. “And Greece is fading into oblivion and into its awful, debt-deflationary crisis, while waiting for Washington, D.C., and Berlin to decide what to do.”
Iodine: The Miracle Mineral For Brain, Body And Spirit May 5 2016 | From: Sott
When most people think about iodine, they tend to think it's only good for the thyroid.
But it's not just the thyroid that is hungry for this mineral! Iodine is also concentrated in the salivary glands, the lining of the stomach and the small intestine, the breasts and ovaries, the eyes, and the part of the brain where cerebro-spinal fluid is produced.
Deficiency of iodine in any tissue can cause problems with that area of the body and weakens the immune system. Some symptoms of iodine deficiency are brain fog, nodules in the skin like are common with arthritis, fibrosis and fibroids, fibromyalgia, and chronic fatigue.
Iodine basically feeds your glands; it feeds all your cells. More researchers are rediscovering that this mineral has miraculous effects on the entire body.
The Nobel laureate Dr. Albert Szent Györgi (1893 - 1986), the physician who discovered vitamin C, wrote:
“When I was a medical student, iodine in the form of KI was the universal medicine. Nobody knew what it did, but it did something and did something good. We students used to sum up the situation in this little rhyme: If ye don't know where, what, and why Prescribe ye then K and I (iodine)."
Lynne Farrow author of The Iodine Crisis has written extensively about how iodine helps breast cancer and prevents mental retardation. It is well documented that iodine deficiency is the leading cause of mental retardation in the world.
Comment: Have a listen to this episode of the Health and Wellness Show to hear what Lynne Farrow has to say about iodine.
Lack of iodine negatively impacts your cognitive abilities because your brain needs sufficient iodine.
Beyond helping the brain function, sufficient iodine strengthens your will. People will be amazed at how strong their will becomes! This effect could be due to the fact that iodine removes fluoride out of the pineal gland - an endocrine gland located in the brain that is said to be the "seat of the soul."
The pineal gland is also referred to as the third eye, and acts as a gateway to Spirit and higher levels of consciousness, beyond our brain-created matrix.
Did you know that well over 90% of people are iodine deficient?
I find that really interesting. If iodine can be a miracle cure, why are we not being educated about its powerful effect on the body? Is it because it can't be patented and is not a money maker for the pharmaceutical industry?
How to get the iodine you need?
With the exception of seafood, including sea plants like seaweed, iodine is not found in great abundance in many foods. And, table salt is not going to help you get the iodine you need. Research shows that just ten percent of iodine in salt is completely absorbed by your body.
And, it provides miniscule amounts of iodine, far below the recommended dosage. Since we're on the topic of salt, you'll want to avoid white table salt when you do use salt. Instead, invest a little more money and get good Celtic sea salt or Himalayan salt.
Comment: Nascent iodine may not be the best form. According to Dr. Jeffrey Dach:
“Nascent (aka Magnascent, Detoxified, or Atomidine) - Based on Edgar Cayce's "energized" iodine. The iodine is reduced to a 1% concentration in 100% ethyl alcohol and electro-magnetically transmuted (while being suspended in a wet bath containing a mild acid solution) into the Atomic state.
1 drop = 150 microgram (mcg) or .150 mg of Iodine. This form will not saturate body tissues and has not been proven to detox halides such as bromide, fluoride, chloride, and mercury, as other forms have. This form of iodine is not recommended on this protocol as the goal is tissue saturation and halide detoxification/protection."
What do the experts say about dosage?
The RDA for iodine is around 150 mcg but according to Dr. David Brownstein, we should be getting far more than the government recommended dose. Dr. Brownstein and other researchers recommend doses ranging from 6-50 mg/day for most people.
Some researchers recommend high doses, like 50 to 100mg a day, to replenish the body's iodine and remove any microbes that have built up over the years because of the body's weakened immune system due to all toxins in our environment.
Given that iodine has no side effects like pharmaceuticals, and there is no development of resistance against it, it's hard to argue against taking high dosages.
How long does it take to reap the benefits?
While it can take many months to clear out toxins or to help something like ovarian cysts, the beneficial effects on the brain and energy levels are much faster. People who take iodine in sufficient amounts report that they have a greater sense of well-being, increased energy, and a lifting of brain fog and sharper mental abilities.
We Are All In This Together… May 4 2016 | From: Geopolitics
This has been and still is a long ride. To the weary and all those who are (or might be) losing hope…
“Over The Rainbow”
Somewhere over the rainbow way up high9lou7h6u7e4
There’s a land that I heard of once in a lullaby
Somewhere over the rainbow skies are blue
And the dreams that you dare to dream really do come true
Someday I’ll wish upon a star
And wake up where the clouds are far
Where troubles melt like lemon drops
Away above the chimney tops
That’s where you’ll find me
Somewhere over the rainbow bluebirds fly
Birds fly over the rainbow. Why then, oh, why can’t I?
If happy little bluebirds fly
Beyond the rainbow why, oh, why can’t I?
Keep well, everyone.
Boycott Tourism In NZ: More Fluorides? May 4 2016 | From: JonRappoport
Recently, I’ve written several articles about toxic fluorides (archive: here). The case is clear: cancer, lower IQ, other varieties of severe damage.
I became aware of a group in New Zealand, Fluoride Free NZ. They’ve had remarkable success working with local communities to ban fluorides in water supplies.
Jump in. Go for it. Send a message. A reader emailed me the letter he just wrote:
Dear Tourism New Zealand executive staff,
My name is Michael Blanshan. I am a naturopathic doctor in New Mexico, U.S.A. Years ago a group of friends and I were discussing New Zealand and all it has to offer as a country. Many of our group travelled to New Zealand and two families moved there, one to Nelso and one to Christchurch. These were good families with children and much to offer their local communities, not retirees looking for a country in which to retire.
In my own travels I often run into New Zealanders (aka kiwis). They are generally great travelers, good people, kind, open-minded, intelligent, and generally fun. The very spirit of New Zealand which most kiwis embody seems to me to serve as New Zealand’s best advertising.
Being a naturopath, I am keenly aware of the history of the fluoridation of drinking water, those who promoted this policy, their motivations for doing so, and the forms of pressure they use to continue the policy despite compelling scientific opposition. A local organization in New Zealand calling itself Fluoride Free NZ has worked tirelessly with communities to educate them on this issue.
They worked diligently and the majority of those communities have chosen not to fluoridate their local water supplies. In response to this group’s effectiveness, the NZ federal government is now acting to take the decision making authority away from local councils and communities and put the power into the hands of District Health Boards (DHB), who are under the direct control of Central Government.
This action has profound implications, though it may seem inconsequential to you, especially considering that you are a department for tourism. Though I stated that the people of New Zealand are its best feature, this is a black mark on New Zealand as a country. It points to a corruption of your federal government and its purported goals of serving its people. To the contrary, the government is showing that it has a will of its own and that it acts in the interests of other parties.
The policy of fluoridation originated in the U.S.A. in the 1940s. Many European countries have rejected this policy, knowing it was not about health but rather that it was the result of corrupt influences. For the New Zealand government to force this policy shows that they’re not interested in science or the natural rights of the people and worse, that the New Zealand government is caving to pressure from either American or UK interests.
Please understand that the irony of an American writing about corruption in government does not escape me. Educated Americans know all too well the workings and techniques of a dictatorship which presents itself as a democracy. It is as a result of the extreme corruption of the leadership of Western countries that we look to New Zealand and still see it to be a land of free individuals who can run their local communities as they like.
If the New Zealand federal government goes ahead with this decision, I personally will not visit New Zealand in the future. If any of my friends or clients discuss the possibility of travelling to New Zealand, I will do my best to dissuade them.
Potential visitors to New Zealand should know that all is not well in paradise and that behind the scenes you have the same dictatorship we see in the [rest of the] West. Despite all its physical beauty I still contend that the best part about New Zealand is its people.
If the people of New Zealand are forced to stand in the shadow cast by a dictatorial federal government, something vital and essential will have been lost.
Thank you, Fluoride Free NZ, for showing the way.
I keep hearing this thing called the Internet is a wonderful apparatus with many uses. Well, here’s one.
Comment: What does it take to wake these intentionally distracted master chef cooking-show home renovation watching reality -television watching idiots up already? Time is up!
Switzerland Follows Iceland In Declaring War Against The Banksters May 3 2016 | From: AustralianNationalReview "If you want to continue to be slaves of the banks and pay the cost of your own slavery, then let the bankers continute to create money and control credit." - Josiah Stamp
Iceland has gained the admiration of populists in recent years by doing that which no other nation in the world seems to be willing or capable of doing: prosecuting criminal bankers for engineering financial collapse for profit.
Inspired by Iceland’s progress, activists in Switzerland are now making an important stand against the banking cartels and have successfully petitioned to bring an initiative to public referendum that would attack the private banks where it matters most: their power to lend money they don’t actually have, and to create money out of thin air.
“Switzerland will hold a referendum to decide whether to ban commercial banks from creating money.
The Swiss federal government confirmed on Thursday that it would hold a plebiscite, after more than 110,000 people signed a petition calling for the central bank to be given sole power to create money in the financial system.
The campaign – led by the Swiss Sovereign Money movement and known as the Vollgeld initiative – is designed to limit financial speculation by requiring private banks to hold 100pc reserves against their deposits.” [The Telegraph]
Switzerland is in a key position to play a revolutionary role in changing how global banking functions. In addition to being the world’s safest harbor for storing wealth, it is also home to the Bank for International Settlements (BIS), a shadowy private company owned by many of the world’s central banks, and acting as a lender to the central banks.
The BIS is the very heart of global reserve banking, the policy that enables banks to lend money that does not actually exist in their bank deposits, but is instead literally created electronically from nothing whenever a bank extends a line of credit.
Reserve banking is the policy that guarantees insurmountable debt as the outcome of all financial transactions.
The Sovereign Money initiative in Switzerland aims to curb financial speculation, which is the intended and inevitable result of reserve banking, the tool that makes financial adventurism possible by supplying the banks with endless quantities of fiat money.
Limiting a bank’s ability to produce money from nothing would be a direct blow to the roots of the banking cartel, and would cripple their ability to manipulate the world economy. Here’s how it works, in rather simplified terms:
“…if we had access to the same computer terminals the banks have, we could magic in or out of existence all the imaginary stuff we are trained to think of as important – money – in whatever quantities we liked.
This is how it works: when they print quite a lot of this stuff there is a boom. When they print too much of it, there is inflation (actually, the printing of money is inflation). When they stop printing it or simply hold on to it, there is a depression.” [Source]
In Switzerland, 90% of all money in circulation is electronic, and for this, The National Bank of Switzerland has become the direct target of the Sovereign Money Campaign. Swiss law has in the past required required banks to back all currency creation with collateral assets like physical silver or gold, however in recent decades the climate has changed, and, “due to the emergence of electronic payment transactions, banks have regained the opportunity to create their own money.”
The grass roots campaign said in a public statement regarding the intentions of the referendum, “banks won’t be able to create money for themselves any more, they’ll only be able to lend money that they have from savers or other banks.”
This is an interesting twist in the human saga of man vs. banks, and while it remains to be seen if the referendum passes or not, it must be pointed out that it does have its own problems, articulated by Sam Gerrans:
“…if we had access to the same computer terminals the banks have, we could magic in or out of existence all the imaginary stuff we are trained to think of as important – money – in whatever quantities we liked.
This is how it works: when they print quite a lot of this stuff there is a boom. When they print too much of it, there is inflation (actually, the printing of money is inflation). When they stop printing it or simply hold on to it, there is a depression.” [Source]
Part of the cultural conditioning of our time is an ingrained, pre-assumed dependency on sacred cow institutions like banking. Just like it is impossible for most Americans to envision a world without Democrats and Republicans, it is difficult for most people to imagine a world without predatory global banking.
The Real Science On Vaccines, Dental Fillings, And Brain Damage: Stunning Video Shows How Mercury Content Damages Neurons Under A Microscope May 3 2016 | From: NaturalNews
T\Medical science has long known that mercury is a health hazard no matter how it gets into the body. Whether by foods we eat, water we drink, through vaccines or even our dental fillings, mercury is damaging to our health and toxic to our bodies.
The video, produced by the University of Calgary Faculty of Medicine Dept. of Physiology and Biophysics, "clearly shows how mercury in fillings can destroy brain neurons as seen with people who have Alzheimer's Disease," according to a description of it posted online at YouTube.
Researchers demonstrated in 1997 how mercury vapor inhalation by animals produced negative effects in the brain – in particular a lesion that is seen in at least 80 percent of brains in patients diagnosed with Alzheimer's disease. And more recently, researchers at the University of Calgary were able to demonstrate how mercury can alter the cell structure of developing neurons in the brain.
Immune System Compromised
Later research published in PLOS ONE by researchers from the College of William and Mary in Virginia found that songbirds that were exposed to sub-lethal and trace amounts of mercury left over from industrial manufacturing operations incurred reproductive problems and immune suppression, as well as brain abnormalities and other anomalies.
The songbirds' exposure to industrial chemicals in the environment has also been studied in fish and fish-eating birds, but at that time it had not been studied so much in forest birds.
Dan Cristol, a biology professor at the College of William and Mary, and some colleagues embarked on a study to find out how other types of birds – specifically songbirds living around the Shenandoah Valley's South River – were being affected by chemical residues still evident from manufacturing of rayon that occurred at DuPont factories between 1929 and 1950.
Rayon is a type of smooth textile that is often used in place of silk, but the manufacturing process left behind mercury and other chemicals in nearby rivers and land. For many decades, birds living in the area had been exposed to those chemicals as they searched for food. That was a scenario that Cristol saw as an opportunity to learn more about the effects of that exposure.
As reported by The Virginia Gazette:
The Establishment has promoted these dysfunctional communication rules and used them to manipulate and con numerous young Americans to needlessly enlist or allow themselves to be drafted to fight in illegal, unConstitutional, unprovoked, undeclared, unwinnable, perpetual foreign wars on behalf of the World’s largest Organized crime syndicate, the Khazarian Mafia (KM).
"They had 20 percent fewer babies," he said. "Their songs are sung at the wrong pitch. Their hormone levels are altered. Their immune systems are suppressed."
Early Onset Dementia And Mercury – Link?
The research team could not draw a line directly from mercury to the anomalies, but they said it looked very much like mercury was the cause.
In 2015, we reported that mercury, which can be found in vaccines as the preservative "thimerosal," was likely to blame for early-onset dementia occurring in people in their 40s:
Dementia and other neurological brain diseases are striking people younger and younger, according to a new study conducted by researchers from Bournemouth University in England and published in the journal Surgical Neurology International.
These diseases have reached levels that are "almost epidemic," the researchers said, and they reached them so quickly that environmental factors must be largely to blame.
You can watch the short but fascinating video explaining mercury toxicity on the brain from the University of Calgary below or at this link.
Network News Monkeys May 2 2016 | From: VeteransToday
This is a pretty strongly and directly worded exposure of the MSM and their “pretty” talking heads… of course, we see all of that over here, as well, although I personally do not watch it anymore live.
The credo of the Talking heads of the Network News Cartel requires them to “hear no truth, speak no truth and see no truth” if they want to keep their jobs and climb their occupational food chain.
Remember the old cartoon with the three wise monkeys sitting in a row gesturing with their hands to “hear no evil, speak no evil, see no evil”?
This was the Social Credo that most Baby-Boomers were raised with. It was the idea “avoid evil thoughts and talk, and do not listen to it from others”. The intent was good, keeping kids from being corrupted by bad morals.
But this “no evil” credo quickly expanded to an over generalized “No Talk” and “Don’t Question Authority” rules in many families and the overall purpose intended was actually to prevent conflict and the questioning parental authority no matter what.
Although these “No Talk”, Don’t Question Authority” rules served their purpose for many parents and minimized arguing within families, it also prevented healthy communication patterns as well and in many cases instilled dysfunctional attitudes and behaviors in their children.
These “No talk” and “Don’t Question Authority” rules created seriously dysfunctional communication styles that have persisted in many Baby-Boomers and would later doom them to unhappy or failed marriages and lots of conflict with their children.
The Establishment has promoted these dysfunctional communication rules and used them to manipulate and con numerous young Americans to needlessly enlist or allow themselves to be drafted to fight in illegal, unConstitutional, unprovoked, undeclared, unwinnable, perpetual foreign wars on behalf of the World’s largest Organized crime syndicate, the Khazarian Mafia (KM).
It was the Khazarian Mafia that gained control over the United States Government and most of its institutions when it hijacked America’s Monetary Creation and Distribution System in 1913 and began charging American interest to use what should have been their own free money in the first place.
Whole successful careers for Psychologists and Marriage & Family Therapists have been made from trying to counteract these dysfunctional rules and to teach effective communication skills to Baby-Boomers and their children who have often been influenced by these rules.
The continuing hegemony of these two dysfunctional communication rules against truthful and open communication has served the criminal governments as a strong roadblock to later independent thinking and questioning of Establishment story-lines disseminated through the Network News.
And we now know for certain that all the Network News stories disseminated are usually big lies, false-narrative and government propaganda.
We now know for certain that the Establishment has taken advantage of this “No Talk, Don’t Question Authority” Credo to keep the American Public bamboozled with big lies, false-narratives and propaganda and to keep them willing to be served up as cannon fodder for other people’s aggressive wars of acquisition.
Yes, these two dysfunctional communication rules became a strong “respect and don’t ever question government authority” norm which was instilled in baby-Boomers during childhood.
This norm has persisted and allowed American to be conned into numerous post WW2 illegal unConstitutional, unprovoked, undeclared, un-winnnable, wars of aggression for the Banksters and their crony corporations.
The governments still tells monstrous lies which can easily be shown to be false if one does some in depth Internet research using reputable alternative News experts, and then connects the dots.
The big lies, false-narrative and propaganda repeatedly and unendingly dispensed by the Network News Talking Heads is why so many still believe these monstrous lies:
Lies such as Oswald shot JFK; While located in a cave in Afghanistan using his cell phone Osama bin Laden was able to direct 19 Islamic terrorists with box cutters to successfully attack the Twin trade Towers in NYC and the Pentagon 9-11-01; or Saddam Hussein had weapons of mass destruction including nukes; or Iraqi soldiers took the babies out their incubators and threw them on the floor of the hospital to die; or Iran is building nukes and will have them deployed anytime now; or Seal team Six assassinated Osama bin Laden; or Assad is torturing and murdering his own people and the Syrian war is a civil war only; or Russia invaded the Ukraine and took over Crimea; or real limbs were blown off victims at the Boston Bombing by the Tsarnaevs; or Adam Lanza single-handedly murdered 20 children and six adults at Sandy Hook School.
The American public bought into all these monstrous lies, each of which has been proved to be completely false by numerous teams off credible researchers.
The reason they did so is because they view the USG and their Network news talking head representatives as benevolent parent figures that would never lie to them.
Yes, the American public has suffered from a serious inability to understand how their USG Officials can such be two-faced liars, deceivers and bamboozlers and actually work to represent the interests of the Khazarian Mafia and NOT the interests of We The People.
This Don’t Question Authority Credo has been imprinted in the psyches of most baby-Boomers and their children. It takes many breeches to undo this and there have been a number over the years which has arisen.
People are just starting to wake up to the fact that their governments are filled with two-faced liars and deceivers that are there to get rich, gain power and represent the wealthy powerful special interest that put them there.
The Establishment been able to pull this feat off to con and bamboozle the people with all this BS and lies, and transforming them into into Sheeple, consolidating all mass media into six Major Mass Media Corporations run by six Media Moguls who work for the KM and are part of an illegal News Monopoly and Network News Cartel.
This is where the Network news talking heads play such an important part. They are actually little more than well paid Judas Goats leading Americans to “slaughter”.
This removal of any normally expected corrections by the American People will eventually lead to complete economic collapse and asset stripping of everything we ever worked for and even worse for any children and grandchildren unless reversed quite soon.
Network News Spokespersons (aka Talking Heads) are selected who are attractive, easy to listen to and have convincing deliveries.
Almost every word out of their mouth is a big lie, a false narrative or blatant USG propaganda. Of course they are allowed to do harmless little local stories in a moderately factual way as long as they do not imply truth in national events that the Establishment is trying to keep hidden forever.
The Network News reporters, “correspondents” and Talking Heads get direct access to official government sources in exchange for soft-peddling the stories and/or reporting the KM story-line.
Whenever the Network News goes after a politician or official it is only because a policy to do so has been set at a very high level in the USG by a top policy-maker who is usually hiding in the background pulling the strings.
Sometimes as with the Pentagon, the Network News is paid to do a fluff story. Occasionally it can be due to conflict between different KM or other competing faction trying to acquire more power or institute a correction.
The six major networks are controlled by six major media moguls who are part of an illegal mass media monopoly, best viewed as a News Cartel. These six moguls answer to one Intel related international investment group which is responsible to communicating the main Establishment talking points and themes for that particular day.
All differences and conflicts which seem spontaneously emerging are actually pre-scripted and approved, and conform to policy set by only a few Top Policy-makers. This like the Wizard of Oz hiding behind the curtain pulling the levers of the USG and Network News machinery.
So once we examine what the Network News Talking Heads are really dispensing we must conclude they are actually News Monkeys and their Operational Credo is see no truth, hear no truth, speak no truth.
It’s like they are living in a cocoon of lies and deceit, insulated from the real world around them. If they ever did see and hear the truth and started speaking about it they would be breaking script, they would be fired, and they would be blacklisted, never to work in media again anywhere.
Talking heads are selected for crowd appeal.
They are usually attractive individuals with a nice delivery. Obviously to be able to keep their jobs they must insulate themselves from real truth about what is happening in the World or else their careers are ruined.
This results in many of them becoming two-faced knowing liars and deceivers like most elected and appointed officials. Doubt this, just try to give one an important story about government or police corruption and watch them hem and haw and avoid dealing with it.
If these constantly lying Talking Heads do their jobs as required and keep insulated and play the game they can earn great rewards and will typically be projected up the Establishment Food-chain.
Everyday more and more good people abandon the Network news and use the Internet to find out what is really going on.
As these increasing numbers of alternative news consumers become more and more sophisticated and informed about National and World affairs, a day of reckoning between the Establishment and the people approaches.
This knowledge of what really happened is spreading like wildfire and will eventually result in the exposure of all this big lies, false-narratives and propaganda dispensed by these Network Talking.
If either the 9-1-01 attack on America, the phony Boston Black Powder Puffer-Bombing, or the Sandy Hoax House of Cards collapses it will then be possible to prosecute these six Major Network News Moguls for being “after the fact accessories” to these horrendous crimes and part of the World’s largest Organized Crime syndicate, which they actually are.
They visit numerous alternative news websites and pick and choose truth nuggets that resonate and connect the dots themselves in their own head.
As these increasing numbers of alternative news consumers become more and more sophisticated and informed about National and World affairs, a day of reckoning between the Establishment and the American People approaches.
It’s a fact that the Establishment has used the Network news to mind-kontrol the Western people and keep them from knowing the sinister evil that the governments and their special interest major corporations and banks have been doing to We The People for at least 50 years.
Actually they have gained control necessary to do this because they assassinated JFK, MLK and RFK in a major ongoing coup d’etat. Once the American masses learn this as a group will probably be about the time they have lost everything. But once they do there will be hell to pay for these establishment two-faced liars and deceivers at every level.
In law it’s a thin line between being an accessory after the crime and ignorance or not knowing.
As soon as it is proved someone that aided in a RICO crime of the USG knowing did so they become an accessory after the fact if they keep supporting any associated USG cover-up. That day is rapidly approaching when most Americans will know that the attack on America on 9-11-01 was a stand-down Gladio-style False-flag attack and that nobody died at Sandy Hook.
This Sandy Hook cover-up involves the whole State Government of Connecticut and all the way up to Eric Holder while he was US Attorney General. The Connecticut State Police are involved, as are numerous well paid crisis actors pretending to be survivors and actual families when they are not.
Just how bad has it gotten because of over 50 years of Talking Head Controlled major Mass Media mind-kontrol via News Control of the American People?
It has gotten so bad that anyone who tells the truth has up until now and still is for the most part labelled as a conspiracy theorists, a conspiracy nut or a crackpot or possible domestic terrorist.
As George Orwell once stated, “In a time of universal deceit-telling the truth is a revolutionary act.”
Obviously this applies to contemporary America as never before.
The factual knowledge of what is really happening in our corrupt USG at every level is now beginning to spread like wildfire across America. If the spread of truth is not stopped it will eventually result in the exposure of all this big lies, false-narratives and propaganda dispensed by these Network Talking Heads on behalf of the USG, the Establishment and the KM who pulls all the strings of these two remarkably evil entities.
If either the 9-1-01 attack on America, the phony Boston Black Powder Puffer-Bombing, or the Sandy Hoax House of Cards collapses it will then be possible to prosecute these six Major Network News Moguls for being “after the fact accessories” to these horrendous crimes and part of the World’s largest Organized Crime syndicate, which they actually are.
There is no statute of limitations for murder or for fraud. 3,000+ another 130,000 were murdered by the 9-11-01 KM perps from their attack on America on 9-11-01. They had the Tsarnaev brother and his friend murdered over the fake Boston marathon Bombing and at least one witness was murdered over Sandy hoax.
Over 100 witnesses of the JFK assassination were murdered and the Dixie mob, the CIA, the Enterprise (Pentagon) and the FBI to protect the Clintons, Iran-Contra and the Mena, Arkansas Cocaine trafficking operations. All because GHWB was the Clintons’ case officer and used them to run cover for all these RICO KM syndicate operations.
Their success in providing cover has been well rewarded ever since but may be quite limited soon due to new and quite powerful forces inside the Pentagon that want to clean house and are making sure all their recent sins are exposed to the public.
Obviously the current regime was placed in power to complete the KM’s Globalist NWO Agenda and help maintain the current cover-up of all these recent false-flags including the KM attack on America of 9-11-01. So far the attainment of these intended goals have been thwarted substantially.
These murders and fraud of the associated cover-ups of the six Major Mass Media Moguls makes them liable for serious felony prosecutions and criminal and civil RICO, along with the actual KM and Intel perps and the Cutouts responsible for all these Gladio-style inside-job False-flag operations and their cover-up.
The Global Warming Scam, Paris Climate Agreement And NWO Global Rule
May 1 2016 | From: Sott
"Global warming is the biggest scam in history. I am amazed, appalled and highly offended by it." - Longtime meteorologist and Weather Channel founder John Coleman
The Climate Change Scam
Additionally, in less than a week a documentary entitled "The Climate Hustle" is being released in movie theaters nationwide on May 2nd debunking the notion that humans have caused global warming from the alleged increased CO2 greenhouse effect.
This new film arrives as the answered rebuttal exactly a decade after ex-VP Al Gore's Oscar winning "Inconvenient Truth" pushed the global warming agenda to unprecedented heights.
Gore was rewarded with a Nobel Peace Prize for his propagandist sci-fi movie. Recall his "true planetary emergency" calling for "drastic measures" to reduce the greenhouse gases before "reaching the point of no return" within ten years.
Well, his ten years have come and gone and for all his over-predicting of end-of-the-world crises due to global warming, Gore and his alarmist minions have virtually no evidence of any warming to show for all their doom and gloom catastrophic warnings.
That said, the global warming industry stakes are now worth an annual $1.5 trillion. Yet despite the global elites adapting a climate change agreement, a vast array of critics are blasting their Paris climate accord as merely a $100 billion boondoggle lacking any specific strategies or methods for reducing CO2 levels nor any mandated authority to enforce recommendations hinging on voluntary participation from all nations. Even the father of the global warming movement former NASA climatologist and green activist James Hanson trashes the Paris agreement:
“It's just bullshit for them to say 'we'll have a 2 C. warming target and then try to do a little better every five years.' It's worthless words. There is no actions, just promises. As long as fossil fuels appear to be the cheapest fuels out there, they will be continued to be burned."
The earth's global warming that Al Gore and his movement attribute to humans burning fossil fuels over the last century has absolutely nothing to do with the global warming presently being observed on every planet in our solar system. Scientists are blaming it on solar warming and the sun's electromagnetic field is becoming more intense.
The fact that solar warming is heating up all the planets strongly suggests that global warming on our planet is not being caused by human activity at all.
Few skeptical scientists on global warming deny that human-generated CO2 does not warm the planet. But the amount of heating caused by CO2 and other greenhouse gases has never been scientifically determined and is believed to be miniscule. In contrast, in recent years virtually all of Al Gore's contentions have been refuted and debunked by actual science.
Bill Clinton's Vice President while campaigning for president claimed that he "created the internet" and of course we all know he conveniently stretched the truth on that one. As a lifelong politician raised by another lifelong politician father, his trademark is bending the truth any time he feels the need to impress his audience.
Though Al Gore likes to pass himself off as an altruist out to save the world, as a partner in Kleiner Perkins, a venture capital firm that invested a billion dollars in 40 different companies, Gore and his partners stand to hugely profit from cap and trade laws that would make him the first carbon billionaire.
Back in 2008 Al Gore made the bold prediction that all the ice in the Arctic Sea would be completely melted by 2013-2015. It clearly hasn't. The polar icecap has actually grown thicker in 2015 than it was in 2008. Meanwhile, the climate and ice pack on Antarctica is consistently growing thicker and colder at record levels.
These polar discrepancies stand in direct contradiction to the global warming alarmist's original statements as literally the tip of the iceberg when it comes to how Gore's dire warnings never quite materialize. Hence, in recent years Gore's political camp quietly and seamlessly renamed their all-important cause from global warming which was disproven to a more benign, less disprovable assertion called climate change.
One of Gore's "facts" that acts as his basic premise behind his entire theory is the notion that rising CO2 levels cause global warming. This is not true. What scientists do know is for millions of years the earth has taken turns cyclically shifting back and forth between relative short warming periods compared to longer cooling periods.
During the last 800 years of a typical 5,000 year ice age, it's been determined that temperatures rose before CO2 levels did. This lagging anomaly is a scientific fact that disproves climate change contenders' central tenet that increasing CO2 levels always cause higher temps.
Many scientists maintain that increasing CO2 levels only help to stimulate plant growth since the plant kingdom's fuel is carbon dioxide.
The clichéd quote so often heard by the alarmists claiming a consensus of 97% of all climate scientists maintain that manmade CO2 levels are causing global warming has also been proven wrong. A closer examination has demonstrated that an extremely minute number of research studies wholeheartedly embrace global warming as fact and that the zealot counting the supposed 12,000 abstracts subjectively misclassified the vast majority as being pro-global warming, in fact doctoring the results.
On the other hand, 31,487 scientists(over 9,000 with PhD's) signed a petition confirming that they do not believe that anthropomorphic (human causing) generated CO2 is a valid concern causing any global warming danger. Yet the lies spewing forth from politicized pseudo-science dogma passed all around the world by MSM presstitutes will never admit it.
“Isn't the only hope for the planet that the industrialized civilizations collapse? Isn't it our responsibility to bring that about?"
Now you can see how the recent globalist manufactured migration crisis and the Paris climate accord committing $100 billion to "fighting CO2" fits right in with Strong's mission with billions in carbon tax used to codify world governance laws.
In 1993 an even more glaring admission to misuse global warming to further advance the New World Order agenda was explicitly declared by the Club of Rome, an elitist think tank comprised of scientists, economists, business and political leaders that often serve as UN consultants of which Maurice Strong himself was a onetime member:
“In searching for a new enemy to unite us, we came up with the idea that pollution, the threat of global warming, water shortages, famine and the like would fit the bill....
All these dangers are caused by human intervention...
and thus the real enemy, then, is humanity itself...
believe humanity requires a common motivation, namely a common adversary in order to realize world government. It does not matter if this common enemy is a real one or... one invented for the purpose."
Thus the UN's Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC) was born, opportunistically latching onto the highly bogus 1998 MBH98 study that included grossly flawed methodology as its smoking gun "proving" global warming with the infamous "hockey stick" CO2 spike pattern used by Al Gore in his acclaimed disinfo propaganda flick.
Later researchers debunked the MBH98 findings identifying errors that when corrected to include missing 15th century data showed even higher temperatures than today minus of course any manmade cause back then, thus shattering the myth of human carbon dioxide emissions causing a warmer earth.
Even surface readings over the last decade have failed to deliver the bad news globalists like Gore were literally banking on.
So by default, let's call it climate change and keep hammering away with more lies until they become accepted science dogma.
The often heard climate change narrative readily cites increasing number of hurricanes and tornadoes as the sought after proof that climate change is real. Yet once again reality fails to back up the claims. For the fourth year in a row tornadoes fell under the average with 2015 one of the lowest years on record.
And regarding killer hurricanes, the US is in the longest drought in its recorded history since records began in 1851. The last category 3 hurricane was Wilma that struck Florida over a decade ago. Furthermore, a University of Colorado study released results last year stressing the need for caution in interpreting extreme weather, warning not to succumb to an obvious temptation to attribute every extreme weather event to global warming.
The study concluded that no statistical evidence supports a rise in extreme weather caused directly by global warming or climate change.
In the case of the spike in major earthquakesand active volcanoes (40 now) this year, solar activity, 11-year sun cycles and increased risk of comets and asteroids heading towards the earth are more commonly linked as a potential causal explanation than climate change or global warming.
The presence of profound earth changes appear to be occurring on a global scale, but again these changes may well be part of a larger stellar phenomenon unfolding within our solar system and not due at all to anthropomorphic CO2 levels.
Spraying chemicals has become so pronounced in recent years throughout North America and Europe that in places it has seemingly permanently altered the skyline coloring it a dull whitish grey. A number of heavy toxic metals falling to the ground have been detected including aluminum, barium, strontium, sulfur, all are harmful to human health far more than CO2 emissions.
Yet their destruction and increasingly health hazard to animals, humans as well as vegetation (especially scorched trees) intentionally at hidden taxpayer expense is covertly been perpetrated by US and other Western governments.
For an alternative and in-depth discussion of chemtrails, see these articles:
Temperatures measured at both ground level and lower atmospheric levels are affected by a myriad of factors. Yet the UN agreement and the widespread political dogma masquerading as science that climate change/global warming is indisputably caused by the rise in manmade CO2 levels blindly denies all the other scientifically known factors that influence the planet's temperatures rendering them all inconsequential.
This is totally misleading and downright false. Prevailing global winds, cloud cover, orbital earth changes in tilting of axis, ocean cycles that include growth of microscopic creatures, water vapor, methane gas, volcanic activity, the solar system and the sun all are scientifically-established co-determinants in varying global temps and climate change. It's an extremely complex interplay of dozens of co-occurring variables that cause climate.
Over simplistic analyses based on computer model algorithms insisting that man's CO2 gases are heating up the planet has been coalesced and co-opted into a unifying political agenda pushed by environmental extremism, the Democratic Party and ultimately globalism and its world governance to use global warming as its prime mover and shaker to bring about the long plotted one world government tyranny.
The bottom line reality to virtually everything today is driven by money, power and control. The climate change issue is no different as it has been politicized to where scientific research funding is predicated on only one thing, producing results that the government desires and demands... be it in the US or research sponsored by the UN's IPCC.
Thus, only researchers that produce the numbers supporting the contention that CO2 is causing rising temps get funded. Honest researching scientists who dare investigate the inconvenient truth simply don't get financed. And only the pro-global warming scientists are given a credible voice to disseminate their findings through respected journals and mainstream media outlets.
Like 9/11 truth-ers and vaccine non-believers, dissenting scientists not bought and paid for by big oil or big government, are typically denigrated and dismissed as fringe conspiracy nuts and crackpots. A global warming skeptic is subject to ridicule, career and reputation assault and harassment threatened with RICO litigation.
In other words, science just like mainstream media has become so polluted and prostituted by today's rampant corruption that it no longer is guided by legitimate scientific inquiry and ethically driven investigation for empirical truth... much like Monsanto and Big Pharma control the FDA and EPA to approve harmful drugs without adequate research trials and/or look the other way with egregious earth degradation and pollution.
But then this is the regressive, Orwellian dark age we're now living in when dissenting free speech has systematically become criminalized, when our soldiers sent by our government into harm's way putting their lives on the line come home only to be targeted as the feds' number one enemy - even more so than the ISIS terrorists the treasonous neocons secretly created and continue supporting, and the mob rule mentality of political correctness that now both trumps and tramples on the constitutional First Amendment.
Free intellectual discourse on college campuses has been militantly usurped by angry PC police Nazis acting blindly on emotion to demonize and silence those who dare disagree. If anyone on the planet's feelings are hurt, PC laws prohibiting free speech are being busily erected to put people exercising their criminalized free speech in jail, be they critics of Islam or so called climate change "deniers."
The crime cabal government is now an oligarchic fascist totalitarian police state ushering in yet another reign of terror era where truth itself becomes deep state's enemy. The elite's covert agenda to misuse and debase the educational system and mass media through pervasive social engineering and mind control designed to diabolically dumb down and brainwash multiple generations into robotically operating completely devoid of any capacity for critical thinking and reasoning, absolutely clueless in discerning truth from 24/7 lies, disinformation and propaganda has been a resounding success.
That said, more citizens of the world every single day are ultimately realizing that their own government as the elite's authoritarian thugs is their true enemy merely carrying out eugenics marching orders amounting to human genocide.
Like the sacrificial lambs of the 3,000 Americans murdered by the ruling elite on 9/11, we are all targets for extermination, all but a half billion slaves left alive to service the psychopaths in charge.
John Key: Land Tax Plan Could Happen By 2017
May 1 2016 | From: TheContrail
You may have heard the banker-controlled media report over the past few days that PM John Key is considering introducing a new “land tax” on foreign property speculators similar to Victoria in Australia to supposedly help suppress the house and property price rises bubble.
Well, unlike everyone else, it seems, I thought I would take the time this evening to research what it involves in Victoria by the COMMUNIST/FASCIST Victorian State Government.
Much to my surprise (really not a surprise), it is very nasty indeed, and is in the early stages of confiscating everyone’s properties with an exemption for you own home and a few others. Here are the current rates in Victoria:
The threshold for individuals is $250,000, but for “Trusts” is just $25,000. There is a massive attack against trusts! At present primary land is exempt if not in a trust - but of course, the present list of exemptions and relatively low Land Tax rates are only the beginning, and I predict will lead to full property confiscation.
I will predict in a relatively short space of time the rates in Victoria will go up ten-fold! It’s based on the old banking pirate strategy for introducing tolls on new privatized highways. First you open the new road with a low $2 toll to get all the masses used to it.
Then when you’ve got all the sheep regularly using it, you increase the toll to $12 then $20 – and in no time all of a sudden you realize the sheep have all been fleeced of their last dimes!
A few years ago, the NZ Treasury (run by devious foreign banking pirates here) proposed a similar tax called a “Residential Property Equity Tax” that would apply to all property including all homes and farmland WITH NO EXEMPTIONS FOR THE FAMILY HOME (unlike Australia at present) – but fortunately, it was firmly rejected then by the then government.
Now they’re coming back again, cunningly trying to introduce it as “Land Tax” (but at first only for greedy foreign speculators who are being blamed for pushing house prices up) – when in reality, it is easy credit, low interest rates and excessive immigration that is the real cause of rapidly pushing house prices up – being pushed by the banking pirates themselves.
Of course, the banker-controlled media will never blame the banking pirate crooks who in effect are mortgaging the whole country lock, stock and barrel to themselves.
While this is not only unique to Australia and New Zealand – May I ask the profound question?
Are we all so downright apathetic and mentally retarded to just sit back and put up with all this tyranny without even ushering a single word? What a Socialist madhouse? All totally designed to destroy the wealth of those who work hard!
But these successes are a threat, because they contradict the lies medical authorities spew about how safe fluorides are, and because grass-roots victories erode blind faith in centralized government.
Here are quotes from Kane Titchener, who represents the group, Fluoride Free NZ, in New Zealand. His remarks lay out what’s happening behind the scenes in that natural paradise:
“…the fluoridation issue has been brought to a head. The NZ Government is proposing that the [bigger] District Health Boards take over the decision making [about] fluoridation [in water supplies] as opposed to the local councils. This is because we have been very good at winning at the local council level.”
“Fluoride Free NZ was formed in 2003. Since that time we have had many substantial victories in local Councils throughout New Zealand. Local Councils that have stopped [fluoridating water supplies] as a result of Fluoride Free NZ’s lobbying efforts: New Plymouth; Taumarunui; Waipukurau; Far North…”
“In summary, the Government is planning to implement mandatory fluoridation to the whole of New Zealand. Currently, only around 50% of households are on fluoridated water, with only 23 out of 67 local councils still fluoridating, while voicing their growing concerns about fluoridation risks and dangers.
In response to more and more councillors and mayors deciding against fluoridation, the Government is now taking the decision away from local councils and communities and putting the power into the hands of District Health Boards (DHB), who are under the direct control of Central Government.”
If you think Fluoride Free NZ’s successes working with town councils is a walk in the park, think again. This group has scored victories against long odds. This group is smart, dedicated, and effective.
They represent what can happen when strong, clear-sighted, creative individuals band together to accomplish a righteous goal.
And the tyrannical response of big government is predictable.
However, there is going to be blowback against that government in New Zealand.
The degree and power of the blowback is going to depend, in part, on the response of people around the world who become aware of the situation and make their voices heard.
Contact Fluoride Free NZ. Help them. Spread their press releases all over the world.
Why should a government be permitted to dump poison into the water and call it medical treatment?
And having called it medical treatment, by what power can a government mandate it for all citizens without informed consent, without the explicit permission of those millions of patients? Yes, patients, because that’s what they are. They’re being treated every day.
By what power can this happen? Dictatorship calling itself democracy.
A note to tourists: how do you feel about traveling to New Zealand and bathing in, and drinking, poison? Do you like that bonus for spending your good money in “paradise?”
If not, you might want to contact the New Zealand tourism authority (newzealand.com) and let them know about your change of plans.
Such organizations are always interested in money, where it’s coming from—and where it won’t be coming from.
South (east) of New Zealand close to Antarctica: Notice the microwaved ‘ripples’ and the striated ridge-like lines, some crisscrossed, plus milky chemtrailing. April 25, 2016
My friend in New Zealand is still reluctant to accept that New Zealand is being horrifically sprayed with the toxic chemicals, aluminum, barium, etc., and radio frequency rf/microwaved zapped by transmitters like HAARP, etc.
Related: Chemtrails & Geo-Enginneering
He can’t accept that New Zealand is vulnerable to planetary collapse, even though he knows their Prime Minister John Key was head of the global foreign exchange (currencies) at Merrill Lynch in London – and obviously a New World Order puppet.
Thus I have encouraged him to investigate the evidence at NASA’s EOSDIS Worldview. I include a few screen shots I recently made of New Zealand and south towards Antarctica. Be sure and adjust for the correct the date at the bottom.
The image above is of radio frequency / microwave ripples on the South Island / below same around Mt. Egmont or Mount Taranaki on the North Island, New Zealand – April 26, 2016
Censored, Surveilled, Watch Listed And Jailed: The Absurdity Of Being A Citizen In A Police State
April 29 2016 | From: InformationClearingHouse
In the police state, the price to be paid for speaking truth to power (also increasingly viewed as an act of treason) is surveillance, censorship, jail and ultimately death.
However, where many go wrong is in assuming that you have to be doing something illegal or challenging the government’s authority in order to be flagged as a suspicious character, labeled an enemy of the state and locked up like a dangerous criminal.
MIn fact, as I point out in my book Battlefield America: The War on the American People, all you really need to do is use certain trigger words, surf the internet, communicate using a cell phone, drive a car, stay at a hotel, purchase materials at a hardware store, take flying or boating lessons, appear suspicious, question government authority, or generally live in the United States.
With the help of automated eyes and ears, a growing arsenal of high-tech software, hardware and techniques, government propaganda urging Americans to turn into spies and snitches, as well as social media and behavior sensing software, government agents are spinning a sticky spider-web of threat assessments, flagged “words,” and “suspicious” activity reports aimed at snaring potential enemies of the state.
It’s the American police state’s take on the dystopian terrors foreshadowed by George Orwell, Aldous Huxley and Phillip K. Dick all rolled up into one oppressive pre-crime and pre-thought crime package.
What’s more, the technocrats who run the surveillance state don’t even have to break a sweat while monitoring what you say, what you read, what you write, where you go, how much you spend, whom you support, and with whom you communicate.
Computers now do the tedious work of trolling social media, the internet, text messages and phone calls for potentially anti-government remarks - all of which is carefully recorded, documented, and stored to be used against you someday at a time and place of the government’s choosing.
While this may sound like a riff on a bad joke, it’s a bad joke with “we the people” as the punchline.
The following activities are guaranteed to get you censored, surveilled, eventually placed on a government watch list, possibly detained and potentially killed.
Laugh at your own peril.
Use harmless trigger words like cloud, pork and pirates:
Simply by using a cell phone, you make yourself an easy target for government agents - working closely with corporations - who can listen in on your phone calls, read your text messages and emails, and track your movements based on the data transferred from, received by, and stored in your cell phone.
Mention any of the so-called “trigger” words in a conversation or text message, and you’ll get flagged for sure.
Drive a car:
Unless you’ve got an old junkyard heap without any of the gadgets and gizmos that are so attractive to today’s car buyers (GPS, satellite radio, electrical everything, smart systems, etc.), driving a car today is like wearing a homing device: you’ll be tracked from the moment you open that car door thanks to black box recorders and vehicle-to-vehicle communications systems that can monitor your speed, direction, location, the number of miles traveled, and even your seatbelt use.
Once you add satellites, GPS devices, license plate readers, and real-time traffic cameras to the mix, there’s nowhere you can go on our nation’s highways and byways that you can’t be followed.
Attend a political rally:
Enacted in the wake of 9/11, the Patriot Act redefined terrorism so broadly that many non-terrorist political activities such as protest marches, demonstrations and civil disobedience were considered potential terrorist acts, thereby rendering anyone desiring to engage in protected First Amendment expressive activities as suspects of the surveillance state.
Operation Vigilant Eagle, the brainchild of the Dept. of Homeland Security, calls for surveillance of military veterans returning from Iraq and Afghanistan, characterizing them as extremists and potential domestic terrorist threats because they may be “disgruntled, disillusioned or suffering from the psychological effects of war.”
Disagree with a law enforcement official:
A growing number of government programs are aimed at identifying, monitoring and locking up anyone considered potentially “dangerous” or mentally ill (according to government standards, of course). For instance, a homeless man in New York City who reportedly had a history of violence but no signs of mental illness was forcibly detained in a psych ward for a week after arguing with shelter police.
As a result of a nationwide push to certify a broad spectrum of government officials in mental health first-aid training (a 12-hour course comprised of PowerPoint presentations, videos, discussions, role playing and other interactive activities), more Americans are going to run the risk of being reported for having mental health issues by non-medical personnel.
For instance, one 37-year-old disabled man was arrested, diagnosed by police and an unlicensed mental health screener as having “mental health issues,” apparently because of his slurred speech and unsteady gait.
Appear confused or nervous, fidget, whistle or smell bad:
According to the Transportation Security Administration’s 92-point secret behavior watch list for spotting terrorists, these are among some of the telling signs of suspicious behavior: fidgeting, whistling, bad body odor, yawning, clearing your throat, having a pale face from recently shaving your beard, covering your mouth with your hand when speaking and blinking your eyes fast.
Allow yourself to be seen in public waving a toy gun or anything remotely resembling a gun, such as a water nozzle or a remote control or a walking cane, for instance:
No longer is it unusual to hear about incidents in which police shoot unarmed individuals first and ask questions later.
John Crawford was shot by police in an Ohio Wal-Mart for holding an air rifle sold in the store that he may have intended to buy. Thirteen-year-old Andy Lopez Cruz was shot 7 times in 10 seconds by a California police officer who mistook the boy’s toy gun for an assault rifle.
Appear to be pro-gun, pro-freedom or anti-government:
You might be a domestic terrorist in the eyes of the FBI (and its network of snitches) if you: express libertarian philosophies; exhibit Second Amendment-oriented views; read survivalist literature, including apocalyptic fictional books; show signs of self-sufficiency (stockpiling food, ammo, hand tools, medical supplies); fear an economic collapse; buy gold and barter items; voice fears about Big Brother or big government; or expound about constitutional rights and civil liberties.
Attend a public school:
Microcosms of the police state, public schools contain almost every aspect of the militarized, intolerant, senseless, overcriminalized, legalistic, surveillance-riddled, totalitarian landscape that plagues those of us on the “outside.”
Long before Chelsea Manning and Edward Snowden were being castigated for blowing the whistle on the government’s war crimes and the National Security Agency’s abuse of its surveillance powers, it was activists such as Martin Luther King Jr. and John Lennon who were being singled out for daring to speak truth to power.
These men and others like them had their phone calls monitored and data files collected on their activities and associations. For a little while, at least, they became enemy number one in the eyes of the US government.
There’s always a price to pay for standing up to the powers-that-be.
Yet as this list shows, you don’t even have to be a dissident to get flagged by the government for surveillance, censorship and detention.
All you really need to be is a citizen of the police state.
Is The Pineal Gland The Gateway To A Spiritual Awakening?
April 29 2016 | From: AwakeningPeople
Oh the wonderful and powerful pineal gland. There is so much to share on this mysterious gland that is the gateway to cosmic communication and multidimensional sight. First and foremost what is it from a physical viewpoint and what does it do?
It is a pine cone shaped gland located in the middle of the brain. When we are children it is erect and as we age it shrivels. It helps regulate sleep patterns and secretes melatonin and seratonin. So the question is, why does it shrivel?
This happens as we identify with this world and its belief system based on separation. We in essence fall asleep into illusion so the pineal becomes inactive. So how does one Awaken and Awaken to what?
When a person opens to the Call they are basically choosing to remember their Divine identity and to align with it. When this happens the pineal start to "resurrect" and the crystals inside it, known as "brain sand" start to resonate. This is what causes a buzzing in the head.
In truth the pineal acts as a Divine radio antenna to pick up Higher or Christ frequencies. When this happens the pituitary gland secrets a hormone known as pituitrin that starts to ethererize the Central Nervous system so it can conduct the Higher energy or frequencies. This is known as ancient alchemy. The Egyptians understood this very well and used the Great Pyramid of Giza to facilitate the Awakening process.
Initiates from all over the world would come to Egypt to be initiated in the Great Pyramid. The pyramid has a Kings and Queens chamber and this corresponds to the pineal and pituitary glands. The torsion field energy from the earth would be captured and collected in these chambers.
Energy follows thought so an Initiate has the intent to awaken so when they are initiated during a ceremony in the Kings chamber the energy (koundalini) from the base of the spine is raised or resurrected into the head centers where the mystical inner marriage takes place and the Christ is reborn within or one is born again as Spirit while still in an earth incarnation.
So as you can see, the pineal gland is crucial to spiritual awakening. In the Vatican complex they have the Courtyard of the Pinecone which symbolizes this. The pineal is what allows for Divine communication once it is resurrected.
A person is then is communication and alignment with their Higher Self. Prayer and meditation help to stimulate the pineal and certainly visualization. A bad diet and focus on only earthly pursuits will keep the pineal shriveled and dormant. Christ mind or Oneness consciousness awakens it.
This is what Jesus meant when he said know one goes to Heaven but through me. What he meant was aligning with your True or Christed Self in which Jesus exemplified and showed us how to do. In closing, the pineal is the gateway to Eternal Life.
Open Source Government: True Government Of The People, By The People And For The People
April 28 2016 | From: Geopolitics
Government models have not evolved that much since the days of Plato’s Socratic Republic.
Instead, they have all deteriorated, corrupted, and have failed on many occasions to address and mitigate the most fundamental failing of man, i.e. greed for absolute power.
Members of Secret Societies claimed they have been raised and trained to properly handle power and authority, and yet we know how many times this hasn’t been the case.
Power is toxic and absolute power corrupts absolutely.
The only way power be prevented from being misused is when it is distributed to as many as possible. By then, power will cease to be more than just a routine exercise of collective free will.
Until today, the concept of collective free will has been nothing more than illusory at best. We call it democracy, the rule of the mob, or the tyranny of the majority. And rightly so, because we let sheer numbers decide who and what’s best for us, instead of high quality ideas taken and decided directly from each member of our society.
In order to create the illusion of direct participation, the elite minority devised a periodic ritual where we can all choose directly from preselected individuals out of a pool of nominees, i.e. club members, as our potential leaders, neither of whom is committed to serve the people’s interests, but the club.
Preselection is enforced by making each outsider poor enough to barely afford financing a political campaign. The reign of inbred mentally retarded families is thus maintained by default.
The fragile House of Cards is surprisingly, yet effectively sustained just by the mere satisfaction of earthly desires of the few below the pyramid. The entire system is self-sustaining in its corruption of the entire fabric of our miserable existence.
This stupidity cannot go on.
We cannot solve any problem by using the same mindset that created it in the first place. That is a Universal Truth.
Hundreds of years ago, this concept would have been impossible, but true democracy is being exercised daily in the realm of Open Software Development for decades now, and the cost is only as high as your monthly ISP bill, something that you are already doing now, as you read this article.
Therefore, it is a huge mistake to abandon this idea as merely Utopian. Labeling, or branding, has gotten us nowhere. It’s time to confront the systemic problem head on.
Open Source Government ensures that only the best solution survives while keeping the cost close to nil as everybody would be willing to volunteer their services as is already done in Open Source Communities.
Goodbye, Mr. Congressman. And that is only the beginning.
The Next OSG Evolution
It is only natural that the next evolution of Open Source Government is the establishment of a direct link between people formulated and approved policies and controls, which serves as the programming instructions into the machines that will do the actual dirty repetitive work of sustaining life on the planet.
By that time, real-time formulated policies will be translated as the macro firmware instructions that sits at the lowest level by which they can override all embedded intelligence, to maintain the superiority of man over machines.
Goodbye, Mr. President.
While possible, it is highly improbable that the majority will give machine instructions to kill themselves. Sustainability and security are therefore inherently built into the system.
Goodbye, FBI and NSA.
Recognizing the fact that money is just a form of control to our access to basic resources, and not a true manifestation of tangible wealth, there will be a time along the way when the majority decide that this Babylonian paper magik, too, could go away. And that’s when slavery is finally defeated.
Goodbye, Goldman Sachs, Federal Reserve, IMF-WB and Rothschild dynasty.
Understandably, government as we know it will lose its meaning and will cease to exist. Goodbye, representative United Nations!
Again, the template for Open Source Government is existing and is being used continuously by Google and Mozilla, to name just a few. We just have to migrate it into governance.
Automation and robotics technology is already being applied to replace humans in the realm of manufacturing. Why not link it with OSG to have a completely responsive government that responds in real-time?
Comment: Okay, so that comment above might sound a bit transhumanist. But the gist of this article is to inspire thinking. We collectively need to figure a way out of this paradigm and to determine what we move on to from here. Sitting around going "well this is shit" is not going to help us move forward in an upward, positively driven fashion.
Open Collaboration is the only feasible system that is already proven to sustainably work. It is the only government model where the highest quality of public services are guaranteed, transparency and peaceful interaction are built-in, all at the lowest cost possible.
What are we waiting for?
Scientist Who Found Gluten Sensitivity Now Says it Doesn’t Exist + Industrial GMO Food Threats & The Global Monsanto Take Down April 28 2016 | From: WakingTimes / Geopolitics / Various
Is Monsanto’s glyphosate the true cause of sensitivity to glutenous foods?
Millions of people are said to have some intolerance to gluten, the sticky protein that can be found in breads, barley, and other wheat products. But how scientifically grounded is this sudden wave of large-scale gluten intolerance? As it turns out, it may not be gluten that is triggering health problems, but a reaction to agrochemicals being used in the harvesting of wheat.
In 2011, an Australian scientist named Peter Gibson at Monash University conducted an experiment to determine whether gluten in the diet can cause gastrointestinal distress in people who did not have celiac disease. When experiments confirmed this hypothesis, they named this condition ‘non-celiac gluten sensitivity‘ or NCGS, thus beginning the gluten-free trend, which has resulted in an estimated $15 billion industry by 2016.
For this new experiment, Gibson sought out 37 self-identified gluten sensitive patients. The study was done double-blind with subjects that had NCGS and irritable bowel syndrome, but not celiac disease. For two weeks, the patients were given high-gluten, low-gluten, and no-gluten meals (as the control group), followed by a two-week “washout” period.
The findings of the study showed that although in opposition to the results found in the first experiment, gluten intolerance actually does not exist in people without celiac disease. A third study, also by Gibson, further supports these findings, suggesting perhaps that much of what we see as gluten sensitivity is psychosomatic.
“In contrast to our first study… we could find absolutely no specific response to gluten,”
– Dr. Peter Gibson
It May Not Be The Gluten – But Don’t Eat That Wheat Too Soon
Although gluten is no longer believed to be the culprit of health problems reportedly associated with consuming glutenous wheat, that does not mean that conventionally grown wheat is completely safe to eat. In fact, until 2005, GMO wheat was being tested in 16 states, and is known to have escaped testings grounds, genetically polluting nearby fields via airborne seeds and cross-pollination.
“Further testing by USDA laboratories indicates the presence of the same GE glyphosate-resistant wheat variety that Monsanto was authorized to field test in 16 states from 1998 to 2005.”
In addition, even non-GMO wheat is drenched with Monsanto’s carcinogenic glyphosate Round-up just days before harvest, because, as it turns out, wheat fields produce slightly more seed when sprayed with this poison 7-10 days before harvest, as researched by Dr. Stephanie Seneff of MIT.
“It ‘goes to seed’ as it dies. At its last gasp, it releases the seed.”
This study from 2013 shows that fish exposed to glyphosate develop digestive issues similar to celiac disease.
“If Glyphosate ends up in bread it’s impossible for people to avoid it, unless they are eating organic. On the other hand, farmers could easily choose not to use Glyphosate as a spray on wheat crops – just before they are harvested. This is why the Soil Association is calling for the immediate ending of the use of Glyphosate sprays on wheat destined for use in bread.”
– Peter Melchett of the Soil Association
It is true that not every food fad ends up being true. However, we should still take caution when choosing the foods we feed our families. Although it has been found that gluten itself is not causing an intolerance in people without celiac disease, there are still other issues with wheat production that we need to be aware of.
Get your wheat from local, organic farms when possible and do what you can to avoid Monsanto and other pesticide company’s chemical toxins finding their way into your body.
Industrial GMO Food Threats & The Global Monsanto Take Down
The debate over GMO safety and risks stems from the fact that the definition is too generalized, or too ambiguous. The mainstream conversation about its pseudo-science always favors the corporations behind it.
But mere scientific definition is not enough to circumvent the actual disastrous experience, i.e. those glaring facts about its negative effects outside the GMO laboratories.
The long term side effects of consuming genetically modified, processed, or preserved, foods are beginning to unravel. The corporations have billions of reasons not to publicize its methods and why they are moving heaven and hell not to label GMO products.
Whatever you do, don’t ever gamble with the food you eat unless you can afford to pay for your expensive medications later on.
Here are the real scientific reasons why GMO foods are extremely dangerous, and how scientists around the world are being coerced to toe the biotech establishment’s line.
Up to now we are still very skeptical if the reported removal of GMO ingredients from Kraft products is real, or mere publicity stunt.
"Orange you glad you didn’t notice.
Kraft altered its beloved formula for the Day-Glo sheen of its popular Macaroni & Cheese earlier this year — but now the company is rolling out a big bucks ad campaign to tell people.
It’s not as if it were a secret. Kraft announced nearly a year ago it was going to make this change. It started shipping the new recipe in December and has already sold over 50 million boxes.
Its new commercial features Craig Kilborn standing in a supermarket.
“Moms didn’t notice. Kids didn’t notice. Dogs didn’t notice,” Kilborn said. “None of them noticed a thing because this Kraft Mac & Cheese still tastes like Kraft Mac & Cheese. It’s changed but it hasn’t.”
The problem with this claim is that no independent consumer group is certifying that such is the case. Another known fact to remind ourselves is the inherent chemical contamination right at the production lines itself.
If ordinary tampons, or gauze, can be contaminated with glyphosate during production [here], why not food products which were subjected to artificial fertilizers and pesticides from growing to packaging?
"Nitrogen fertilizers are used to prevent nitrogen from becoming depleted from the soil. Unfortunately, the overuse of nitrogen fertilizers isn’t without its long-term consequences. According to a new study published in the journal Environmental Research Letters, nitrogen fertilizers are causing nitrates to build up in the Mississippi Basin, polluting ground and surface water.
Nitrates increase the risk of blue baby syndrome, according to the recent study. The illness replaces a child’s hemoglobin with methemoglobin, which minimizes the ability of blood to carry oxygen throughout the body. Infants are most often affected by the malady, which is marked by a blueness around the mouth. Other symptoms include difficulties breathing, vomiting and diarrhea. In extreme cases, blue baby syndrome can be fatal."
There are so many concerned groups that have taken the cudgels of bringing down abusive food corporations for decades now. Yet, the fight to end these abuses has not achieved its intended outcome.
Then came a covert global effort to neutralize the single crime syndicate that’s been doing all the evils in our society today.
The information we received after the events in 2001 said that there is a global movement to take down the “tightly knit, highly efficient machine that combines military, diplomatic, intelligence, economic, scientific and political operations,” that sought to depopulate and control the world for its own caprices.
This Reformist Collective, the most visible manifestation of which is the BRICS, is said to be employing both hard and soft power to achieve its aims of creating a world of mutual progress by allowing the full and responsible use of suppressed technologies to eliminate scarcity and institute abundance for all, and end all types of geopolitical conflicts.
There is now a growing body of evidence that the genocidal group of the Bushes, Rockefellers, Gates, etc. are being systematically neutralized, i.e. their attempts to start a nuclear war with Iran has been suppressed.
The Rothschild banking dynasty, along with the UK Monarchy and Vatican, are said to have no other choice but cooperate with this group after the Global Collateral Accounts, the massive tranche of historical gold lent by Asian royalties to back up the entire financial system for the last 100 years or so, were frozen prompting the massive resignations of CEO bankers around the globe in 2012.
This bankers’ resignations were punctuated by the resignation of the World Bank president and Vatican Pope Benedict XVI in 2013.
Part of the global reform is to bring down Monsanto, the acknowledged rogue player in the realm of genetically modified food production, of which mass vaccinations advocate Bill Gates is a major stockholder.
Those who have chosen the path to peaceful resolution and have since cooperated with the BRICS and will be paid for handsomely.
Early in February of this year, ChemChina frustrated Monsanto’s attempt to buy off Swiss Syngenta through a $43 billion offer. While western media is saying that China is just trying to feed its more than a billion mouths, we believe there is a much profound objective for the acquisition, among many acquisitions.
“ChemChina became a pesticide powerhouse in 2011 when its subsidiary, China National Agrochemical Corporation, acquired Makhteshim Agan Industries (Israel), the world’s 7th largest pesticide manufacturer, and became ADAMA”, said the Canada-based ETC Group. “With revenues over $3 billion in 2013, ADAMA sells generic pesticide products in more than 120 countries… ADAMA’s largest market is Europe (37%), followed by Latin America (25%).” (Parentheses in original)
ChemChina’s interests go way beyond agrochemicals. Last year it acquired Italy’s Pirelli, one of the world’s leading tire manufacturers, for $7.9 billion. Its other major purchases include French firms Adisseo and Rhodia, Australia’s Qenos, Norwegian silicon maker Elkem, German machinery maker Krauss Maffee, and 12% of Swiss energy trader Mercuria.
…The company is also looking to expand its presence in the domestic market. A merger with Syngenta would turn ChemChina into the country’s top pesticide company. This is no small undertaking, given that China is the world’s third largest pesticide market, after the US and Brazil. If foreign agrochemical companies were to be interested in investing in China’s vast market they would find themselves squeezed into a minor corner by a gigantic Syngenta-ChemChina combination.
ChemChina’s ambitions are part of a larger story. Chinese food and agriculture companies are moving abroad and starting to compete toe to toe with their Western counterparts and even buying them out. In 2013, China’s Shuanghui corporation bought Smithfield, the leading US pork company, for $7.1 billion, the largest ever purchase of a US company by Chinese investors.
Another Chinese company to watch is COFCO, the country’s leading food processor, which acquired a controlling stake in the Netherlands’ agricultural commodity trader Nidera. The majority stake in Nidera would give COFCO greater control over pricing and better access to Latin America and Russia, important grain-growing regions, the Wall Street Journal reported in 2014."
Once the deal is fully consummated, China could dictate where Western companies should proceed from hereon.
Will China continue the regressive direction of the food industry? Or, will it force the positive enhancements of food production drawing the lessons learned at l Loess Plateau, Central China?
It is estimated that even if only 10% of the population of the earth will do permaculture, it’s enough to feed the entire population.
Of course, we can always question China’s real motives, but judging from how the decades of Western control of Africa induces famine, hunger and endless ethnic conflicts, one needs to see only how Ethiopia achieved 11% economic growth after they have allowed China to participate in their economy.
While it’s true that China has been investing billions in Africa in exchange for access to its rich natural resources, it’s also true that the West has been plundering Africa’s resources for centuries just to satisfy its military industrial complex.
In deep contrast and in addition to China’s acquisition of Syngenta, it is also planning to create the largest solar power farm grid around the planet.
How then can we participate in the global effort to defeat the regressive group responsible for our collective misery and moral degradation?
We Need to Step Back
Humanity has reached the apex of its own capacity to inflict pain on itself.
Scientific advancements are all being used to manufacture great weapons of war; genetic engineering is being exploited to create plant and animal species only to increase production and profits rather than make people healthy, drugs and medicines are designed to make people sick, and the school system and mass media are making the people dumber.
The frequency and number of colorful protests against corporate abuses in the realm of education, food production and healthcare, banking and finance, are breaking previous records yet the benefits gained from these mass actions are disproportionately useless.
Corporations will just change the name of their products to circumvent the unfavorable regulations.
The belief that we still own the government we have right now is wasting a lot of time and effort in demanding that policies must be changed and enforcement of these policies must be done. It is time to accept the fact that big corporations own the government, and no matter how much we break our vocal chords shouting on the streets of the world, the government will never listen and will always serve the corporations which truly control it.
In order to make changes happen, we must understand how we arrived here.
First, we have been lured to come to the poorly designed cities where we could not grow our own organic food, and where we need to work in order to have access to the most resources basic for human survival.
Then, they supply us with industrialized processed food, neurotoxic vaccines and chemical drugs, where safer organic competitions from the countryside are deliberately stifled through the use of the police.
Consumerism has made us too vulnerable for totalitarian control later on.
The physical and psychological stresses of home mortgage and junk foods defeat the conveniences of city living. In fact, we cannot afford to describe it as living anymore, but merely surviving. We can’t go on with this same regressive trajectory. We cannot redesign our cities while most of us are still inside any of them.
We need to step back. We need to go back to the countryside and start growing our own food organically. We need to remove the power we’ve given them.
While building our organic permacultured farms, we must take all the bad urban experiences into consideration, and take the necessary measures to avoid them.
By doing so, we will be empowering ourselves, and that’s how we regain our long lost freedoms.
The Cult Of 'Scientism' Explained: How Scientific Claims Behind Cancer, Vaccines, Psychiatric Drugs And GMOs Are Nothing More Than Corporate-Funded Science Fraud April 27 2016 | From: NaturalNews
Sadly, what often passes for "science" today in the world of health is little more than "Scientism" - a dangerous cult founded on irrational dogma and faith-based beliefs in faulty, fraudulent ideas being paraded as science.
A common trait that weaves its way through every topic of "Scientism" is corporate profits. Any time something is being pushed with aggressive demands of "SCIENCE!" that also happens to enrich wealthy corporations, it's probably based on fraud, not real science. Perpetrators of fraudulent scientism include Paul Offit, Dr. David Gorski, Monsanto pal Bill Nye, discredited biotech shill and former Forbes.com writer Jon Entine and too many others to even name.
In this HealthRangerReport.com podcast, I explain the truth about the Cult of Scientism, sometimes called the "Church of Scientific Mysticism." This cult currently dominates the "official" dogma concerning vaccines, GMOs, fluoride, cancer, diabetes, pharmaceuticals, biosludge and more.
The Myth Of Mental Illness: Psychiatry Is A Fraud And It Is All About Control + “Opposition Defiant Disorder” - Non-Conformity And Anti-Authoritarianism Now Considered An Illness
April 27 2016 | From: Sott / WakeUpWorld / Various
Perhaps most radically, Thomas Szasz deemed mental illness a mythic and monstrous beast, and proclaimed that 'mental illness' was a fiction. Insanity, he has continued ever since to claim, is not a real disease, whose nature has been progressively scientifically unveiled; mental illness is rather a myth, forged by psychiatrists for their own greater glory.
Over the centuries, medical men and their supporters have been involved, argues Szasz, in a self-serving 'manufacture of madness.' In this, he indicts both the pretensions of organic psychiatry and the psychodynamic followers of Freud, whose notion of the 'unconscious' in effect breathed new life into the obsolete metaphysical Cartesian dualism.
For Szasz, any expectation of finding the etiology of mental illness in body or mind - above all in some mental underworld - must be a lost cause, a dead-end, a linguistic error, and even an exercise in bad faith.
'Mental illness' or the 'unconscious' are not realities but at best metaphors. In promoting such ideas, psychiatrists have either been involved in improper cognitive imperialism or have rather naively pictorialized the psyche - reifying the fictive substance behind the substantive.
Properly speaking, contends Szasz, insanity is not a disease with origins to be excavated, but a behavior with meanings to be decoded. Social existence is a rule-governed game-playing ritual in which the mad person bends the rules and exploits the loopholes.
Since the mad person is engaged in social performances that obey certain expectations so as to defy others, the pertinent questions are not about the origins, but about the conventions, of insanity. In this light, Szasz dismisses traditional approaches to the history of madness, as questions mal post and aims to reformulate them.
[From: Porter, R., Introduction, in Porter, R. and Wright, D., eds.,The Confinement of the Insane: International Perspectives, 1800-1965(Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2003)]
If Albert Einstein was a youth today, there’s a good chance he would be saddled with an Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder (ADHD) diagnosis, possibly even Opposition Defiant Disorder (ODD) as well. He ignored his teachers, failed college entrance examinations several times and was hard-pressed in holding down a job.
In ‘Einstein: The Life and Times‘, biographer Ronald Clark argues that Einstein’s problem wasn’t attention deficits at all, but rather a hatred of authoritarian, Prussian influences in school.
“The teachers in the elementary school appeared to me like sergeants and in the gymnasium the teachers were like lieutenants,” Einstein once remarked.
The fact that he read Kant’s difficult Critique of Pure Reason for pleasure is quite revealing. He also refused to prepare for college admissions out of rebellion to his father’s “unbearable” path of “practical profession.” When he did gain entrance to college, one of his professors chided Einstein, “You have one fault; one can’t tell you anything.” The very characteristics that troubled authorities, were exactly the ones which helped him to excel.
Considering Einstein’s life history, it makes one wonder about the rampant use of ADHD and ODD diagnosis that are plaguing our children and teenagers today. According to the statistical research by Russell Barkley, Ph.D., on average for every 30 children, 1-3 have ADHD.
Of these children, 65% have issues with defiance, non-compliance and problems with authority figures, which can manifest as verbal hostility and temper tantrums. It’s estimated that between 1-16% of all American children have ODD. The real question, however, is not how many diagnosis there have been, but rather should we be looking at ADHD and ODD as a mental illness in the first place?
The Age of Excessive Diagnosis, Conformity and Over-Medication
For these children, sitting still in a classroom - under fluorescent lighting and being bombarded with EMFs from cell phones and wi-fi - completely removed from the natural world and pumped full of preservatives, artificial additives, GMOs, pesticides and sugar, is simply impossible.
Their sensitive bodies and minds cannot take the onslaught. Instead of extending outdoor time and cleaning up the diet, recess has been slashed and poor quality food remains the norm. Worse, they are drugged into submission with the likes of Evekeo, Adderall, Concerta and Ritalin - several of which are amphetamines. (For more on this topic, please see: The Fictions Surrounding ADHD and the “Chemical Imbalance” Theory of Mental Illness.)
A 2009 Psychiatric Times article titled “ADHD & ODD: Confronting the Challenges of Disruptive Behavior” reports that “disruptive disorders,” which include attention deficit hyperactivity disorder (ADHD) and opposition defiant disorder (ODD), are the most common mental health problem of children and teenagers.
ADHD is defined by poor attention and distractibility, poor self-control and impulsivity, and hyperactivity.
ODD is defined as a “a pattern of negativistic, hostile, and defiant behavior without the more serious violations of the basic rights of others that are seen in conduct disorder”; and ODD symptoms include “often actively defies or refuses to comply with adult requests or rules” and “often argues with adults.”
One of the leading mainstream mental health’s authorities on ADHD, psychologist Russell Barkley believes that those afflicted with ADHD are deficient in what he classifies as “rule-governed behavior,” since they are less open to established authorities and not as responsive to positive or negative consequences.
Those with ODD also have these so-called deficits. Because of this, it’s exceptionally common for young people to be diagnosed with both ADHD and ODD.
But as Levine rightly observes, “Do we really want to diagnose and medicate everyone with “deficits in rule-governed behavior”?
Some of our greatest freethinkers throughout history were non-conformists and challenged authority. At what point do we simply become a nation of zombies, drugged out on pharmaceuticals, unable to think for ourselves?
People have become increasingly socialized to associate inattention, anger, anxiety and paralyzing despair with a medical condition, and subsequently rely on medical intervention instead of political remedies.
“What better way to maintain the status quo than to view inattention, anger, anxiety, and depression as biochemical problems of those who are mentally ill rather than normal reactions to an increasingly authoritarian society,” said Levine.
He believes we desperately need anti-authoritarians to question, test and oppose illegitimate authorities and regain trust in their own common sense.
And yet, we’re moving into deeper authoritarian waters by the day. A good example is the newest addition of the DSM-IV (Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders). ODD is actually a new label in the manual, defined as “ongoing pattern of disobedient, hostile and defiant behavior,” where symptoms include negativity, questioning authority, argumentativeness and irritability.
ODD joins the ranks of other, newly created mental illnesses —‘disorders’ like arrogance, narcissism, exceptional creativity, cynicism and antisocial tendencies. Keep in mind that over the last 50 years, the manual has been prolific in creating new afflictions, with the total number of ‘mental illness’ classifications rising from 130 to 357.
"Another danger is that childhood eccentricities, sometimes inextricable from creativity, might be labeled “disorders” to be “cured.” If 7-year-old Mozart tried composing his concertos today, he might be diagnosed with attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder and medicated into barren normality."
In the face of such bizarre and chilling authoritarian mental illness classifications, the famous quote by Jiddu Krishnamurti comes to mind:
"It is no measure of health to be well adjusted to a profoundly sick society."
About the Author:
Carolanne Wright enthusiastically believes if we want to see change in the world, we need to be the change. As a nutritionist, natural foods chef and wellness coach, Carolanne has encouraged others to embrace a healthy lifestyle of organic living, gratefulness and joyful orientation for over 13 years.
Through her website Thrive-Living.net, she looks forward to connecting with other like-minded people from around the world who share a similar vision. You can also follow Carolanne on Facebook, Twitter and Pinterest.
Never before in history have the masses had instant access to information about the dark side of the Evil Establishment Hierarchy and the Select Few wrinkled up old mass-murderers and perverts that run it.
For the first time in history deep state secrets and previously hidden information about the secret Babylonian Talmudic Occult Network has been made readily available to the common man.
This has occurred because of the Worldwide Internet and its Alternative Media.
These disclosures are only going to increase and this will be followed by the whole world turning against the evil beasts who secretly control the levers of power, and there will be increasingly powerful mass demands and efforts to bring them to justice.
This is creating pressure on the existing USG and American societal controllers which are run, lock stock and barrel by the Khazarian Mafia (KM).
The KM is best described as the Hierarchy, which is based on a secret Babylonian Talmudic occult network of what most refer to as the Mystery religions.
There is unprecedented access to information about the secret world of the Babylonian Talmudic Occult Network (aka Synagogue of Satan, Illuminati, the Olympiads) that has controlled most human institutions for hundreds of years.
This Occult Network has exerted such control by establishing and repeatedly deploying a well-defined method of infiltration and hijacking, followed by the formation of a pyramidal Hierarchy, which takes parasitical control and runs all authorities in the state and federal governments of nations.
Creating, manufacturing and distributing debt-notes and passing laws which require them to be accepted as real money lent out at pernicious compounding interest to those who should have owned it in the first place is one of the greatest Hierarchy tricks ever conceived. This is referred to by insiders as the black art of Babylonian Talmudic “money-magick” or the “Baby”.
Once the Hierarchy has complete control, major asset stripping of the people begins and the fruit of their labors and accrued wealth is stolen by a crafty means, best referred to as Babylonian Money-Magick. This is the ancient art of creating debt notes out of thin air and “renting” them to the user citizens at pernicious usury.
Other key tricks are deployed by the Hierarchy to speed up the asset stripping of not only the nation which is occupied, but such methods are deployed against other nations for asset stripping too, which is usually the gaining of cheap access to steal the nations’ natural resources and minerals.
See the National Debt Clock running in real time for any country here
A favorite trick is to invest money to create monstrous social problems in order to justify an increase in taxes and government spending. This results in rapidly increasing wealth transferred from the people to the Hierarchy.
Thus in America, they had the War on Poverty which created so much more; the War on Drugs, which created the wealthy drug cartels for the Hierarchy; and the War on Terror, which has resulted in so many illegal, unConstitutional wars of acquisition to bring more money and power to the Hierarchy.
Of course mind-kontrolling the people through a completely controlled Major Mass Media run by six Media Corporations that answer to the Hierarchy top Policy-makers (the Hierarchy leaders) has allowed the Hierarchy in America to convince the people that Americans are the good guys and need to be the World’s Policemen.
Click on the image above to view a larger version in a new window
This of course is a blatant lie and serves to justify all the illegal, unConstitutional, unprovoked, undeclared, unwinnable, perpetual wars that provide more power and money to the Hierarchy and its associated “bloodline families”, banks and no-bid defense contractors.
These tricks also include the old British trick of “Divide and Conquer”, which is the methodology of paying agitators to create needless conflicts in order to create mass social unrest, terrorist acts or violence.
"The 'Divide and Conquer' principle has been successfully implemented on our planet and is being used very effectively to keep us under control and in a perpetual state of conflict."
- Michael Tellinger
The increasing use of Gladio-style False-flag “inside-job” engineered, staged terror attacks and mass shootings in gun-free zones (some real, some faked using a large number of professional crisis actors) should not be ignored.
Charging the American people interest to use what should have been real money owned by them in the first place is not only unConstitutional, it is illegal, because it constitutes RICO crime and financial fraud. There is no statute of limitations for fraud until it is discovered.
Once the asset stripping of the host being parasitized is complete, usually all that remains is a destroyed nation and a broken, starving and dying people.
This is often followed by a the Hierarchy reconstructing a new host to later completely parasitize. China and Malaysia are the next planned hosts, and this will occur after building them up over many years to provide a fat new source to take over and asset strip, thus repeating the pattern once again; unless of course the Hierarchy is stopped cold by the World.
And right now several powerful groups inside and some nations outside of America are now going after the Hierarchy with a vengeance for all the evil that has been uncovered and linked to their top Policy-makers, who are wrinkled-up old demon-possessed, mass-murders and pedophiles.
This is being done by deploying sophisticated covert operations and psyops to take the Hierarchy apart at the seams by exposing their money fraud and war crimes, and by instituting powerful but subtle rear-guard actions to restore the US Constitution inside America.
Another Hierarchy crafty trick is to infiltrate and hijack all media corporations and consolidate them into a small number of Major Mass Media Corporations which they control together, and actually technically constitute a virtual cartel, that is, an illegal monopoly.
This same crafty practice is done to all other industries through their various corporations. Various crafty tricks, like using the FBI program Infragard to deputize corporate security and mind-kontrol them into a fear-based perspective with shoot to kill authority is also being done.
In this way, the Hierarchy has been able to infiltrate, hijack and take over almost every major corporation and industry in America.
When the Gutenberg Press was finally manufactured and placed into service, it resulted in the wide distribution of bibles and other information never before available.
This was a great blow to the Vatican, which at the time, forbade the commoner from reading the Bible, or of gaining an understanding of church policies that were based on aberrant traditions within the church, rather than what the prophets, Jesus and his disciples taught.
The Gutenberg Press also resulted in the wide distribution of newspapers and books, but nonetheless, it was still easy for the Hierarchy to limit the secret information by which they operated, because they could easily sanction those who came forth and tried to inform the people.
Besides, up until recently most individuals have been so deeply mind-kontrolled by the Hierarchy, that even when told the truth is told, it seems incredible and will not fit into the listeners’ minds.
That is now rapidly changing due to the emergence of the Worldwide Internet, the New Electronic Gutenberg Press, where information is transmitted at the speed of light to millions all around the world. We users have gained instant access to extensive libraries, documents and historical accounts.
Despite the vast amounts of limited hangout misinformation, serious researchers can easily gain access to a great deal of useful background information on any subject.
The advent of the cell phone and iPod-type handheld devices have just added to this instant access to information and have produced the ability to gain and maintain constant communication with others, which was not possible before.
These two major developments have changed the way individuals think about information. They feel it is their right to have instant access to all the facts on any subject, and this has created an expectation for openness by their government in all matters.
This expectation for full disclosure and full access to all government practices and facts is growing by the day and is best described as a powerful spontaneously emerging populism.
The American people are now rejecting the credibility of the Controlled major Mass Media (CMMM), and this rejection of the CMMM is increasing by the day, as so many turn to the Alternative News now available all over the Worldwide Web.
The Hierarchy’s use of Mind-kontrol to convince Americans we are the good guys and the policeman of the World, has actually led to the expectation that our own government should be moral too, and respectful of God-given human rights.
As many in American Intel, the Military and the USG, who have unknowingly served the Hierarchy and its top policy-makers are finding out about the increasing criminality and anti-human acts they have become manipulated into, many are rebelling and going public about what they have learned.
Due to all the recent leaks, high level whistleblower declarations and insider deathbed confessions, many, who were previously ignorant due to strong compartmenting and need-to-know-only access to upper levels of evil Hierarchy practices, are now catching on and secretly turning against the Hierarchy and the policies of the Select Few.
Most of these new secret dissidents are not willing to throw themselves on a sword or speak out and lose their jobs and retirement, but if there were a serious “door to door” attempt by the USG to disarm the American People, they would quickly join the side of We The People and function as extreme warriors with the American People against the Hierarchy.
Certainly, if a serious civil war would break out, there would be an instant military coup d’état; and the top Hierarchy traitors would become instant, serious targets for vigilante justice by some experienced special ops soldiers.
Some of the recent disclosures about Hierarchy evils are not only astounding, but are completely unexpected.
Take General Wesley Clark who went public and disclosed how the Hierarchy plan was to invade seven nations in five years.
Many wondered how General Clark would dare disclose such secret Hierarchy information without fear of termination. The answer is that secret factions inside the American Military and Intel (especially Intel) have emerged that are very powerful because of their role in the secret Alien ET-oriented Majestic Group.
These powerful new factions back such disclosures, and the Hierarchy is afraid to sanction such individuals as General Wesley Clark because they know there would be swift and serious retaliation.
If you doubt this is true, just stop and ask yourself, how in the heck does VT dare to publish the insider facts it does, such as who did 9-11-01, and the fact it involved stolen nukes deployed by Israel and traitors in the US High Command, or how ISIS is a private mercenary army, a secret coalition of Israel Likudists, Turkey, Saudi Arabia, the UK and the CIA, or so many more insider facts? Obviously VT has had some serious muscle behind it for these disclosures to occur.
"The big battle now being fought in secret is between the Hierarchy’s leadership which is comprised of the Khazarian Mafia’s top crime Kingpins, the Select Few, and their powerful cutouts, versus these new and powerful secret factions of the US Military and Intel and similar groups in other nations."
These new factions have easy access to these two-faced evil monsters of deceit who are attempting to create hell on Earth in order to get ever increasingly rich at the people’s expense and in order to attain their age-old Globalist Agenda.
Yes, the individuals in these new powerful factions know that some of their international “Cosmic Intel” groups can be picked off upon the orders of the Hierarchy, but they also know that they can quickly follow suit because these Hierarchy Kingpins bleed and die just like they do.
So far this mutually recognized knowledge has produced a checkmate and rules of play have evolved similar to those of the Knights of the Round-table and this battle royal has remained limited to being fought somewhat fair and square through the usual methods involving psyops and strategic geo-economics. And the new factions seem to be winning.
Putin and the Russian Federation are the visible example of this with their complete checkmate of the Hierarchy (Khazarian Mafia) in Syria and Iran.
However, these new factions realize that the Hierarchy murdered the Russian Tsar Nicholas II and his Romanov family in on July 16, 1918 in order to eradicate his whole bloodline and to steal all of Russia’s riches, such as gold, silver and jewels (which have never been returned, but probably will be seized some day not too far off by the Russian Federation).
A good bet is that if the Hierarchy made any serious moves to escalate against these powerful new factions, these new factions would quickly adapt the same rules of play the Hierarchy has used for hundreds of years against those it judges weak or unable to defend themselves.
But there is one more big danger lurking for the Hierarchy Kingpins. That is the growing awareness among We The People of the identities of who the Hierarchy Kingpins are, and all the evil they have been doing to take away our God-given Rights. These were the rights that have supposed to have been guaranteed by the US Constitution.
But there is also a growing awareness of We The People that the Hierarchy has set up a fraudulent private central bank that is asset stripping us of the fruits of our labor and accrued wealth using fake money Debt-notes and pernicious usury for renting what should have been our own real money in the first place.
A tipping point appears to now be fast approaching, and it is likely that any more seriously or significantly increased Hierarchy actions against We The People could set off a civil war followed by immediate application of the Hierarchy’s rules of play against the Hierarchy itself.
My guess is that should the Hierarchy persist with their recent new efforts to disarm Americans or continue to tamper with and fake the election process giving us a Potus not wanted, We the People could easily go ballistic and begin to immediate accept the same rules of play that the Hierarchy has used against them and other victims like the Russian Tsar Nicholas II and his family.
The Hierarchy is still energized and empowered by its unlimited access to, and elastic endless supply of US Debt notes, aka the US Petro Dollar; but its value is now waning by the day; and their US Petro Dollar will soon be weakened and dead. So far this battle is being fought using the rules similar to the Knights of the Roundtable, such as do not go after one’s family and play by the “rules”.
Certainly Putin and the Russian Federation have done a great job completely checkmating the Khazarian Mafia’s establishment Hierarchy and its leaderships during its legal defense of Syria, a long term ally.
Russian Federation air power is now the best in the World and has crushed the mercenary forces hired by Israel, Turkey, Saudi Arabia, the UK and America who have been pretending they are the official Islamic State Army. In doing this, Putin and the Russian Federation have checkmated the Khazarian Mafia and its Establishment Hierarchy in Syria.
It has been rumored by insiders that ISIS stands for Israeli Secret Intelligence Services mercenary army. ISIS has turned out to be a major massive disposal operation against all the hired mercenaries, including mind-kontrolled Islamic extremists and Blackwater-type mercenaries. Right now thousands of these “ISIS” mercenaries are trapped in a pincer type action in Syria with no way out. Complete defeat is at hand, despite all the secret supply drops by US aircraft for the CIA who has been secretly supplying ISIS.
There have been numerous deathbed confessions of high USG officials and scientists involved in the Alien ET matters. More and more individuals are coming forth by the day and telling about the secret crimes of the USG cutouts who serve the Hierarchy
We are now seeing an unprecedented number of federal whistle-blowers who are disclosing a great deal about USG and Hierarchy crimes.
Because the Hierarchy routinely invokes “National Security” to keep their crimes secret and uses it as a justification to prosecute and harass whistleblowers, many have been imprisoned and lost everything; many are then seriously harassed, gang-stalked by US Intel or military contractors, and then placed on “No Work under any circumstances” lists.
This has been done on a continuing basis to individuals like Mark Novitsky, who is a great American Hero. The FBI is now recognized by many insiders to be a KM-owned and operated RICO crime organization, with no official charter according to the Library of Congress, and thus has no right to exist (having no real jurisdiction outside of DC).
The FBI deploys agents and assets to follow Novitsky around, harass and gang-stalk him with almost continual deployment of advanced psychotronics. All because DHS and the FBI have wrongly labeled him as a so-called “domestic terrorist”, when he has served us all by exposing massive illegal spying and corruption. Novitsky is telling the truth about the harassment; I personally swept his home with advanced German EMF-sensing equipment and the equipment was red-lined.
Yes, many whistle-blowers are great American Heroes and have paid a heavy price, such as Gwenyth Todd and Sibel Edmonds, Scott Bennett, or Susan Lindauer.
Gwenyth Todd is credited with stopping a full-scale aerial attack on Iran by the American Military by providing important disclosures to the right High Command individuals, while going up against malevolent power in doing so.
These important disclosures of criminal acts, which prevented a planned illegal, unConstitutional war, were followed by cancellation of her security clearances, an attempt to illegally capture her, and an attempt by the FBI to arrange her kidnapping and assassination while living in exile in Australia.
Technically, misusing National Security to keep Hierarchy crimes secret is a serious RICO crime, and constitutes sedition and treason. However, the Hierarchy is a foreign-based enemy of America, and is working hard to destroy America’s constitutional republic. The treatment of each of these American Heroes is simply disgusting, not to mention that those responsible should be indicted arrested tried, convicted and hung for treason.
Edward Snowden’s disclosures have raised expectations and have sped up this process of complete disclosure, which cannot be stopped no matter how desperate the Hierarchy becomes or how tyrannically they attempt to oppress We The People using their Homeland Security and Militarized American police.
Any such extreme efforts, like trying to disarm Americans going door to door or using DHS to lock down whole cities would only result in serious backlash.
Once you anger Americans, an incredibly potent sleeping giant, if you are their enemy, they will get you no matter what, and will never give up until you are brought to final judgment.
Despite all the massive CMMM Mind-kontrol and massive Psychotronics that have been deployed to pacify and suppress the awareness of the American masses, it is growing by the day, as more and more Americans learn about the Hierarchy and the Khazarian Mafia mobsters, the World’s largest and most powerful criminals who run it.
Almost everything major that occurs in government and society is a byproduct of the secret policies mandated to be fulfilled by the Hierarchy by the Select Few who occupy the top leadership positions of the Hierarchy.
These are usually wrinkled up old Satan worshipers that have been creating and spreading evil, chaos, disease, suffering and mass death in order to make vast profits for the Hierarchy for many years.
When they set a new policy such as “we must disarm all Americans”, this order is passed down through the whole Hierarchy at each level until it reaches the street level in your neighborhood.
The Hierarchy’s ability to create as many debt-notes as it needs to set up and finance sophisticated Non-Governmental Organizations (NGOs) to apply massive social pressure to susceptible members of the public to support such efforts gives the Hierarchy massive persuasive power.
Hero Edward Snowden was one of the first who exposed deep criminal acts by the NSA and its private no-bid contractors. His disclosures of major USG, Intel and private defense contractor RICO crime has forever changed the view of average Americans’ view of their own USG and Intel systems as being honest and set up to protect them, to a view that these Agencies have become deeply evil tools of the Hierarchy and are now hard at work to destroy America and spy on, tyrannize and oppress the American People. Many Americans now view these Agencies and private contractors as deeply criminal and in immediate need to be completely broken up and cleaned up.
It is important to understand the various layers of the Hierarchy, which are arranged to be progressively more powerful as one reaches the next higher level. Criminal initiation rites are associated with appointment to any level, and these initiations become increasingly deviant and feloniously criminal as one rises to each higher level by successfully completing the base requirements and the initiation rites, which are videoed to use for later blackmail if ever needed to keep a recruit within their allowed parameters.
Members at each level report to a superior who functions as their handler and they have only been given information about the Hierarchy that is relevant to that specific level; therefore, any secret information given to them about the Hierarchy is always based on need to know.
The extreme compartmenting is similar to all Intel Agencies and keeps many low to mid-level members from observing the evil the Hierarchy produces or the evil the Top Leaders enact at their secret Satanic rituals - rituals which often involve pedophilic sex magic and child sacrifice.
As the Hierarchy is deconstructed and as many of their deep secrets of unimaginable evil are revealed to lower level members, a significant number will side with the populist forces that are emerging and will quickly sell out the Select Few and the top Hierarchy command structure.
In addition, various Hierarchy money fronts and lobbyists are used to funnel vast bribes to Members of Congress to get their intended legislation passed to promote increasingly unConstitutional gun laws in progression, which are intended to eventually lead to complete disarmament.
Of course, new false-flags in gun-free zones will probably be deployed to create mass fear to motivate the masses to support unConstitutional new laws to disarm the American People.
Because these top Hierarchy leaders, the Select Few, are old and losing their reasoning ability, they are falling into a serious trap with efforts to disarm the American people.
This would never be accepted, and if pushed too hard would set off massive rebellion of We The People, a certain civil war, and a major military coup d’etat. If a civil war would erupt, many in the military would defect and join We The People, and the same would go for many American Police and even many who work for the DHS which is really little more than an Israeli secret police occupation army.
The contractors and guards who are supposed to be keeping USG and DHS armories and ammunition supplies secure would open the doors to We The People. Right now, at least 5-10% of all such munitions and armaments are being ripped off and sold for money on the black market.
Numerous shipments exist only on paper and are never shipped but only billed, much like that which occurred in the Korean, Vietnam and Mideast wars. This has made some contractors and the bloodline families that own their stock very wealthy.
Because of the increasing popularity of the alternative media on the Worldwide Internet, the World’s New Gutenberg press, we are seeing an end to secrecy in progressive steps.
This is being orchestrated by the new kid on the block, the Third Force, which could perhaps soon take over and crush the Hierarchy, the Select Few and their Cutouts and the Satanic, pedophilic, child-sacrificing Babylonian Talmudic Khazarian Mafia (Zionists, aka Sionists), of which it is a byproduct.
This website is optimised for viewing in Mozilla Firefox